Home

MetaMap Manager User Guide

1. You need not code an EXIT command at the end of each procedure An exit is implied by a BEGIN command or the end of the input command stream Example The EXIT command is illustrated by the report group procedure below There the last three procedural commands will be executed only when there is no record found in the keyed EMPLOYEE MASTER file for an employee on the payroll file BEGIN REPORT 1 GROUP GET EMPLOYEE MASTER KEY PD EMPLOYEE NUMBER IF EMPLOYEE MASTER SYS IO STATUS EQ SYS OK EXIT EMPLOYEE NUMBER PD EMPLOYEE NUMBER SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER 0 EMPLOYEE NAME MISSING Kal When the GET command is successful De the status returned from the get operation is ok the final three commands of the procedure are bypassed If the random access is unsuccessful however those fields to be printed from the keyed employee record are reset so that information from the prior keyed employee record is not reported with the current payroll file data FOR END FOR The FOR END FOR command is used to repeat a series of commands a number of times The block of commands that will be repeated starts behind the FOR statement and ends when END FOR is met Format FOR counter start value TO end value BY step value content of the procedure END FOR STRUCTURED EDITOR
2. 8000 PPTIPT parameter file error or parameter error encountered 8001 Too much records to load for External Array Processing stopped 8002 Data validation error while loading External Array Processing stopped 8003 Number of data validation errors exceeded SYS ERROR LIMIT Processing stopped 8004 Sort returned with an error 8005 A field value overflow has occurred on a numeric field 8006 Computational error has occurred on a numeric field 8007 I O error or Connect error has occurred 8008 Source File TargetFile open error has occurred 8009 Exception error on INVOKE 8010 Input Sort Error or EXTRACT SORT File Output Error Processing stopped TRANSFORMATION PROGRAMS 171 Code Meaning 8011 Input Sort Output to SORTWORK Error Processing stopped 8012 Extract File Write Error Processing stopped 8013 Extract File Open Input Error Processing stopped 8014 Extract File Open Output Error Processing stopped 8015 Target Sort Error Processing Stopped 8016 Target Sort File Write Error Processing Stopped 8018 Target File Write Error or IMS Insert record error Processing Stopped 8020 Source File Close Error has occurred Processing Stopped 8024 Extract File Close Error has occurred Processing Stopped 8028 Target File Close Error has occurred Processing Stopped 8030 A character field value error has occurred Processing Stopped File Status Codes This is a list o
3. Sort Fields None _ cancel The following fields are available Field Meaning Automatic This field applies for all Source File types By default this checkbox is selected This means that the source file will be read completely and sequentially Clear this checkbox if you want that MetaSuite automatically retrieves a record based on a key value each time it reads a record from a Controlling File which you define in the Controlled By selection box For more information on specifying Control Keys refer to the section Control Key page 55 Manual This checkbox only applies for IDMS Source Files Select this checkbox if you want to program the access commands to the IDMS database manually using in a Program Initial or an Initial Sort Procedure Clear this checkbox if you want MetaSuite to generate the access commands automatically Note If you select this checkbox the Automatic checkbox automatically becomes cleared IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 DATA SOURCES 92 Field Meaning Special Write Only This checkbox only applies for Standard Source Files Select this checkbox if you want to be able to write Records TO this Source File during the execution of the Model By activating this option the File although defined as a Source File is considered as a Target It is empty when the program starts and it is filled with data during the execution If you select this checkbox
4. e ALTER e CLOSE e CREATE e DECLARE e DELETE e DROP EXECUTE e FETCH e OPEN STRUCTURED EDITOR 206 e PREPARE e SELECT s SET e UPDATE It is clear that those SQL commands must be supported by your SQL database also For more information about the syntax of those commands refer to the SQL guide of the database in question Host Variables Host variables are variables that are known to the SQL environment as well as to the COBOL environment A semi colon prefixes every host variable MetaSuite does not support occurring host variables External array variables are not supported either They are also occurring Examples BEGIN SYS LOCAL INP T1 1 KAN1 GX FROM DAT W DAT1 H EXEC SQL INSERT INTO UDM V93IKAN1 IKNR I2NR GX_FROM_DAT GX_TO_DAT VALUES IKAN1 IKNR IKAN1 I2NR IKAN1 GX FROM DAT IKAN1 GX TO DAT END EXEC IF SQLCODE NE D AND SQLCODE NE 803 TxtII Error TEXT K Error Insert DO SYS LOCAL INP T1 6 EXEC SQL SET ol ADD_MONTHS LAST_DAY W DATE 1 END EXEC EXEC SQL UPDATE UDM VWZ1 SET G_B_DAT QF0146 QF0147 WHERE DNNR QF0141 AND FANR QF0142 AND G_V_DAT QF0145 END EXEC Null Status Field Support The fields that are indicated as INNULL OUTNULL or OUTNULR will be filled automatically when usi
5. ELSE W DEPARTMENTTEXT DEPARTMENT DESCRIPTION WK KEY Tree Example The following commands could be used to find the description of a certain department SOURCEFILE DEPARTMENT CODES TREE DEPARTMENT DATA OCCURS 10 FIELD WK KEY TYPE BINARY SIZ al ws STRUCTURED EDITOR 276 FIELD W DEPARTMENTTEXT TYPE CHARACTER SIZE 20 ETAIL 1 DEPARTMENT W DEPARTMENTTEXT T 1 INPUT ET DEPARTMENT CODES KEY DEPARTMENT K KEY DEPARTMENT CODES SYS DIRECT KEY IF WK KEY EQ 0 SG GD D DW Q t H Zz D Wel O D ELSE W DEPARTMENTTEXT DEPARTMENT DESCRIPTION WK KEY SYS INPUT COUNT The SYS INPUT COUNT field is defined automatically in all generated programs for each Source File or its records It contains a count of records read and processed for the named Source File i e all records read and not excluded from within Source File or record input procedures or because of validation errors Do not confuse this field with the SYS READ COUNT which contains a count of all records read from the Source File including those records excluded for any reason Format SourceFile name SourceRecord name SYS INPUT COUNT SourceFile name When SourceFile name is given the
6. Z The Model will be saved in the current file format 22 2 22 3 CALLING THE METAMAP MANAGER IN BATCH 317 Command msbmap i MetaSuite ini f ex0 msm Results Metasuite MetaMap Manager Batch Tool Version 08 01 02 Build 267 No path information specified FOR INI file assuming C Documents and Set tings fib Application Data MetaSuite Logging on as Metasuit to database Metasuit at server MetaStore 813 MsAccess Caching completed The dictionary MetaSuite MetaStore contains 61 files uer sions included Generating D Program Files IKAN Solutions MetaSuite813 MSM ex0 msm S Started loading of D Program Files IKAN Solutions MetaSuite813 MSM ex0 msm The version 1 of Dictionary File employ master was used in your program However the version 2 is the latest version of the Dictionary File employ mas ter in MetaStore Which file do you want to use Started loading of D Program Files IKAN Solutions MetaSuite813 MSM ex0 msm OK Generating EXO Successful completion Batch command s succeeded MSBMAP Return Codes There are two possible Return Codes after an MSBMAP run 0 zero Export successful A message is written to stdout 4 Export failed An appropriate message is written to stdout and to the msbmap log file This file is located in the MetaSuite Temporary folder Calling MetaMap Manager Via the Commandline MetaMap Manager can be called by means of the fol
7. max work field Indicates that the named work field is to contain the maximum value of No all occurrences of field name processed by the COMPUTE command mean work field Indicates that the named work field is to contain the mean value of all No occurrences of field name processed by the COMPUTE command Examples Example 1 Execution rules While pre processing the EMPLOYEE MASTER file to calculate the count total value and mean value of the ANNUAL SALARY field for all salaried employees PAY CODE 2 the following initial Source File procedure might be coded BEGIN SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER INITIAL IF PAY CODE NE 2 EXCLUDE COMPUTE ANNUAL SALARY EMPLOYEE COUNT COUNT TOTAL SALARY VALUE AVG SALARY MEAN SORT ANNUAL SALARY DESCENDING EMPLOYEE COUNT TOTAL SALARY and AVG SALARY are assumed to be numeric work fields defined in the program request At the completion of the initial procedure for the EMPLOYEE MASTER file the values of these fields will be set to the count total salary amount and average salary amount respectively of the ANNUAL SALARY fields for salaried employees These values can then be referenced in any subsequent Source File Report or Target File procedure contained in the program request STRUCTURED EDITOR 196 Example 2 Statistics Assume that you want to produce a report of only those salaried employees whose annual salary is greater than the mean annual salary for all salar
8. Source Field Properties Name Dictionary Field MRM EMPLOYEE NUMBER MRM EMPLOYEE DATA kel 5 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the section Fields page 88 6 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Source Field and its symbol E are displayed in the Tree View window 7 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model 8 18 DATA SOURCES 88 Fields The following fields are available e Name page 88 e Dictionary Field page 88 Name This field is updated automatically with the name of the Source Field you selected when adding the Source Field If required you can change the name in this field The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree Window It can contain up to 32 characters Dictionary Field This read only field displays the name of the Dictionary Field You can click the Browse button next to it to display its properties Sub Source Fields for a Parameter File Sub Source Fields are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Source Field for a Parameter File Note This option is only available if not all Sub Source Fields have been added Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Parameter File Record and Field are displayed 3 Right click the Source Fiel
9. U fe TOL DERARTMENT Eh PAY CODE ln TOL ERT CODE E JOB TITLE CODE AAA 101 308 TITLE CODE E DATE OF HIRE ln 19D ATE OF HIRE E ANNUAL SALARY 101 ANNUAL SALARY L PAY RATE A 10 ay RATE L EMPLOYEE NAME ln lgl T L EMPLOYEE NAME ef STREET ADDRESS ln 191 STREET ADDRESS Sef CITY ADDRESS AAA 101 crTy ADDRESS L STATE CODE Aaa 101 STATE CODE j ZIP CODE J 101 71P CODE joo SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER 1 SOCTAL SECURITY NUMBE ceo SECURITY CLEARANCE CODE PPM i TDL SECURITY CLEARANCE C S E VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS gl TO1 VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS j VOLT YP J a 701 VOL TYPE LE VOL CODE J pa 7101 VOL CODE i E 1 T01 VoL Amount IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 TEST DATA WIZARD 160 9 Optionally you can add User defined or System Functions 9 1 Double click a field in the Target column The following screen is displayed T Function Type Specify the function type for the target field User Function 5 System Function Data List About this method Select user function from the list 9 2 Select the type of function you want to use for the Target field and click OK The following options are available e User Function System Function e Data List 9 3 lf you select User Functio
10. Note If you do not need the assisted mode you can switch it off using the icon in the Edit Toolbar 2 Select the required command by clicking it The command will be added to the Workspace Any error messages or warnings are displayed underneath the Commands Workspace 3 Once you have finished entering the commands click the Stop Edit icon 5 The Procedure is verified If syntax errors are found the errors message are displayed underneath the Workspace PROGRAM PROCEDURES 147 4 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model kd icon on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model 11 3 Business Tab The following fields are available on the Business tab e Business Rule page 147 e Note page 147 Business Rule In this field you can enter a description of the Program Procedure Ifyou want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter Notes for this Program Procedure Ifyou want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R CHAPTER 12 Public Procedures Public Procedures are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned directly to a Model Apart from Public Procedures it is also possible to assign Data Sources page 49 Data Targets page 104 Program Pr
11. TESTING FOR A VALUE NOT EQUAL TO ANY OF THE VALUES IN A LIST This type of conditional expression is actually an abbreviated format of a compound conditional expression where field name is always the same the conditional operator is always NE and all components of the compound expression are joined by the word AND That could be coded as follows DO SYS LOCAL INP T1 1 WHILE DEPARTMENT NE 1 AND DEPARTMENT NE 3 When a list of values follows the relational operator NE in a conditional expression each value in the list is compared to the value of field name in sequence as specified If the named field is not equal to any of the specified values the condition is considered to be true STRUCTURED EDITOR 302 However the first time a test fails i e the first time the field value is found to be equal to one of the specified values the condition is considered to be false and no further tests are performed See Example 2 Testing for a value not equal to any of the values in a list on page 304 TESTING FOR A RANGE OF VALUES It is sometimes necessary to determine whether or not the value of a field lies within a specific range of values See Example 3 Testing for a range of values on page 305 TESTING THE ABSENCE OF A RANGE OF VALUES Conversely to the inclusive range option you may want to take a particular action only when a field is not within a specified range of values See Example 4 Testing the
12. DETAIL 3 field DETAIL 4 field BEGIN REPORT 1 INPUT IF SYS LINE NUMBER GE 52 SYS LINE NUMBER 999 If there is no SORT option for the report the output lines are printed as they are prepared SYS LINE NUMBER can be referenced in a report detail procedure to control printing of detail lines as shown above If there is a SORT option for the report the output detail lines are released to the sort utility and then written to a temporary work file The report is printed after the detail lines are sorted It is during this printing that SYS LINE NUMBER can be used with a sorted report However the only procedure that can be used at this point in processing is a report total procedure to process accumulated totals and print total lines Therefore you cannot use SYS LINE NUMBER to control printing of detail lines in a sorted report SYS PAGE NUMBER The SYS PAGE NUMBER field a 5 digit numeric field that contains the report s current page number is defined automatically for each report Use this field to reposition page numbers on a report as a target for an assignment command or as part of a conditional test Printing page numbers on reports If you specify this number on any print line the current page number will print STRUCTURED EDITOR 259 Resetting the page number You can set the page number by using the field in the following for
13. Edit Toolbar See Developer Toolbar on page 12 Statusbar Statusbar page 44 Tree View Window Tree View Window page 13 Compile Window Package Compile Generate Window page 43 Package Window Package Compile Generate Window page 43 Generate Window Package Compile Generate Window page 43 e Output Output page 43 By default all commands except the Edit Toolbar are checked meaning that all listed items are displayed on the screen The Edit Toolbar can only be displayed if a Properties window allowing the introduction of MetaSuite Definition Language page 186 commands is opened in the Workspace Tools The Tools menu contains the following commands e Options See Display Options on page 178 e User Profile Use this option to select another User Profile See User Profiles on page 180 e Source Wizard See Source Wizard on page 90 e Target Wizard See Target Wizard on page 125 e Matching Wizard See Matching Wizard on page 99 e Mapping Wizard See Mapping Wizard on page 130 e Test Data Wizard See Test Data Wizard on page 151 Source Control The Source Control menu contains the following commands e Get Latest Version e Check Out e Check In e Undo Check Out e Add to Source Control e Open from Source Control e Show History e Show Status e Connect to Source Control e Disconnect from Source Control e SourceSafe For more information about these options refer
14. Option Meaning New Select this option to add a Source Record See Source Records for a Parameter File on page 85 Add gt Source Select this option to add a Source Field See Source Fields for a Parameter File on Field page 87 Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand all Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Source Record s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Source Records for a Parameter File on page 85 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to delete this Source Record IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 32 Parameter File Field Context Menu If you right click a Source Field name belonging to Parameter File in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed 4 S02 datawarehouse1 A 01 External Array Sub Source Field Ctrl F Find Next F3 5034 Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All SCH ADAB EMPL A TA1 Tarnet Option Me
15. RETURNCODE Numeric field yes The result is the position of the replaced string The result is 0 if no replacement took place For example the SUB STRING1 is not found or does not completely fit in the MAIN STRING Note All strings are 1 byte encoded or National length and position are 1 byte encoded and the result will be 1 byte encoded or National Example MAIN STRING You can insert Documentation Comments also called Doc Comments SUB STRING 1 Doc SUB STRING2 Cod NUM1 REPLACE MAIN STRING SUB STRING1 SUB STRING2 3 4 Result You can insert Codumentation Comments also called Doc Comments The function returns 16 This is the position at which the replacement took place NUM1 REPLACE MAIN STRING SUB STRING1 SUB STRING2 3 31 Result You can insert Documentation Comments also called Cod Comments The function returns 53 This is the position at which the replacement took place Replacing a string at a specific location Format lt RETURNCODE gt REPLACE MAIN STRING SUB STRING1 literal 1 AT POSITION numfield LENGTH numfield STRUCTURED EDITOR 250 Elements Description Element Description Required MAIN STRING The name of the alphanumeric field Target Source or yes Work Field that will provide the Source string in which the replace will take place SUB STRING1 literal 1 The replacement substring or literal yes AT POSITION numfi
16. Record name Field name fixed value Rules The following rules apply Field name or fixed value must be alphanumeric and not a date The Record name refers to a Target Record e Ifthe Target Record contains on the fly fields then these fields are not accessible by this command The on the fly fields do not belong to the target record structure because they are directly transferred from the source field buffers So if the expression 01 targetrecord AAA is evaluated only the target fields that are not part of the on the fly fields will be affected Initialization The default rules on initializing fields after a null move are changed as follows e Numeric date and numeric non date fields are initialized to 0 zero e Alphanumeric non date fields are initialized to low values e Alphanumeric date fields are initialized to spaces STRUCTURED EDITOR 191 Example Arithmetic Expressions The term arithmetic expression refers to the calculation between two or more fields working source target for which the result is stored into a new field The result of the arithmetic expression is always a numeric value Format Field name ROUND TRUNCATE Operand Operator Operand Operator Operand Elements Description Element Description Required ROUND TRUNCATE The ROUND TRUNCATE keyword defines whether the result of the No arithmetic expression is to be rounded or truncated When o
17. The SYS NULL VALUE status will be set when the field contains a NULL value It can be used on both Source Fields as Target Fields and can be set by the user as well Usage IF Field name SYS STATUS EQ SYS NULL VALUE STRUCTURED EDITOR 270 Or Field name SYS STATUS SYS NULL VALUE Example If you want to check whether the employee number in the EMPLOYEE MASTER file is NULL you can add following logic in your program IF employ number SYS STATUS EQ SYS NULL VALUE If you want to assign a NULL value to the T01 Date_of_hire you can add the following logic in your program TO1 Date_of_hire SYS STATUS SYS NULL VALUE Note This new SYS STATUS value replaces entirely the use of SYS NULL and SYS SQL NULL keywords that were used in MetaSuite V6 3 or earlier Source date fields with value 0 or spaces all zeroes for numeric fields and all spaces for character fields are considered as NULL dates and not as incorrect dates SYS STATUS EQ SYS NULL VALUE is true instead of SYS STATUS EQ SYS INVALID DATE Meaning e Numeric dates with value 0 are considered as NULL dates but with value space are considered as incorrect dates e Character dates with value 0 are considered as incorrect dates but with value space are considered as NULL dates SYS NUMVALIDATE The Field name SYS NUMVALIDATE Source Field function converts the Source Field contents into its numeric value It will give you the pos
18. The name of the new Target Field and its symbol tE are displayed in the Tree View window Note Ifthe Value for the Target Field is not yet defined the arrow in the symbol appears in grey Your Model is incomplete as long as one or more fields remain undefined 7 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model DATA TARGETS 116 Fields The following fields are available e Name page 116 e Accumulate page 116 e Data Source page 116 e Dictionary Field page 117 e Nullability page 117 e Skip Lines page 118 e Skip page 118 e Short page 118 teg eege e Format page 118 Name If you add a Field to a manually created Record this field is empty and you must enter a Field name If you add a Field to a Record based on a Dictionary Record this field will be updated automatically with the name of the Target Field when you select it in the Dictionary Field field below After having made the selection you can change the name in this field The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree View window It can contain up to 32 characters Accumulate Only available for numeric fields in a record for which the To a option has been activated Select the Accumulate checkbox if you want the numeric fields to be summed based on the grouping levels If a numeric field is accumulated the NULL i
19. connect string SYS DB USER user id SYS DB PASSWORD password SYS DB DATABASE This runtime parameter is applicable on Windows systems for ODBC access to a database If the SYS DB CONNECT variable contains the word DBNAME the database name within the first MDL file of file type SQL will be used to form the connection string However if this database name is not correct the value of the runtime parameter SYS DB DATABASE will overrule this So the logical order is 1 SYS DB CONNECT 2 File specific DBNAME if SYS DB CONNECT DBNAME and SYS DB DATABASE are empty 3 SYS DB DATABASE if SYS DB CONNECT DBNAMEY and SYS DB DATABASE are not empty 21 10 SYS DB PASSWORD The password needed to connect to the database can be provided by means of this runtime parameter 21 11 SYS DB USER The name of the user needed to connect to the database can be provided by means of this runtime parameter 21 12 SYS ERROR LIMIT To detect in time that you are running a generated program on the wrong physical Source File or to prevent the running of a generated program on a Source File with too much data errors you can limit the number of errors that can occur in a program by the SYS ERROR LIMIT When the read limit number is met by any Source File all processing will stop and a return code of 8003 is given Usage SYS ERROR LIMIT number Number will set a maximum number of errors that can be found befo
20. Target Type Select the Target type IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 TEST DATA WIZARD 153 5 The Sampling Method selection window is displayed cf Test Data Wizard gt Sampling Method EH Select the preferred sampling method Sampling Method no sampling About this method uw No sampling is performed ffe kg aati Lama 6 Select the required sampling method The following methods are available Field Meaning Percentage The percentage method selects the approximate percentage of input records for inclusion in a sample Due to the random selection process being used you may obtain slightly more or slightly less records than expected Systematic skipping The systematic skipping method is used to select single records or groups of records after skipping a fixed number of records Fixed size The fixed size method is used when you know the exact number of records to be included in your sample Acceptance attribute The acceptance attribute method is used to test the occurrence rate of an attribute usually an error situation within the population and to guarantee that a sample is representative of the population as a whole Discovery attribute The discovery attribute method is used when you are confident that you know the occurrence rate of errors in the population from previous attributes sampling experience and want to verify that the current occurrence rate is no great
21. Use this field as follows 1 Click the Browse button next to this selection box The list of Dictionary Fields belonging to a Data Source Source Files External Arrays and Parameter Files is displayed 2 Select the required Dictionary Field and click OK The selected Dictionary Field is displayed in the Dictionary Field field 3 If you click the Browse button when a Dictionary Field has already been selected the Field properties window is displayed Dictionary Field This field only applies for Targets based on a Dictionary File available in the MetaStore When you add a Record to such a Target the fields associated with the matching Dictionary Record are added to the Target as well If you open the Target Field properties window for such a Field both the Name and the Dictionary Field have already been filled out You can click the Browse button in order to display the Field properties window in read only mode If you need to change the displayed information open this properties window in the MetaStore Manager Nullability The Nullability reflects the Null possibility of a Target Field The following values are possible Option Meaning DEFAULT System default NotNull Set to the Target Field DBNAME InNull The first character of the Target Field can contain a special character that marks the Null value OutNull The position to the left of the Target Field can contain a special character that marks the
22. 1 N SS is rounded up to the next integer value The remainder of the terms used in the calculation are as follows R the ratio of the average sampling error to the standard deviation i e the specified precision divided by the population count divided by the standard deviation e T the statistical t value derived from the specified confidence level e N the population count Once the variables sample size has been calculated the sample selection process is exactly like the fixed size sample selection process described earlier SAMPLE with amount field Unit and standard deviation This format of the SAMPLE command is used when you want to favour inclusion of the larger values of the amount field indicated Format SAMPLE amount field confidence level precision UNIT total amount field value POPULATION population count STD DEV standard deviation RANDOM random number seed Elements Element Description Required amount field Enter the name of the field to be sampled It must be a totalable non Yes subscripted field defined on a Source File confidence level Enter the statistical probability expressed as a percentage that the Yes selected sample is representative of the population It is a number or a non subscripted Work Field having a value in the range 80 99 9 The larger a value specified here the larger the sample size will be precision Enter the total tolerable amount of error for the population not the Y
23. Controlled By page 54 Control Key page 55 Match Field page 56 DATA SOURCES 51 This field is updated automatically with the name of the Dictionary File you selected when adding the Source File If required you can change the name in this field This name will be displayed in the Tree View window It may contain up to 32 characters and must be unique Organization This read only field displays the File Type of the Dictionary File Prefix In this field you can enter a prefix for this Source File You might for instance define the prefixes OLD and NEW if you are working with different versions of the same file A Prefix has a fixed length of 4 characters and must start with an alphabetic character Dictionary File DATA SOURCES 52 Click the Browse button at the right of the Dictionary File name to display the Dictionary File Properties window Sort Fields It is interesting to define up to 16 Sort Fields for your Source File if it is not ordered in the sequence you want Use this field as follows 1 Double click the New button The list of Fields available in the Records belonging to the Source File is displayed Source Field Select Item EMPLOYEE DATA E Indentation Name ANNUAL SALARY CITY ADDRESS DATE OF HIRE DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEE NAME EMPLOYEE NUMBER JOB TITLE CODE PAY CODE PAY RATE SECURITY CLEARANCE CODE SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER STATE CODE STREET ADDRESS
24. It must match the name appearing on the BEGIN command that delimits the beginning of the procedure within the scope of the current procedure counter Counter is the name of the numeric Work Field that will be used to Yes maintain the count of times the procedure has been executed start value Start value is the value to be assigned to the counter Work Field Yes before the first execution of the public procedure end value End value defines the number of times the named procedure isto Yes be executed i e from start value to end value times Before each execution of the procedure including the first the value of the counter is checked against the specified end value If the counter is greater than the end value the processing of the DO FOR command is complete increment Following each execution of the procedure the default 1 or user No specified increment is added to the counter and the test against the specified end value is repeated This process continues until the value of the counter exceeds the specified end value at which point no further executions of the public procedure will be performed Examples Example 1 Procedure name As an example the following DO FOR command executes a public procedure named CALC TOTALS four times DO CALC TOTALS FOR QUARTER 1 TO 4 BEGIN CALC TOTALS Note that within the program request the public procedure identified by the BEGIN CALC TOTALS command
25. MINIMUM max work field MAXIMUM mean work field MEAN Elements Description Element Description Required field name The name of the numeric input field whose value is to be processed by Yes the specified statistical computations Field name may not be a work field STRUCTURED EDITOR 195 Statistics to be computed count work field COUNT value work field VALUE std work field STD DEV min work field MINIMUM max work field MAXIMUM mean work field MEAN Required for at least one statistic This syntax is used to request one or more statistics For each statistic desired code the name of a work field and the type of statistic to be placed in that work field Each allowable specification is described below Element Description Required count work field Indicates that the named work field is to contain a count of all No occurrences of field name processed by the COMPUTE command value work field Indicates that the named work field is to contain the total value of all No occurrences of field name processed by the COMPUTE command std work field Indicates that the named work field is to contain the standard No deviation of all occurrences of field name processed by the COMPUTE command min work field Indicates that the named work field is to contain the minimum value of No all occurrences of field name processed by the COMPUTE command
26. Nesting of conditions is allowed only with the IF and the FOR command To illustrate the nested IF command assume that a special calculation has to be performed for hourly employees only PAY CODE 1 but there are two variations of that calculation one for those employees with an hourly wage PAY RATE of 12 50 or more e one for all other employees STRUCTURED EDITOR 227 If the two calculations are contained in routines named CALC A and CALC B the appropriate routine for each hourly employee could be executed by coding the following nested conditional command F PAY CODE EQ 1 F PAY RATE GE 12 50 LSE DO CALC B LSE EXCLUDE This expression is equal to IF PAY CODE EQ 1 THEN IF PAY RATE GE 12 50 THEN DO CALC A ELSE DO CALC B END IF ELSE EXCLUDE END IF Obviously the second expression is much easier to interpret The first conditional expression tests whether the value of the PAY CODE field is equal to 1 Whenever that condition is true the second nested conditional expression is tested One of two routines is executed depending on the evaluation of that expression INVOKE The INVOKE command is used to execute an external subroutine When processing by the external subroutine is completed control returns to the command immediately following the INVOKE External subroutines can be used to perform special security functions to compress or expand data or to perform other types of processing op
27. Record Procedures Record Procedures are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Source Record Apart from a Record Procedure it is also possible to assign Source Fields page 58 You will define a Record Procedure for a Source Record if you want to define filters that apply to this Record only This is mainly useful in a multi record Source File The Record Input Procedure is the only available Record Procedure type This means that for single record Source Files there is no difference between a File Input Procedure and a Record Procedure You can only define one Record Procedure for each Source Record Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Source File and Record are displayed 3 Right click the Source Record name and select Add gt Record Procedure 4 Select the file description you want to add and click OK The Record Procedure Properties window is displayed Comman X employee master EMPLOYEE DATA RECORD INPUT x CASE COMPUTE GH CONTINUE Technical Business DEBUG Record Input Procedure Properties DO END EXCLUDE EXEC IDMS EXEC SQL EXIT FOR GET HALT IF INVOKE NEXT PUT REM SAMPLE SET Source Field Source File Source Record START SYS APPLICATION SYS APPLICATION GROUP Delete Close SYS AUTO SQLCODE v Two tabs are available Technical and Business D Exercise 0 employee master EMPLOYEE DATA R
28. When the value of the skip counter reaches zero or is negative the current record will be selected for inclusion in the sample and the include counter will be decremented by 1 Subsequent records will be selected for inclusion as long as the include counter is greater than zero As each record is selected for inclusion the include counter will be decremented by 1 When the include counter reaches zero the skip counter will be reset to the defined interval plus 1 and the include counter will be reset to the cluster size SAMPLE with confidence level and precision This format of the SAMPLE command is used to test the occurrence rate of an attribute usually an error situation within the population and to guarantee that a sample that is representative of the population as a whole Format SAMPLE confidence level precision occurrence rate POPULATION population count RANDOM random number seed Elements Element Description Required confidence level Enter the statistical probability expressed as a percentage that the Yes selected sample is representative of the population It is a number or a non subscripted Work Field having a value in de range of 80 to 99 9 The larger the value specified here the larger the sample size will be precision Enter the accuracy of the sample as a percentage of the tolerable Yes error It is a number or a non subscripted Work Field having a value in the range of 0 1 to 99 9 The lower the prec
29. ZIP CODE Item Path ANNUAL SALARY CITY ADDRESS DATE OF HIRE DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEE NAME EMPLOYEE NUMBER JOB TITLE CODE PAY CODE PAY RATE SECURITY CLEARANCE CODE SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER STATE CODE STREET ADDRESS ZIP CODE 2 Select the required field and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Se ect Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically DATA SOURCES 53 The selected field is displayed in the Input Sort Order Field Properties window rT Input Sort Order Field bonus ano 1 datawarehouse ISRT bonus Input Sort Order Field Technical Input Sort Order Field Properties Name _ Descending Source Field bonus PP_employee Field Meaning Name This field contains the name of the Sort Field You can enter another name containing up to 32 characters Descending By default this checkbox is not selected so that the sorting is done in ascending order If you select this checkbox the sorting will be done in descending order Source Field The Browse button next to this selection box can be used in two ways e lf the field contains the name of a Sort Fie
30. for all reports and Target Files in the program you might want to exclude individual paths but build all paths or you might want to limit the records read into the path by excluding high level records before lower level records are read EXCLUDING INDIVIDUAL PATHS To exclude an individual path use the EXCLUDE command in a Source File input or record input procedure to exclude the path from all subsequent processing or in a Report or Target File detail procedure to exclude the path for the report TargetFile Example BEGIN SOURCEFILE CUST SALES INPUT IF INVOICE NUMBER IR SC10000 TO SC29999 EXCLUDE Using this input procedure the report would contain the information shown above in paths 3 6 7 and 8 All paths would be constructed however Following the exclusion of a path the generated program will simply read the next INVOICE record for the same customer or if there are no more INVOICE records the next CUSTOMER record LIMIT RECORDS READ INTO THE PATH The most efficient way to exclude a high level record in a path based on information in that record or a higher level record is to use a record input procedure as illustrated below This limits the records read into the path if a record is excluded no subordinate records are read for it Remember that records excluded in a record input procedure are not available to any subsequent processing Example To exclude proc
31. function Concatenation on character fields will result in a concatenation where leading or trailing spaces are removed Concatenation on numeric fields will use the edit mask of the numeric fields in the concatenation Concatenation on Unicode fields results automatically in Unicode Mixing of Unicode and non Unicode character fields is not allowed Examples Example 1 If the 14 character type CHARACTER field named FIRST NAME contained the value WW JOHN p and a 20 character type CHARACTER field named LAST NAME contained the value REED ie the following assignment command WORK NAME FIRST NAME AND AND LAST NAME would result in the value JOHN REED being assigned to the field named WORK NAME STRUCTURED EDITOR 194 Example 2 If the 15 character type CHARACTER field named CITY contained the value BOSTON ae the two character type CHARACTER field named STATE contained the value MA and the five digit type PACKED field named ZIP contained the value 02108 and had been defined with the CODE option the following command W TEXT CITY AND AND STATE AND AND ZIP SYS EDIT DETAIL 3 W TEXT would result in the character string BOSTON MA 02108 being printed as detail line number 3 COMPUTE The COMPUTE command calculates distribution statistics minimum maximum etc for a single field It is used during an Initial Sort or input procedure It may not be used in any other procedure type D
32. in the Match chain This option is inactive for the Match with sequence number 1 Move Down Select this option to move the Match to a lower position higher sequence number in the Match chain This option is inactive for the Match with the highest sequence number IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 DATA Sources 103 5 Once you have finished the definition of the Match Fields you can check the Technical Tab of the Source File Properties Window The Match fields will be completed as follows 01 Sourcefile2 7x ModelForMatchingWizard S01 SourceFile2 Source File Technical Source File Properties SE Sort Fields a Ci new Prec 9 for Dictionary File empoyeemaster v3 g 7 Automatic Manual Match Field C Special Write Only 2S01 EMPLOYEE NUMBER 2 01 JOB TITL 2501 DEPARTMENT 2S01 PAYRATI MatchWith Jl Match On SourceFie1 ControledBy e Conrolke Te These Fields have the following meaning Field Meaning Match With If the displayed File is the source of one or more Matches this field displays the Source File to which these Matches have been defined You can click the Browse button in order to display the Properties window of the displayed Source File Match On If the displayed File is the destination of one or more Matches this field displays the Source File from which these Matches have been defined You can clic
33. the row will be excluded for further processing SYS EOF The SYS EOF Source File status is used to check whether a Source File has reached the end of file i e whether there are no more records to be read for the SourceFile This information is useful following the execution of a GET command or during Source File matching Usage IF SourceFile name SYS IO STATUS EQ SYS EOF Example Assume that two Source Files named PARTS MASTER and BACKLOG are being matched and you are only interested in reporting those cases where there are records on both Source Files You know that the PARTS MASTER contains many more records than are contained on the BACKLOG Source File The following command in a Source File input procedure or a report or Target File detail procedure will cause the generated program to stop reading from the PARTS MASTER Source File once all of the BACKLOG records have been read STRUCTURED EDITOR 266 IF BACKLOG SYS IO STATUS EQ SYS EOF HALT SOURCEFILE PARTS MASTER SYS ERROR The SYS ERROR Source File status is used to check the success of a GET command when performing controlled access to a Source File Following a GET command it is always good practice to check the results of the operation to ensure that valid data has been obtained Usage IF SourceFile name SYS IO STATUS EQ SYS ERROR Example The following code prevents the printing of invalid value
34. 119 Target Wizard 125 Test Data Wizard 151 Transformation Programs 163 Execute 166 Generate 163 Run time Messages 168 U User Interface Compile Window 43 Context Menus 18 Developer Toolbar 12 Docking a Window 44 Logging on to MetaMap 6 Main Toolbar 11 Menu bar 9 Output Window 43 Package Window 43 Statusbar 44 Tree View Window 13 Wizard Toolbar 13 Workspace 43 User Profiles 180 V Version Management Add MetaMap Models 183 Connection 181 Establish 181 Terminate 182 Source Control Status 183 Undo Check out 185 Version Management Source Control 181 W Wizards Matching Wizard 99 Source Wizard 90 Target Wizard 125 Work Fields 135
35. 21 5 SYS AUTO SOLCODE The SYS AUTO SQLCODE field is automatically defined in each generated program that accesses an RDBMS through embedded SQL statements Its value can be either 0 or 1 and will determine whether all embedded SQL statements for which the SCH CODE is not equal to 0 100 must be handled by an SQL handling module Usage SYS AUTO SQLCODE 0 1 When the value is set to 1 all embedded SQL statements for which the returned SQLCODE is different to 0 or to 100 will be handled by an SQL handling module A default SQL handling module which contains display logic for all SQLCODE different to 0 or to 100 can be found in the following table SQL Dialect SQL Dialect Name Runtime Module 0 Not specified MSSOL 1 DB2 for z OS MSDMX 2 DB2 for VSE MSDVX 3 DB2 2 MSD2X 4 DB2 for OS4 MSD4X 5 DB2 for UNIX MSD6X 6 ORACLE MSORX 7 INGRES MSIGX 8 SYBASE MSSYX 9 SOL SERVER MSSOX 10 INFORMIX MSIFX 11 SESAM MSSEX 12 RDBMS MSRDX 13 ODBC MSODB 14 TERADATA MSTRX 15 DB2 LUW MSD2X You can customize this SQL handling module according to your company standards RUNTIME PARAMETERS 311 21 6 SYS DATE 21 7 The SYS DATE field is defined automatically in all generated programs It contains the date used on the default title line of all reports and is defined in the format YYYYDDD The SYS DATE field can be referenced anywhere in a program request The following command results in th
36. 215 Elements Description Element Description Required counter Counter is the name of the numeric Work Field that will be used to Yes maintain the count of times the procedure has been executed Each time the inner block of commands is executed this variable gets incremented or decremented if the step value is negative start value Start value is the value to be assigned before the first execution of Yes the public procedure end value End value defines the last value of Variable for which the named Yes procedure is to be executed step value Step value defines the number that is added to counter when No END FOR is met Step value can be negative This makes sense if start value is higher than end value Examples FOR wn index 10 TO 1 BY 1 DEBUG wn index wn index END FOR The generated program will return CH wn index wn index wn index wn index wn index wn index wn index wn index wn index H U GO OD Oo JO vw ki wn index Remarks e FOR END FOR structures can be nested This means that the series of instructions can contain another FOR END FOR block The level of nesting is limited to 100 levels The number of FOR END FOR blocks within a procedure is limited to 1000 FUNCTION The FUNCTION command is used to execute an external subroutine When processing by the external subroutine is completed control returns to the command immediately f
37. CONTROLLED BY option If SourceFile name is omitted from the command within a Source File procedure it defaults to the Source File in whose initial or input procedure the command is contained Example The HALT SOURCEFILE command is most useful when a range of records is being processed in sequence In this case you might halt the Source File once the upper bound of the desired range is exceeded thereby reducing processing time significantly assuming that the Source File contains records following the group of processed records Assume that the records of an EMPLOYEE HISTORY file are in ascending sequence by a field named HIRE DATE To report only on those employees hired before January 1 1978 the EMPLOYEE HISTORY file should be halted when the first employee with a hire date of January 1 1978 or later is encountered as illustrated below BEGIN SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE HISTORY INPUT IF HIRE DATE GE 780101 HALT SOURCEFILE EXCLUDE Note An EXCLUDE command has been coded following the HALT SOURCEFILE command HALT SOURCEFILE does not exclude the current record therefore if it is your intention to exclude the current record as well as to not process any additional records from the Source File you should include the EXCLUDE command HALT TARGETFILE The HALT TARGETFILE command is used to stop the processing for a Target File The location of the HALT TARGETFILE command in your Target File request det
38. COUNT page 280 Field Attributes SYS SOL LENGTH page 281 SYS STATUS page 281 SYS DBNAME SYS DBNAME can be used to assign a value to the PCB name of an IMS Source File or Target File This PCB name will be used to obtain the corresponding PCB address Assigning a value using SYS DBNAME will overrule the DBNAME as specified on the file definition Refer to the IMS DLI File Access Guide for more information about IMS processing Usage SourceFile name SYS DBNAME string value TargetFile name SYS DBNAME string value File name Required The File name is defined as an IMS type file or a standard type file that will be processed under IMS execution string value Required The PCB name will be used to obtain the corresponding PCB address as defined in the PSB Example The following command shows how to assign a PCB name to an IMS file IMS FILE_A SYS DBNAME PCBOL IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 275 SYS DIRECT KEY The SourceFile name SYS DIRECT KEY field is automatically defined for each TABLE TREE Source File which defines an external array specified in the generated program It will contain the index for the row to be found in the external array after the GET statement is done Format SourceFile name SYS DIRECT KEY SourceFile name Required The SourceFile name is defined as a TABLE TREE Source File fo
39. Calculation Error in Rule 00000001 Within Target Record Number 1 The computation label is the same label as produced in the MetaSuite generator when an MXL is run TO1l bonus ANNUAL SALARY 01 Transformation label 000001 Examples Example 1 Operand To add 5 days to the aging date the following assignment is needed DUE DATE AGING DATE 5 STRUCTURED EDITOR 193 Example 2 Operator To store 5 percent of the annual salary in a bonus field the following assignment command is needed TO1 BONUS ANNUAL SALARY 0 05 or TO1 BONUS ROUND ANNUAL SALARY 0 05 When the bonus should be the truncated value of the 5 percent the following assignment command is needed TO1 BONUS TRUNCATE ANNUAL SALARY 0 05 Concatenation Concatenation refers to the process of placing two or more values side by side to create a new single value The result of the concatenation operation is always a character string Thus within the system concatenation may be used only to create values to be assigned to non numeric fields in assignment commands The concatenation operation is requested by coding the reserved word AND between each of the values to be concatenated Format Operand AND Operand AND Operand Elements Description Element Description Required operand An operand can be a character constant a character field Unicode Yes field or a numeric field with the SYS EDIT page 288
40. DEPARTMENT having a PAY RATE of 15 or more The following command could be coded IF DEPARTMENT EQ 3 AND PAY RATE GE 15 PUT 2 In this example the AND logical operator joins the two simple conditional expressions which must be evaluated as true in order for the second line to be printed Note that if AND is used with an IF command it is identical to a nested IF To illustrate this point the command above could have been coded as a nested IF command where the second conditional expression is tested only when the first conditional expression is true IF DEPARTMENT EQ 3 IF PAY RATE GE 15 PUT 2 Note The meaning of the first AND command above changes if the word OR is substituted for the word AND IF DEPARTMENT EQ 3 OR PAY RATE GE 15 PUT 2 Here the second line will be printed whenever an employee belongs to the third department or the employee s pay rate is greater than or equal to 15 This version of the command is not the same as the following sequence of two separate conditional commands which would cause the second line to be printed twice for those employees from the third DEPARTMENT having a PAY RATE of 15 or more IF DEPARTMENT EQ 3 PUT 2 IF PAY RATE GE 15 PUT 2 None of the examples shown thus far have used both the AND and OR logical operators in a single compound conditional expression When both
41. DETAIL KEY PD EMPLOYEE NUMBER Example 3 Infinite Loops BEGIN SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER INITIAL START EMPLOYEE MASTER KEY 30000 SORT ANNUAL SALARY DESCENDING Because the initial Source File procedure contains the SORT command indicating that Source File pre processing will occur the procedure will be executed first just after the read of the first record on the Source File At that time the START command will position the EMPLOYEE MASTER Source File at the first employee whose employee number is greater than or equal to 30000 It will then exclude the current first input record read the first employee record with a key equal to or greater than 30000 and re execute the START command The effect is an infinite loop with the generated program rejecting the current input record and then repositioning itself at that same record This procedure should have been coded as follows 20 5 STRUCTURED EDITOR 245 BEGIN SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER INITIAL IF EMPLOYEE MASTER SYS READ COUNT EQ 1 START EMPLOYEE MASTER KEY 30000 SORT ANNUAL SALARY DESCENDING By coding the START command as the true subcommand of the IF that checks the number of input records read the programmer ensured that the START would be executed only one time When you use the START command in an Initial Sort procedure where pre processing occurs i e with the SORT EXTRACT or PRE PASS command and when you use the START command in a
42. DOT Target Procedure Detail See Target Procedures on page 121 Output Pre Ti Target Procedure End of File See Target Procedures on page 121 Se Target Procedure End of Job See Target Procedures on page 121 SS Target Procedure See Target Procedures on page 121 Initialization MIT Target Procedure Total See Target Procedures on page 121 Output Post TOT Target Procedure Total See Target Procedures on page 121 Output Pre TOE The Target Records contain third level Objects Click the sign next to a Source Record to display them Dependent Object Type Symbol Meaning Mapped Target Field A Mapped Target Field is a Target Field for which rE mapping rules have been defined See Target Fields on page 114 Unmapped Target Field An Unmapped Target Field is a Target Field for which rE mapping rules have not yet been defined See Target Fields on page 114 If a Target Field has not been mapped when the MetaMap Program is generated it will contain the default value e Numeric fields zeroes e Alphanumeric fields spaces It is not mandatory to map the Target Fields in this way Mappings can be defined in other ways as well Accumulated Target Field A An Accumulate Target Field is a mapped Target Field DH Instead of providing detailed information the Target Field will contain accumulated data See Target Fields on page 114 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 95 7 METAMAP MANAGER US
43. E E ER di sexes ede Eee TEE EEO ides EEA EEEE EEEE ER EEEE 74 Source Records for an External Array 75 ALEE a LEE AER E E AE EEE EAE TE E A E A N E E E eh ae 75 PIGS EE 76 Source Fields for an External Amay 76 Eet ee ee 76 PGI EE 77 Sub Source Fields for an External Array ccssscccsessecsseeseceseeeeesscessecsaeesecaeeeesseeenecaaeesecnaeseeecseesaecsaesssenaesseenaeess 77 EE eege ee 77 GE GE 78 lee 79 PROCCQUEG ee Ee 79 Techical EE 80 Bpemgese Tab icc cscveis2sseaevtdsdhedeksesceccaess eege Geteste ed deed eens 81 Path foran External Array oriris aa E EEE EE ve 81 EE EE A EE eg 81 E EE 82 Parameter EE 83 PROCCOUPG ss E E E E E EEN DEE Ee 83 e e TaD E E EA A E T E E AE E hawk ends A E E tiers deeds hated cits 84 B siness EE 85 Source Records for a Parameter File 85 POCEO E iioa a E I A EENE A A A A 85 TE e N E E E E T EE T A N A E 86 Source Fields for a Parameter Ple 87 PROCCQUNG usor aa ea E AEEA T E E A E A A O AEA 87 F EE E E R E E E AAE E E 88 Sub Source Fields for a Parameter File 88 Beete eg AO 88 E E 89 SOUFCE WIZAN ME 90 Addi ga So rce FIC s cscisecsssscedevecsscueeleacasiaedtsce iiaei ssl RET A EE AEE AEEA EAE AA EAA R i A aN 90 Addingan External Array sieer aeron Tiaan aaea EEEE R EAEE E AE UE ET ee bestest 94 Adding a Parameter File sssssiseisscssesecs cossivacicasessads sabes putea E EEE E E EE 97 Matching Wizard ET 99 Chapter 9 Data Tal EN 104 9 1 Target Fil s or Reports 1 e0eZeEk deed EEA VE NENE
44. File Procedures on page 63 End of File File Procedure See File Procedures on page 63 First Contact File Procedure See File Procedures on page 63 ve a A Initial Sort File Procedure E See File Procedures on page 63 cl Initial Extract File Procedure See File Procedures on page 63 E PE Initial Prepass File Procedure See File Procedures on page 63 Among the Object Types depending on a Source File Source Records and Paths may contain third level Objects Click the F sign next to a Source Record to display its dependent Object Types Dependent Object Type Symbol Reference Source Field See Source Fields on page 58 EIG Source Record Procedure See Record Procedures on page 61 Ei Click the F sign next to a Path to display its dependent Object Types Dependent Object Type Symbol Reference Path Record See Source Path Records on page 69 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 16 Object Types depending from an External Array The following table lists the possible Object Types that may depend on an External Array Dependent Object Type Symbol Reference Source Record for an External See Source Records for an External Array on page 75 Array Ez Array Procedure gt See Array Procedures on page 79 Path It is not possible to define a Path for an External Array T Therefore this option is not unavailable A
45. File from the drop down list Organization If you select a File Type from this drop down menu you will only be able to select Dictionary Files of this type from the Dictionary File drop down list below If you leave the default setting Any you will be able to select any Dictionary File Dictionary Files Select the required Dictionary File from the drop down list If you selected a File Type in the Organization drop down list the Dictionary File drop down list only contains Dictionary Files of this type Once you have selected the Dictionary File its Records are displayed in the Dictionary Records selection box IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 DATA Sources 91 Field Meaning History Selecting this option will display all existing versions of the Dictionary Files By default this option is not selected and only the latest version of the Dictionary Files will be displayed Dictionary After having selected the required Dictionary File from the drop down list select Records one or more Records in the selection box Press and hold the Control key to make a selection of multiple non adjacent Records Press and hold the Shift key to make a selection of multiple adjacent Records 3 Fill out the fields as required and click Next The Technical definition window is displayed Add Source gt Specify the technical information of this source V Automatic Manual E Special write Only
46. However in the case of this compound conditional expression more keystrokes are required and the command is harder to read Note that both of the two IF commands above are equal to and more efficient than the following series of simple conditional commands IF DEPARTMENT EQ 1 PUT 3 IF DEPARTMENT EQ 3 PUT 3 IF DEPARTMENT EQ 4 PUT 3 These commands produce the same result but each time the DEPARTMENT field contains the value 1 the subsequent two conditions will be tested unnecessarily and each time the DEPARTMENT contains the value 2 the third condition will be tested again unnecessarily Thus not only is more coding required increasing the likelihood of a coding error but more code will be executed as well Example 2 Testing for a value not equal to any of the values in a list To exclude all records except those containing the values 1 and 3 in the DEPARTMENT field the following command could be coded IF DEPART EXCLUDE ENT NE 1 3 This type of conditional expression is actually an abbreviated format of a compound conditional expression where field name is always the same the relational operator is always NE and all components of the compound expression are joined by the word AND The command above could be coded as follows IF DEPARTM EXCLUDE 1 AND DEPARTMENT 3 ENT NE NE However in the c
47. In case of a NULL value which is also considered as a specific status on the contents of a field the status can be set by the user as well STRUCTURED EDITOR 282 Dependent on the field name s data type SYS STATUS can contain other values Usage IF Field name SYS STATUS EQ SYS STATUS Value Or Field name SYS STATUS SYS NULL VALUE Field name Field name is the name of the field on which the status is checked or to which the SYS NULL VALUE status is assigned SYS STATUS Values Possible values for Field name SYS STATUS ordered by importance are ORDER SYS STATUS INTERNAL VALUE 5 SYS NULL VALUE 2 4 SYS INVALID DATE 4 3 SYS OUT OF LIMIT 3 2 SYS OUT OF RANGE 5 1 SYS NOT NUMERIC 1 0 SYS OK 0 Meaning of the order of importance for status codes When different status codes could be given to a specific field the most important will be taken For instance For DATES the SYS INVALID DATE status is more important than the SYS NOT NUMERIC status so if a numeric date field contains a non numeric value the state of this field will become SYS INVALID DATE More detailed information about the SYS STATUS values is described separately under their keyword Remarks SYS STATUS cannot be checked on occurring fields STRUCTURED EDITOR 283 20 9 System Functions MetaSuite Export Language The following system functions are available Category System Function Numeric System Functions S
48. Occurrence You can enter an integer indicating the maximum number of times this field can occur If you do not define a specific value the field is assumed to occur once WorK FIELDS 137 Parameter Select the Parameter checkbox if the Work Field will contain a runtime parameter included in your run script as a PPTIPT value Typical values include dates or the maximum number of lines in a report Expose Select the Expose checkbox if you want to use the Work Field name instead of a generated field name that changes with every MGL generation Starting Position This field indicates the starting position for Subfields It will be ignored for independent Workfields Size Enter an integer indicating the field length as a number of bytes If the field occurs more than once in the record this field indicates the length of a single occurrence of the field Type Select the required type from the drop down list The following types are available Type Meaning Alphabetic This datatype indicates that the field may contain alphabetic characters Binary This datatype indicates that the field contains a binary numeric value that is stored as a sequence of Os and 1s Only three sizes are allowed for binary fields half word two bytes full word four bytes and double word eight characters Binary Native This datatype indicates that the field contains a binary numeric value that is stored as a sequence of Os and 1s Only
49. RETURN CODE AFTER INVOKE W INVOKE RETURN The result of this is Debug RETURN CODE AFTER INVOKE W RETURN CODE 000000000 Debug INVOKE RETURN CODE AFTER INVOKE U W INVOKE RETURN 000000001 If the user wants MetaSuite to act the same way as in version 7 1 6 the user will have to add following code IF SYS RETURN CODE EQ 0 SYS RETURN CODE SYS INVOKE RETURN SYS LOW VALUE The SYS LOW VALUE field is defined automatically in all generated programs SYS LOW VALUE is a full word binary field containing hex low values It can be used in assignment or conditional commands exactly as the COBOL reserved word LOW VALUE S would be Example The following assignment statement assigns low values to a Work Field WK FIELDB SYS LOW VALUE The following conditional statement uses low values as a test for the NE operator IF KEY FIELDB NE SYS LOW VALUE SYS LOW VALUE can be used in the MetaStore to identify a record in a multiple record type SourceFile GI ADD RECORD record name KEY key field EQ SYS LOW VALUE SYS NOT NUMERIC The SYS NOT NUMERIC Source Field status will be set when the numeric Source Field does not have a numeric value Usage IF Field name SYS STATUS EQ SYS NOT NUMERIC STRUCTURED EDITOR 269 Example If you want to check whether the employee number in the EMPLOYEE MASTER file contains a valid
50. STATUS A SourceFile name SYS INTERNAL STATUS field is defined automatically for each Source File The value of this field is reset following each read or write operation to a VSAM or database Source File and its value is the value returned by the VSAM processor or the database system For Source File types other than VSAM or database this field always contains blanks SYS INTERNAL STATUS is defined as a field with datatype character The possible value for SYS INTERNAL STATUS will vary depending on whether a VSAM or database Source File is being accessed To determine what the possible internal status values are for each of these Source File types refer to the appropriate VSAM or database management system documentation Usage IF SourceFile name SYS INTERNAL STATUS EQ internal status This field is of use when you anticipate several possible read errors on a VSAM or database Source File with each type of error requiring different processing Internal status The value of internal status is operating system dependent Example When accessing a database Source File the database management system might return a status of 212 when a requested record cannot be found in the database and a status of 214 when the requested record can be found but not accessed because the database or a part of it has been corrupted Within your program then you would want to check for each of these status codes a
51. Se ect Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath e Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically DATA SOURCES 82 The Data Path Properties window is displayed DATACOM SALARIES PTH DC RECORD SALARIES Exercise 0 DATACOM SALARIES PTH DC RECORD SALARIES Data Path Technical Data Path Properties Name Entry Record DC RECORD SALARIES LJ Where Via Index kel De 5 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the section Fields page 82 6 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Path and its symbol are displayed in the Tree View window 7 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Fields The following fields are available e Name page 82 e Distinct page 82 e Entry Record page 83 e Where page 83 e Input Order Fields page 83 Name This field is updated automatically with the name of the Entry Record when you select it in the Entry Record field below After having made the selection you can change the name in this field The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree Window preceded by the PTH indication It can contain up to 18 characters Distinct This c
52. Source File input procedure The only exception to this is a reference to the SYS READ COUNT for an external array i e a Source File with the TABLE TREE option In this case the reference is always to the number of records read into storage during the initial processing of the external array unless you use the SYS READ COUNT in the initial processing of that external array Example To print the total number of records read from the PAYROLL DETAIL Source File on a total line the following code could be used TOTAL 5 W TEXT BEGIN TOTAL 5 GROUP W TEXT RECORDS READ AND PAYROLL DETAIL SYS READ COUNT SYS SOL LENGTH Field name SYS SQL LENGTH contains the length number of characters of a VARCHAR SQL Source Field As stored in a table each VARCHAR field is preceded by a length field that contains the length of the value of the field When the field is retrieved by an SQL call relational returns this length field in addition to its value Format Field name SYS SQL LENGTH Field name Field name must be a VARCHAR field within an SQL Source File The field name will always be presented as TableName ColumnName Remarks SYS SQL LENGTH can not be used on occurring fields Exception Sesam database on Siemens BS 2000 SYS STATUS A field name SYS STATUS is defined automatically in each generated program for all fields It describes the status on the contents of the field
53. Source File Status Source File Status Meaning SYS OK Last operation was successful SYS EOF Source File has reached end of file SYS ERROR Last operation was unsuccessful SYS DUPLICATE Last operation retrieved duplicate row SYS NOT RELATED Last operation retrieved a not related row Each of these Source File status values is described in more detail as a separate topic It is recommended that you check the status of a Source File following each GET or PUT command and during processing of CONTROLLED BY Source Files for each new set of records By checking the status you can determine the success or failure of the operation Example The following sequence of commands illustrates the testing of the SowrceFile name SYS IO STATUS field to determine which of two routines to perform GET EMPLOYEE MASTER KEY SELECTED EMPLOYEE IF EMPLOYEE MASTER SYS IO STATUS EQ SYS OK DO PRINT EMPLOYEE DATA ELSE DO EMPLOYEE MISSING ROUTINE If the GET command is successful a routine named PRINT EMPLOYEE DATA will be executed If the GET command is unsuccessful a routine named EMPLOYEE MISSING ROUTINE will be executed instead Note that when VSAM or database Source Files are accessed a more precise error status code can be obtained specifically the exact status code returned by the VSAM or database access method by checking the contents of the field SourceFile name SYS I
54. Tree View window the following context menu is displayed Ctrl F Find Next F3 Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All Properties Option Meaning Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Record Procedure s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Record Procedures on page 61 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to delete the selected Record Procedure IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 27 External Array Context Menu If you right click an External Array name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed D SampleModel gt Source File New Source Wizard Close Model Add Path Create a Copy Array Procedure Source Record Up Down Find Ctrl F Find Net F3 Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All Output Properties Package S Description Remove Del Option Meaning New Select this option to add an External
55. View window IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 DATA SOURCES 94 Adding an External Array 1 Open an existing Model or create a new Model 2 Select the Source Wizard icon En from the Wizard Toolbar The following window is displayed The following fields are available Add Source gt Select a Dictionary File and one or more Source Record s New Source File Dictionary Records Source Type Source File X Organization Any e Dictionary File e F Show History Field Meaning Name This field will be updated automatically with the name of the Dictionary File after having selected the Dictionary File and the required Record s The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree View window Note If needed you can modify the name later on See External Arrays on page 71 Prefix In this field you can enter a prefix for this External Array You might for instance define the prefixes OLD and NEW if you are working with different versions of the same file A Prefix has a fixed length of 4 characters including the dash Source Type Select External Array from the drop down list Organization If you select a File Type from the drop down menu you will only be able to select Dictionary Files of this type from the Dictionary File drop down list below If you leave the default setting Any you will be able to select any Dictionary File D
56. WORK NAME SUBSTRING NAME 3 would result in the value VIS PRESLEY being assigned to the field named WORK NAME SYSTEM FUNCTION The SYSTEM FUNCTION command is used to execute an external function When processing by the external function is completed control returns to the command immediately following the SYSTEM FUNCTION External functions can be used to perform special security functions to compress or expand data or to perform other types of processing operations unique to your site One or more fields from the generated program can be made available passed to the external function and these fields may be modified by the function STRUCTURED EDITOR 253 The name of the function is limited to 8 characters The returned value can be a numeric value an alpha numeric value or a data field Format FUNCTION Function name Field name Litteral Elements Description Element Description Required Function name Function name identifies the system function to be executed Yes Field name Field name identifies a field to be passed to the external No subroutine You can include up to 16 field names with this command The named fields will be made available to the subroutine for processing You should not name numeric Source Fields in the field name list because in the process of validating a numeric input field the system may convert that field to a different internal data type and size than was
57. Workspace PUBLIC PROCEDURES 150 4 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model kd icon on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model 12 3 Business Tab The following fields are available on the Business tab e Business Rule page 150 e Note page 150 Business Rule In this field you can enter a description of the Public Procedure Ifyou want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter Notes for this Public Procedure Ifyou want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R CHAPTER 13 Test Data Wizard The Test Data Wizard selects a sample of input records using one of the following sampling techniques e Percentage Systematic Skipping Fixed size e Acceptance attribute Discovery attribute Variables 1 Open an existing Model or create a new Model This is not mandatory You can start the Test Data Wizard from scratch by immediately clicking the Test Data Wizard icon In that case you will be asked to create a new Model first You can also start the Test Data Wizard via the Start menu by selecting Start gt MetaSuite gt Test Data Wizard 2 Select the Test Data Wizard icon ER from the Wizard Toolbar The following window is displayed aowa 7 Z
58. a summary file mu in the Package Folder defined in the User Profile See Packaging a Model on page 176 Save Properties Use this option to save the current Properties settings of the active MetaMap Object Cut You can use this standard Windows option to cut text sections in Properties windows Copy You can use this standard Windows option to copy text sections in Properties windows Gs P Paste You can use this standard Windows option to paste text sections in Properties windows Li D Print Tree Print the opened MetaMap Models as they are currently displayed in the Tree View Window Help You can use this option to display a window with the version information of KA K the MetaSuite MetaMap IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 12 5 4 Developer Toolbar The Developer Toolbar is displayed underneath the Menu Bar if the active Properties window contains a text box allowing the definition of mapping rules structured editor When you are defining a Target Field page 114 this is the Value text box When you are defining a Procedure Record page 56 File page 63 Array page 71 Target page 121 Program page 144 or Public page 148 Procedure this is the Commands text box The Edit Toolbar contains the following icons Button Meaning Description iis Start Stop Use this option to start or stop editing command
59. absence of a range of values on page 305 Nested IF A nested IF command is a command that is coded as a component of the true or false clause of another IF command Note The nesting of conditions is allowed only with the IF command i e it is not allowed with the CASE or DO WHILE commands See Example 5 Nested IF on page 305 Compound Conditional Expressions Combining Conditional Keywords A compound conditional expression is used to indicate that a conditional specific action is to occur if a combination of conditions is true or if one of a series of conditions is true A compound conditional expression comprises two or more simple conditional expressions joined by a logical operator The logical operator can be AND logical conjunction The compound conditional expression is true if both the preceding and following conditions are true The compound conditional expression is false if either condition is false OR logical disjunction The compound conditional expression is true if either the preceding or the following condition is true If both of the conditions are false the compound conditional expression is false When multiple ANDs and or ORs are coded in a single compound conditional expression the evaluation of the simple conditional expressions proceeds from left to right Parentheses may be used to indicate the conjunction of one condition with two or more disjunctive conditions See Examp
60. advantage of discovery attributes sampling is that a much smaller sample size is obtained than when using acceptance attributes sampling Format SAMPLE confidence level maximum error rate 0 POPULATION population count RAN DOM random number seed Elements Element Description Required confidence level Enter the statistical probability expressed as a percentage that the Yes selected sample is representative of the population It is a number or a non subscripted Work Field having a value in de range of 80 to 99 9 The lower the precision the larger the sample size will be maximum error Enter the expected occurrence rate of errors in the population Yes rate expressed as a percentage It is a number or a non subscripted Work Field having a value in the range of 0 00001 to 99 99999 occurrence rate Enter the expected occurrence rate of errors in the population Yes expressed as a percentage It is a number or a non subscripted Work Field having a value in the range of 0 00001 to 99 99999 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 238 Element Description Required discovery Enter a zero value as this is required for every discovery sampling It Yes sampling must may be in the form of a literal or a non subscripted Work Field be equal to 0 containing a zero value population Enter the exact count of records contained in the population from Yes count which the sample will b
61. all detail record formats should be written to the Report or Target File In a total or end of job procedure ALL indicates that all total record formats should be written out STRUCTURED EDITOR 232 Element Description Required Format number The Format number list is used to identify one or more detail or No total record formats to be output Format number must be an integer and it may not be an input field or a Work Field In Report or Target File initial input or end of file procedures format number must be the number of a detail record format In Report or Target File group or end of job procedures it must be the number of a total record format Examples ALL If the STATE CODE field is equal to MA the following command would result in the output of all detail records in an initial input or end of file procedure or all total records in a total or end of job procedure IF STATE CODE EQ MA PUT ALL Format number Within a Target File detail procedure the following command would result in the output of different detail record formats depending on the value of a field named PAY CODE IF PAY CODE EQ 1 PUT 1 2 ELSE PUT 3 4 When the PAY CODE field is equal to 1 detail formats 1 and 2 are written out For all other values of PAY CODE detail formats 3 and 4 are written REM REMARKS The REMARKS command allows you to insert lines of comments anywhere in a program request Liberal use of remarks is
62. alphabetically The selected field is displayed in the Target Sort Field Properties window TO01 datawarehouse V TSRT employee_number Exercise 0 T0i datawarehouse TSRT employee_number Target Sort Field Technical Target Sort Field Properties Name Descending Target Field T01 employee_number T01 PP_employee Jl x Available fields Field Meaning Name This field contains the name of the Sort Field You can edit this name It can contain up to 32 characters Descending By default this checkbox is not selected so that the sorting is done in ascending order If you select this checkbox the sorting will be done in descending order DATA TARGETS 110 Field Meaning Target Field The Browse button next to this selection box can be used in two ways e Ifthe field contains the name of a Sort Field clicking the Browse button results in displaying the properties window of the matching Target Field See Target Fields on page 114 e Ifyou delete the name of the Sort Field from the field first and then click the Browse button the list of Fields that can be selected as Target Fields is again displayed Work Field This field is only accessible if you select a Work Field in the Sort Field selection box The Browse button next to this selection box can be used in two ways e Ifthe field contains the name of a Sort Field clicking the Browse button results in displaying the properties wind
63. and substitute a value of zero for each invalid numeric value RUNTIME PARAMETERS 314 A packed or zoned numeric field is invalid when it does not contain appropriate numeric digits or sign indicators Floating point and binary numbers are always valid in that any possible bit configuration is a valid floating point or binary number When an invalid numeric is encountered the normal system action is to print an error message and bypass the processing of the record containing the invalid data Usage SYS NUMERIC CHECK number gt OFF gt IGNORE Use the number option to specify a number of invalid numeric values to be trapped Trapped numeric errors are listed in the error listing and excluded from the run Once the indicated number of errors has been met the system will discontinue numeric checking A subsequent invalid numeric will cause an abnormal termination of the generated program Use the OFF option to specify that although the system will perform error checking it will print an error message only for the first error it encounters not for any subsequent errors The system will bypass processing of any record containing the invalid data Use the IGNORE option instead of a number of errors if you want the system to convert all invalid numeric values to zero and accept them as valid data The total number of invalid numeric fields encountered will be printed in the end of job statistics but no invalid numeric erro
64. and the generator errors e Package window When creating a package the output of the package will be displayed in this window e Compile window When executing a compile script the listing will be displayed in this window Statusbar page 44 If a Properties window for a specific MetaMap Object is active in the Workspace the Statusbar displays when this MetaMap Object was created and updated for the last time Note If the Opening screen does not appear this means that the MetaSuite ini file is not available in the MetaSuite home folder You will need to browse to a valid ini file and click OK For more information about default settings refer to the MetaSuite INI Manager Guide IKAN Solutions 5 2 Menu Bar MeTAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 9 Once you have started MetaMap Manager the Menu Bar is displayed at the top of the opening screen It contains the following menus Menu Description File The File menu contains the following commands New Model See MetaMap Models on page 47 Open Model Use this option to open an existing Model from the list of avail able MetaMap Models Generate Active Model See Transformation Programs on page 163 Export Active Model to CDIF See Exporting a Model to CDIF format on page 175 Package Active Model See Packaging a Model on page 176 Save Active Model Use this option to save the active Model in its current state Save Active Model As Use this option to
65. can be assigned to a Source Record Apart from Source Fields it is also possible to assign Record Procedures page 61 Note This option is only available if not all Source Fields have been added When adding a Source Field all Sub Source Fields will be added automatically Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Source File and Record are displayed 3 Right click the Source Record name and select Add gt Source Field 4 Select the file description you want to add and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically The Source Field Properties window is displayed MRM EMPLOVEE DATA MRM DEPARTMENT Exercise 0 multi record master MRM EMPLOYEE DATA MRM DEPARTMENT Source Field Technical Source Field Properties Name IRM DEPARTMENT Dictionary Field MRM DEPARTMENT MRM EMPLOYEE DATA kel 5 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections Fields page 59 6 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Source Field and its symbol E are displayed in t
66. change management tool to start a check in or packaging procedure in the background Note In case you are using a Version Control System by means of an SCC interface this packaging possibility might be redundant Open the required Model Click the Package Active Model icon i on the Toolbar If no default COBOL generator was defined in the initial settings user profile or MetaSuite ini the following window is displayed T MetaSuite MetaMap Manager T Dictionary Selection Choose operating system and COBOL compiler AcuCorp_Windows Fujitsu Windows VisualAge BS2000 MicroFocus_Unix VisualAge Digital _Vms Microfocus_Windows Dosvse 05400 Fujitsu Un Sz_Windows al E Debug E Trace This window contains the following items PACKAGING A MODEL 177 Fields Meaning Choose operating system Select the required Generator from the selection list In the example and COBOL compiler above only Fujitsu_Windows is available Fujitsu_Windows is also the default Generator in this example This default Generator has been defined in the active User Profile See User Profiles on page 180 Refer to the MetaSuite INI Manager in the documentation folder on the Installation CD for information on how to change the default Generator Debug Select this checkbox if you want to include code table names in the generated COBOL code MGL and run script MRL Trace Select this checkbox if you want to
67. clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove the selected Source File from the MetaMap Model Path Context Menu Ifyou right click a Path name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed Find Next Find Previous Option Meaning Add gt Path Record Select this option to add a Path Record See Source Path Records on page 69 Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand all Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Path s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Path on page 67 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove this Path IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 23 Path Record Context Menu If you right click a Path Record name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed Find Ctrl F Find Next F3 Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All Properties Remove Option Meaning Add gt Path Record Select this option to a
68. discard your changes E The name of the new Array Procedure and its symbol are displayed in the Tree View window 6 Save your changes by doing one of the following Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Technical Tab The following fields are available on the Technical Tab e Name page 80 e Commands Workspace page 80 Name Enter a name for the Procedure It is advised to select a name that describes the action performed by the Array Procedure The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree View window It can contain up to 32 characters Commands Workspace In this field you can enter the commands that build the Array Procedure These commands are written in MDL MetaSuite Definition language 1 Enter the required commands By default the list of available commands is displayed at the left of this field Invalid commands are displayed in red D Note If you do not need the assisted mode you can switch it off using the icon in the Edit Toolbar and enter the commands manually To switch it on again click the Stop Edit icon Zei 2 Select the required command by clicking it The command will be added to the Workspace Any error messages or warnings are displayed underneath the Commands Workspace 3 Once you have finished entering the commands click the Stop Edit icon w The Procedure is verified If syntax errors are
69. e no additional total formats are produced for that group entity e any totals accumulated for the current group will not be added to the totals for the next higher group process An EXCLUDE command in a group procedure has no effect on subsequent report and Target File procedures Excluding Unwanted records Most reports and Target Files that you produce will be concerned only with some subset of records from a Source File Input records can be bypassed in a number of ways Both the coding of your program request and the processing of the generated program can be optimized by excluding all unwanted data as early as possible Example 1 Assume that all reports within a program request are concerned only with those employees in the EMPLOYEE MASTER file having an annual salary of 35 000 or more and are to be printed in sequence by social security number The following Initial Sort procedure would be coded to eliminate all of the unwanted records before sorting the input data into social security number sequence BEGIN SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER INITIAL IF ANNUAL SALARY LT 35000 EXCLUDE SORT SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER STRUCTURED EDITOR 210 If the IF command containing the EXCLUDE were omitted not only would the sort have to handle additional records unnecessarily but the unwanted data would still have to be excluded in either a Source File input procedure or in every individual Report or Target File detai
70. effective BEGIN RECORD EMPLOYEE SELECT RECORD INPUT IF EMPLOYEE SELECTION NUMBER GT 3000 EXCLUDE EXCLUDING AFTER THE CONTROLLED SET IS BUILT To exclude a record in the controlling Source File after the controlled set is built use the EXCLUDE SourceFile name command in a Source File input procedure for the controlled Source File This is described below Excluding at Source Level This is only applicable in Source File input procedures The SourceFile name option is used when one Source File is controlled by another Source File to identify the controlling Source File data in which you are no longer interested SourceFile name must be the name of a controlling Source File that is higher in the controlled controlling hierarchy than the Source File named in the BEGIN SOURCEFILE procedure When an EXCLUDE command with the SourceFi e name option is executed the generated program will stop processing the existing controlled set and will build a new set of controlled records starting with the excluded file name In this way processing time will be improved because the overhead of constructing unwanted sets of records is eliminated Example To continue with our example if we are interested in only those employees from Department 6 then we could add the following Source File input procedure to our code BEGIN SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER INPUT IF DEPARTMENT
71. fields and all spaces for character fields are considered as NULL dates and not as incorrect dates SYS STATUS EQ SYS NULL VALUE is true instead of SYS STATUS EQ SYS INVALID DATE Meaning e Numeric dates with value 0 are considered as NULL dates but numeic dates with value space are considered as incorrect dates e Character dates with value 0 are considered as incorrect dates but with value space are considered as NULL dates For numeric dates the SYS INVALID DATE status is more important than the SYS NOT NUMERIC status Please refer to the SYS STATUS keyword description SYS INVOKE RETURN The SYS INVOKE RETURN system field is defined automatically in all generated programs It contains the system return code of the last invoked program The SYS INVOKE RETURN parameter is independent of the SYS INVOKE RETURN code It is up to the user to decide what action should be done after a non zero SYS INVOKE RETURN code STRUCTURED EDITOR 268 Example The MRNUMVAL is invoked here with an invalid number of decimals after the comma IN DECIMALS 01754 99 IN FIELD 01755 W SALARY 1 AND AND W SALARY D ea QO INVOKE MRNUMVAL IN PARMS W RETURN CODE SYS RETURN CODE W INVOKE RETURN SYS INVOKE RE H DEBUG RETURN CODE AFTER INVOKE W RETURN CODE DEBUG INVOKE
72. found the errors message are displayed underneath the Workspace 4 Save your changes by doing one of the following Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model 8 14 DATA SOURCES 81 Business Tab The following fields are available on the Business Tab e Business Rule page 81 Note page 81 Business Rule In this field you can enter a description of the Array Procedure Ifyou want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter Notes for this Array Procedure If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Path for an External Array Some kinds of source files require a path even if at first sight it seems to be obsolete For instance an SQL table needs a path In this path the user can provide extra SQL query logic in order to limit the input in which case the usage of a path is not superfluous Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required External Array is displayed 3 Right click the External Array and select Add gt Path 4 Select the required Source Record Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the
73. in the PATH option the corresponding record name SYS PATH COUNT field contains a count of the number of records of the type identified by record name currently in the Path IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 21 9 Examples Example 1 Identifying Records To Be Read Consider the following SOURCEFILE and GET commands SOURCEFILE PAYROLL DETAIL CONTROLLED SOURCEFILE TRANSACTION MASTER CONTROLLED PATH CLIENT ACCOUNT TRANSACTION OCCURS 10 SOURCEFILE DRIVER FILE GET PAYROLL DETAIL RECORD GET TRANSACTION MASTER The first GET command will retrieve a single PAYROLL DETAIL RECORD from the PAYROLL DETAIL file The second GET command will retrieve a collection of records from the TRANSACTION MASTER file consisting of one CLIENT record the first ACCOUNT record associated with that CLIENT record and up to ten TRANSACTION records associated with that ACCOUNT record If the KEY option is not coded as in this example the record retrieved is the next in sequence in the Source File Example 2 Keyfield value The following command requests that an EMPLOYEE DATA record from the EMPLOYEE MASTER file be obtained for an employee whose employee number EMPLOYEE NUMBER on the EMPLOYEE MASTER file is equal to an employee number PD EMPLOYEE NUMBER field from the PAYROLL DETAIL file GET EMPLOYEE DATA KEY PD EMPLOY
74. must appear within the scope of the procedure containing the DO FOR command In other words that procedure must be coded before another BEGIN SOURCEFILE BEGIN REPORT or BEGIN TARGETFILE command Public procedures may be nested which is to say that within the named procedure other public procedures within the scope of the current main Source File Report or Target File procedure can be executed STRUCTURED EDITOR 203 Example 2 Increment Assume that an employee record on a payroll master file contains from 1 to 52 occurrences of the EMP PAY field representing the employee s weekly pay for each week of the year To calculate the year to date salary for the employee each entry up to and including the entry for the current week identified by the value contained in the CURRENT WEEK Work Field could be accumulated in the Work Field named YTD PAY using the following commands YTD PAY 0 DO YTD TOTALS FOR WEEK 1 TO CURRENT WEEK BEGIN YTD TOTALS YTD PAY YTD PAY EMP PAY WEEK If the value of CURRENT WEEK is 22 the procedure named YTD TOTALS will be executed 22 times Following the final execution of the procedure the value of the WEEK Work Field will be 23 Remarks Remember that the processing of the DO FOR command is completed whenever the value of the counter Work Field exceeds the specified end value In this version exceeding means surpassing the boundari
75. n EE EA Sebeade ceeds thee eee EEOAE OE AOE EETA 189 tele 191 CONCATCM ATION eset eege Eeer tee 193 COMPUTE gesteet ee eege 194 Eegeregie 196 DEBUG sca css tbs shed cbse ee ees 199 20 5 20 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS vi DO rey e 201 PIO ed WHILE EE 203 EXEC IDMS END EXEC srira anaa aa aa caateined oss E spas yeeded sense ned OE Eaa OERA E Ei 205 EXEC SOL END EXEC crr eege eege ed deene deeg ERE 205 Eder ENEE 207 EXIT geesde gedeien edel gee Ee 214 FOR ea END FOR onerose iarere ta Eaa O cadena used be cade iee AEE AEE e EERE badd SEA 214 FUNCT ON ee Eeer 215 E EE E A AA ET A ES AA A De ree 217 FHAL TALL EE 220 HALT SOURGEPILE positano ea a a EA a ER a eee aa NS RAG FAROE AA aE 221 EENEG 221 TE 222 INVOKE E 227 PUT SOUTCE testen eebe geebeeen gege cea eebe edel egedde ESA he E nde dree dee geeh seed deegede e EEA 228 PUT Vane E E vents ssesuvensessesesuadsde tevvasasseesvauseteasuiudstoescecalede veedsescenoedusesesseuusessefeduute E 230 REM REMARKS EE 232 SAMPI E enee ege geesde geleed Edge NE A EE ORR 233 GET ee eege ee eege Ee eege sa EE 242 SET 242 Miscellaneous FUNCTIONS s ee seaeaeeeeseeeeeceeeeseessesaeaeeeseeesenseeeeees 245 FN E E REECE Eee edd ege eege d Terre Terre EE 245 NN Eege 246 MEIN GTA EE 247 MANUALAINPUT sas 2s sstcaeeesSivavabs aa neahea st vabaaudedchasioecaessuvadussasedawed a E E r a aE aE EE 247 REPLACE erretina E ETE EEE EREE EEE RE EE EEA EE ERE E A AE ER 248 Ee E EE EEN 250 SUBS TRING EE 251 SYST
76. name in this field will be displayed in the Tree Window It can contain up to 32 characters Dictionary Record Click the Browse button at the right of the Dictionary File name to display the Dictionary File Properties window DATA SOURCES 87 8 17 Source Fields for a Parameter File Source Fields are the type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Source Record for a Parameter File Note This option is only available if not all Source Fields have been added When adding a Source Field all Sub Source Fields will be added automatically Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Parameter File and Source Record are displayed 3 Right click the Source Record name and select Add gt Source Field 4 Select the file description you want to add and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item e Show all When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically The Source Field Properties window is displayed SO1 multi record master S01 MRM EMPLOYEE DATA S01 MRM EMPLOYEE NUMBER Exercise 0 Oi multi record master S01 MRM EMPLOYEE DATA S01 MRM EMPLOYEE NUMBER Source Field Technical
77. name or a part of a name for selection a JOHN INPUT ACCEPTED AND STORED REPLACE REPLACE is a function that can be applied on a string You can use this function for 1 Replacing a string with a string of the same length page 248 2 Replacing a string at a specific location page 249 Replacing a string with a string of the same length This function changes only the first occurrence of a specific character sequence Format lt RETURNCODE gt REPLACE MAIN STRING SUBSTRING 1 Literal 1 SUB STRING2 literal 2 LENGTH numfield START POSITION numfield STRUCTURED EDITOR 249 Elements Description Element Description Required MAIN STRING The name of the alphanumeric field Target Source or yes Work Field that contains the string in which the replacement will occur SUB STRING1 literal 1 The substring or literal that needs to be replaced yes SUB STRING2 literal 2 The replacement substring or litteral yes LENGTH numfield The length of both the replacement string and the string no that will be replaced The length of both strings must be identical Note If the value of LENGTH is not given the default value will be the value of the function LENGTH applied to SUB STRING 1 START POSITION numfield The position at which the REPLACE should start If the no position is not specified or set to 0 or a negative value the position will be set to 1
78. name record name must be the name of a record defined within a Yes Source File that is identified by a SOURCEFILE command containing the NEW CONTROLLED option For example the following SOURCEFILE command identifies an output SourceFile SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER PREFIX OUT NEW CON TROLLED And the following PUT command writes a record to that SourceFile PUT OUT EMPLOYEE DATA Note that because the prefix OUT has been defined for the output Source File the record name as well as all other references to any component of that SourceFile must include that prefix A more complete example follows the Cautions and Hints section below Cautions and hints 1 All fields on the record being written should be assigned appropriate values before each PUT command is executed Fields to which no values have been assigned will contain unpredictable data 2 Ifyou want to copy a record from an existing Source File to a new Source File the easiest way to do this is to define a CHARACTER field beginning in the first character position of each record with a size equal to the record size All field values from the existing Source File can then be assigned to the fields of the new Source File using a single assignment command 3 When copying records from an existing Source File to a new Source File use the same Source File definition for both the existing and new Source Files by coding the PREFIX
79. not be used on occurring fields SYS ASCII The SYS ASCITI Source Field function converts the Source Field contents from the EBCDIC character set to ASCII character set The EBCDIC character set is used on mainframes Z OS BS 2000 ASCII is used on midframes and personal systems Usage Field name SYS ASCII Field name Field name must be an alphanumeric field Example Suppose that the user has transferred a fixed length file from mainframe to a windows system in binary format All binary and packed numeric fields can be read as they are Zoned numeric and Character fields can not be read because they are in EBCDIC format and they have to be converted before being interpreted Now you can code following lines ASC ZONED 1 EBC ZONED 1 SYS ASCII ASC ZONED 2 EBC ZONED 2 SYS ASCII ASC CHAR 1 EBC CHAR 1 SYS ASCII STRUCTURED EDITOR 285 Remarks SYS ASCITI can not be used on occurring fields SYS ASCII UNICODE The SYS ASCII UNICODE Source Field function converts the Source Field contents from the ASCII character set to the Unicode character set The ASCII character set is a one byte character set which is used on open systems Windows UNIX Linux Unicode is a multiple byte character set Usage Field name SYS ASCII UNICODE Field name Field name must be an alphanumeric field Example UCS2 CHAR 20 ASC CHAR 10 SY
80. of the called subroutine GET The GET command is used to read records from within procedural code The Source File containing the records to be read must have been identified already in the program request as a Controlled Source File e a Table Tree Source File A single GET command can be used to request a single record from the Source File However if the PATH option has been specified for Controlled Source Files you can request a collection of related Records Records can be obtained sequentially from any Source File If the file being accessed allows random retrieval i e is an ISAM BDAM VSAM database file or a table tree Source File then you can obtain records randomly based on a specified KeyField value Note that special considerations apply when accessing the records of database files When using the GET command to access database files refer to the appropriate database supplement You cannot use the GET command in a record input procedure Format GET record name SourceFile name KEY KeyField value_1 KeyField value_n RANDOM Elements Description Element Description Required Record or If the Source File being accessed does not Yes Source File contain the PATH option record name identification must be specified to identify the type of record to be obtained If the Source File does contain the PATH option SourceFile name must be specified instead and the generated program will r
81. option on the SOURCEFILE command for one or both of the Source Files 4 When creating a type INDEX or keyed VSAM Source File you must write the records of the Source File sequentially in KeyField order This is a restriction due to the access methods involved Take care therefore to ensure that the data input to the procedure executing the PUT command is in the proper sequence for the new Source File Also make sure to assign an appropriate KeyField value to the field designated as a KeyField on the KEY option when the Source File was defined 5 Ifyou are creating a VSAM Source File it must first be defined to VSAM using the IDCAMS utility Refer to the appropriate IBM documentation for information on this subject 6 Remember that all program requests must contain at least one Report or Target File Ifno other formatting commands are coded that is no TITLE HEADING DETAIL TOTAL or ENDPAGE commands no Report or Target File will be produced Example The most common situation in which you would want to create an output Source File is the case where a selected number of records from an existing Source File are to be copied to a separate Source File This may be desirable if a large number of programs are to be run against the same subset of data from a Source File or if it is necessary to preserve certain records from a volatile Source File in their current state STRUCTURED EDITOR 230 For example prior to running a sala
82. options allow to reorder objects Down In the Tree View the objects are ordered per type If there are at least two objects of the same type the Up and Down options become available You can only reorder objects of the same type Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Parameter File s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Parameter Files on page 83 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove the selected Parameter File from the MetaMap Model IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 31 Parameter File Record Context Menu If you right click a Source Record name belonging to Parameter File in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed ER H SampleModel r Source File Se PTHPatht Gi Source Record iF File Procedure Source Field Find Ctrl F BD pubicPi Find Net B D I Wat Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All
83. originally defined for it When you need to pass the value of a numeric input field to an external subroutine you should define a Work Field with the internal data type and size expected by the subroutine move the input field to the Work Field and then name the Work Field in the field name list Litteral Can be fixed text a number or a date No Example TARGETFIELD1 TARGETFIELD2 SYSTEM FUNCTION FUN X Al Bl Cl SYSTEM FUNCTION FUN Y WORK1 tax payer Remark Note that external functions almost always demand that A fixed number of fields should be made available by the calling program i e by your program request e Each field made available by the calling program is in exactly the same internal data format as is expected by the function The fields named in the field name list appear in a predefined sequence Ifa USER FUNCTION and a SYSTEM FUNCTION have the same name MetaMap will automatically ignore the SYSTEM FUNCTION because of the duplicate names However you can still explicitely call the SYSTEM FUNCTION with that name by adding the name in a string For more information refer to the User defined Functions Guide this additional option is sold separately Failure to adhere to these requirements may result in unpredictable action on the part of the called function STRUCTURED EDITOR 254 USER FUNCTION The USER FUNCTION command is used to execute an external function When proce
84. page 68 DATA SOURCES 70 6 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Source Path Record and its symbol C are displayed in the Tree View window 7 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Fields The following fields are available e Name page 70 Occurrence page 70 e Subordinate Record page 70 e Relationship page 70 Name Enter the name for the Path Record The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree Window preceded by the PRD indication It can contain up to 32 characters Occurrence If required enter the value indicating how many times a subordinate Record may occur Subordinate Record Use this field as follows 1 Click the Browse button next to this selection box The list of Subordinate Records or Source File Records assigned to the Source File is displayed 2 Select the required Subordinate Record and click OK The selected Source File Record is displayed in the Subordinate Record field Relationship This field applies for all RDBMS Source File types Use this field as follows 1 Click the Browse button next to this selection box The list of available Relationships is displayed DATA SOURCES 71 2 Select the required Relationship and click OK The selected Relationship is displayed in the Relationship field 8 9 External Arrays If you want to us
85. save the active Model under anoth er name Close Active Model Use this option to close the active Model without saving the changes Close All Models Use this option to close all Models without saving the chang es Save Properties Use this option to save the Properties of the MetaMap Object of which the Properties window is active in the Workspace Print Tree Use this option to print the opened Models as they are currently dis played in the Tree View Window Reconnect Use this option to connect to another MetaStore Repository The connection to the current MetaStore Repository is terminated and the Meta Suite Logon window is displayed again List of recently opened Models Exit Use this option to leave the program If there are any unsaved changes to the Models you will be asked if you want to save them now Edit The Edit menu contains the following standard Windows commands Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Find Replace You can use these options to cut copy paste find and replace text entries in Properties windows You can also undo one of these actions See Developer Toolbar on page 12 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 10 Menu Description View The View menu contains the following commands If a command is checked the matching item is displayed Main Toolbar See Main Toolbar on page 11 Wizard Toolbar See Wizard Toolbar on page 13
86. specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 29 Option Meaning Expand all Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Source Record s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Source Records on page 56 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to delete this Source Record Array Procedure Context Menu Ifyou right click an Array Procedure name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed p SampleModel a Source File i H PTHPathi Find Previous Expand All Option Meaning Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Array Procedure s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify
87. tab s Name page 146 e Execution Time page 146 e Commands Workspace page 146 Name Enter a name for the Procedure It is advised to select a name that describes the action performed The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree Window It can contain up to 32 characters Execution Time Select the required execution time from the drop down list The following options are available Option Meaning Initial Procedure will be executed before the mapping logic File Record and Target Procedures Target Field Value definitions Read Write Cycle This procedure will be performed in the normal read write flow between the source file procedures and the target file procedures and before execution of the first DETAIL OUTPUT PRE procedure The advantage of this procedure is the independency from any target file End of Job Procedure will be executed after the mapping logic File Record and Target Procedures Target Field Value definitions Commands Workspace In this field you can enter the commands that build the Program Procedure These commands are written in MXL MetaSuite Export Language See Structured Editor on page 186 1 To start entering commands click the Stop Edit icon 5 You can also right click the Workspace and select Start Stop Editing from the context menu or use F7 The list of available commands is displayed at the left of this field Invalid commands are displayed in red
88. the Automatic checkbox automatically becomes cleared Sort Fields It is interesting to define one or more Sort Fields for your Source File if it is not ordered in the sequence you want Double click the New button ki and select the required Sort Field from the list It will be displayed in the selection box If you double click this entry the Sort Field Properties window is displayed See Sort Fields on page 52 4 Fill out the fields as required and click Next The Business definition window is displayed Add Source gt Specify the business related information of this source Bland mb mam The following fields are available Field Meaning Business Rule In this field you can enter a Business Rule describing this Source File If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter additional information pertaining to this Source File If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 DATA SOURCES 93 5 Fill out the fields as required and click Next The Path definition window appears Note This window is only available for multi record files and database files The following fields are available Field Meaning
89. the COBOL source code will not be compiled at this stage You will then perform this operation manually at a later stage The script can be something else than a compile script It is possible that the script transfers the MGL and MRL to another platform or that it performs a check in procedure TRANSFORMATION PROGRAMS 165 4 The compile script which is defined in the INI Manager will be executed Results The Transformation Program COBOL source code is compiled The compiled COBOL program executable is saved in directory where the Compile Scripts are available As for the COBOL source program it is named after the Execution Name defined in the Model Properties window 5 The steps to take next are explained in the section Executing a Transformation Program page 166 14 2 Finding Error Messages To easily find any error messages that occurred during the generation of the Transformation Program you can use the buttons in the Developer Toolbar The following buttons are available e KE Find Generator Message CN D e H Find Next Generator Message Ca D e ey Find Previous Generator Message 1 Click the Find Generator Message button The following screen is displayed T Find in the Generator Messages x Message Type Any D Condition Contains D Search String Ir 2 Fill out the fields as required and click OK Field Meaning Message Type From the pop up list select the type of th
90. the MetaMap Model IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 Target Field Context Menu If you right click a Target Field name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 36 C SampleMode Source File E sourdefie2 i datawarehouse1 H a S01 xternal Array 6 H 03 datawarehouse 8 ADAB EMPLOYEE CLUSTER Source code control Caching of Relations d Caching of Core Data D Cachina camnleted gt 02 datawarehouse 1 Cu T01 Target Gg T01 Target Record fH New Close Model Add Create a Copy Remove All Sub Fields Up Down Find Find Next Find Previous Expand All Properties Sub Target Field Ctrl F e Shift F3 Option Meaning Select this option to add a new Target Field See Target Fields on page 114 New Add gt Sub Target Field Select this option to add a Sub Target Field Create a Copy Select this option to create a copy of the Model Remove All Sub Fields Select this option to remove all sub fields Up The Up and Down options allow to reorder objects Down In the Tree View the objects are ordered per type If there are at least two objects of the same type the Up and Down options become available You can only reorder objects of the same type Find Use this option to f
91. the Source File name select Add gt File Procedure The File Procedure Properties window is displayed Comman e New File Procedure we NI CASE a Exercise 0 employee master New File Procedure File Procedure i CONTINUE Technical Business DEBUG File Procedure Properties li DO Name A Execution Time File Input m Source Field Source File Source Record START d w SYS APPLICATION SYS APPLICATION GROUP Discard Close SYS AUTO SQLCODE X d Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections e Technical Tab page 65 Business Tab page 66 DATA SOURCES 65 5 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new File Procedure and its symbol are displayed in the Tree View window The symbol displayed depends on the execution time Input File End of File First Contact Initial Sort Initial Extract or Initial Prepass For an overview of the icons refer to the section Tree View Window page 13 6 Save your changes by doing one of the following Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Technical Tab The following fields are available e Name page 65 Execution Time page 65 Commands Workspace page 65 Name Enter a name for the Procedure It is advised to select a name that describes the action pe
92. the data transformation See Transformation Programs on page 163 Export Active Model to CDIF Select this option to export the selected Model to a CDIF format You can do this in order to obtain a CDF file containing all Objects from your Model with their Relationships See Exporting a Model to CDIF format on page 175 Note You need to register a Model before you can export it to CDIF IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 19 Option Meaning Save Active Model Select this option to save the selected Model with its current settings Save Active Model As Select this option to save the selected Model under another name Close Active Model Select this option to close the selected Model If there are any unsaved changes you will be asked if you want to save them or not Model Name Context Menu Ifyou right click the Model name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed Get Latest Version Check Out Check In Undo Check Out Add to Source Control Open from Source Control Show History Show Status Find Find Next Find Previous Package Mat Meteo These options have the following meaning Option Meaning New Select this option to create a new Model See MetaMap Models on page 47 Close Model Select this option to close the Model Source Wizard Select this option to start the Source Wizard
93. the file description you want to add and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically The Record Properties window is displayed DATACOM SALARIES DC RECORD SALARIES Exercise 0 DATACOM SALARIES DC RECORD SALARIES Source Record Technical Source Record Properties Name Dictionary Record DC RECORD SALARIES ke 5 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the section Fields page 76 6 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Source Record and its symbol r are displayed in the Tree View window 7 Save your changes by doing one of the following Click the Save Active Model kd button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model DATA SOURCES 76 Fields The following fields are available e Name page 76 e Dictionary Record page 76 Name This field is updated automatically with the name of the Source Record when adding the Source Record If required you can change the name in this field This name will be displayed in the Tree View window It can contain up to 32 characters and must be unique within t
94. the initial processing phase where the Initial Sort procedure contains a PRE PASS command In this case the same record will again be available for processing during the input phase of the generated program and the record input procedure will be executed again at that time Input File Used with this type of procedure the EXCLUDE command has the following effects Procedure e the current input record is rejected e the current procedure is exited meaning that no further commands will be executed for the current record e the generated program will attempt to read the next record from the Source File or the extract file if a SORT or EXTRACT command was coded in that Source File s initial procedure None of the reports or Target Files contained in the generated program will ever see input records excluded by Input File Procedures Detail Target Used with this type of procedure the EXCLUDE command has the following effects Procedure e the procedure is exited immediately e no further commands are executed and no additional detail formats are output for the excluded record e subsequent reports and Target Files will still have access to an input record excluded in a Report or Target File detail procedure Total Target Used with this type of procedure the EXCLUDE command has the following effects Procedure e the procedure is exited immediately e no further commands are executed
95. the next Source File The order of dragging is very important because in a one to many relationship you must drag from the ONE side to the MANY side The matching can be done using several values combined keys However if you match Source File 1 with Source File 2 using a combined key and next you want to match source file 2 with Source File 3 you should also use a combined key It is also possible to use Work Fields for matching for instance in order to convert data types A Work Field does not belong to a specific Source File That is why all Work Fields are repeated for each Source File Those Work Fields must be assigned via the INITIAL SORT INITIAL EXTRACT and INITIAL PREPASS procedures IKAN S The following screen is displayed DATA Sources 101 _ ModelForMatchingWizard Matc ModelForMatchingWizard Matc ModelForMatchingWizard Mat x E ModelForMatchingWizard a SourceFile 1 Cer EMPLOYEE DATA gt VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS i gt VOL TYPE i gt VOL CODE i gt VOL AMOUNT Sr SO1 EMPLOYEE DATA gt SO01 EMPLOYEE NUMBER E 01 DATE OF HIRE ip 01 ANNUAL SALARY i gt SO1 PAY RATE eh 0 1 EMPLOYEE NAME m e N S 4 o sourcerfe a EMPLOYEE DATA 19 EMPLOYEE NUMBER i gt DEPARTMENT E PAY CODE fi JOB TITLE CODE gt DATE OF HIRE i gt ANNUAL SALARY E PAY RATE ofp EMPLOYEE NAME E STREE
96. this specification is omitted a random number seed will be generated from the computer s clock The RANDOM option is not allowed on all formats of the SAMPLE command The advantage of specifying a random number seed is that you can duplicate a sample by later entering the same value for random number seed provided there has been no change in the number or order of records on the Source File All of the sampling techniques employ at one time or another the random number generator supplied with the system This random number generator uses the multiplicative congruence technique with a period of 2 to the 32nd power Detailed Descriptions SAMPLE SIZE This format of the SAMPLE command is used when you know the exact number of records to be included in your sample The only other information you will need with this format is the number of records contained in the population from which the sample will be drawn This number can be obtained from a previous run against the same subset of data from your Source File s or by using the COMPUTE command in a Source File initial procedure Format SAMPLE SIZE sample size POPULATION population count RANDOM random number seed Elements Element Description Required sample size Enter the exact number of records to be included in the sample You Yes can also enter the name of a non subscripted integer Work Field population Enter the exact count of records contained in the popula
97. this field to print the time on a report as a target for an assignment command or as part of a conditional test 20 7 STRUCTURED EDITOR 264 SYS TIMESTAMP The SYS TIMESTAMP field is defined automatically in each generated program It contains the current timestamp of the moment formatted as a 21 character alphanumeric value that represents the calendar date time of day and local time differential factor provided by the system on which the function is evaluated Usage Field name SYS TIMESTAMP SYS TIMESTAMP can only be used in the right hand side on an assignment Field name Field name is a character field that will be assigned the current timestamp It is implemented as the CURRENT_DATE function within COBOL Positions within the returned timestamp are Position 1 4 Year on 4 positions Position 5 6 Month of the year 01 through 12 Position 7 8 Day of the month 01 through 31 Position 9 10 Hours past midnight 00 through 23 Position 11 12 Minutes past the hour 00 through 59 Position 13 14 Seconds past the minute 00 through 59 Position 15 16 Hundredths of a second past the second 00 through 99 Position 17 Indicator whether time is behind or ahead GMT or Position 18 19 Number of hours that the time is behind or ahead of GMT Position 20 21 Number of additional minutes that the time is behind or ahead of GMT Remark for z OS The COBO
98. three sizes are allowed for binary fields half word two bytes full word four bytes and double word eight characters Internal storage depends on the operating system Bit This datatype indicates a field occupying a single bit storage A BIT type field may only contain the binary values 0 or 1 and its size will always be 1 It is possible to perform numeric operations on a BIT type field Byte This datatype is currently not supported Character This datatype indicates that the field may contain any possible character within the character set being used including unprintable characters It is not possible to perform numeric operations on a Character type field even when the field contains only digits National The National datatype is a subset of Unicode The character set on which it is based is UTF 16 but restricted to two bytes per character DBCS This datatype is currently not supported WorK FIELDS 138 Type Meaning Decimal This datatype indicates a field containing a packed decimal value Packed decimal is the most commonly used internal numeric data type Two decimal digits are contained in each byte of a packed decimal number However if the number is signed the last half byte contains a positive F or negative D sign indicator If the number is null signed the last half byte will be a dummy half byte and will not contain any meaningful digit Float This datatype indicates that the field con
99. to Version Management with Source Control page 181 Help The Help menu contains the following commands e Contents Use this option to access the MetaMap online help e About this option provides the release number of MetaMap IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 11 5 3 Main Toolbar If the Main Toolbar option in the View menu is selected the Main Toolbar is displayed underneath the Menu Bar The Main Toolbar contains the following icons Icon Meaning Description New Model You can use this option to create a new MetaMap Model See MetaMap 4 Models on page 47 Open Model You can use this option to open an existing MetaMap Model Save Active You can use this option to save the current settings of the active MetaMap A Model Model in the MetaSuite MetaStore Generate Active You need to generate the active Model in order to obtain the MetaMap ps Model transformation program See Transformation Programs on page 163 Export Active You can export the active MetaMap Model to a CDIF format in order to Si Model to CDIF obtain a CDF file containing all Objects from your Model with their Relationships See Exporting a Model to CDIF format on page 175 Package Active You can package the active Model in order to obtain the MetaMap Model ian Model msm its text format counterpart mxl the generated run script mrl the generated COBOL code mg and
100. to an MXL file The MSBMAP exe program for MetaSuite Batch MetaMap is located in the MetaSuite installation folder It can be used with an MS DOS prompt or in batch mode For more information on how the utility works type msbmap h on an MS DOS prompt where the executable is located in the current folder or in a directory that is contained in the Windows PATH 22 1 Using MSBMAP to Export MetaMap Models to the MXL Files Command format msbmap options MSM_Filename Where MSM_Filename is the name of the file containing the MetaMap Model If is used as a filename all models in the msm folder will be loaded and exported Options overview Option Description h or Help Displays this page u userid The User ID to log on to the MetaStore optional p password The password to log on to the MetaStore optional s DSN The data source name for the ODBC connection to the MetaStore optional d database The database to log on to the MetaStore optional o owner The owner of the MetaStore tables optional filename The MSM to be generated A wildcard can be used for multiple file selection i e f is optional m folder Folder of the MetaMap Models MSM files x folder Folder of the MXL files i filename INI file with preset settings for MetaSuite Mandatory if no user password etc are supplied The INI settings will be overridden by the specified ones
101. trace a certain field somewhere in your program sequence Note If you want to use the options Trace or Debug you have to select the option s BEFORE selecting the compiler 3 The packaging starts immediately The COBOL source code MGL and run script MRL are generated After successful completion of this process the MetaMap Model MSM will be saved Results Depending on the MetaMap Manager settings specified in the INI Manager the Model Version number is incremented or not The MUL file is generated The following files are copied to the MSP directory defined in the User Profile or in the metasuite ini file package file MUL MetaMap Model MSM MetaMap Exported Model MXL COBOL Source Code MGL and the run script MRL If no default Package script is defined in the User Profile or in the MetaSuite ini file no packaging can be done The available package scripts are located in the system folder that is defined with the INI manager The default is lt ins gt lt gen gt System You can copy the scripts to your personal environment in the TMP folder which is defined with the INI manager as well The default value is lt doc gt lt gen gt tmp where e lt doc gt is the MetaSuite work folder in My Documents e lt gen gt is the directory containing Generator specific files This name always starts with the indication GEN and is followed by the Generator Name For Fujitsu_Windows for in
102. want to define logic that must be executed before or after the calculation of the Target Fields based on the contents of the Value or Data Source page 116 fields For more information refer to the chapter Structured Editor page 186 There are several types of Target Procedures depending on the time of execution You can define one Target Procedure of each type for each Target Detail Output Post Detail Output Pre e End of File End of Job e nitialization e Total Output Post e Total Output Pre See Execution Time on page 123 Procedure 1 Open the required Model DATA TARGETS 122 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Target is displayed 3 Right click the Target name and select Add gt Target Procedure The Target Procedure properties window is displayed A Comman x T0l datawarehouse Y New Target Procedure CASE COMPUTE CONTINUE Technical Business Ir Exercise 0 T01 datawarehouse New Target Procedure Target Procedure DEBUG Target Procedure Properties EXCLUDE EXEC IDMS l EXEC SQL EXIT GET HALT IF INVOKE NEXT PUT REM SAMPLE SET Source Field Source File Source Record START SYS APPLICATION SYS APPLICATION GROUP SYS AUTO SQLCODE SYS DATE SYS DB CONNECT SYS DB DATABASE SYS DB PASSWORD m DO Name A Execution Time Detail Output Pre SYS DB USER SYS INVOKE RETURN SYS LI
103. you need to pass the value of a numeric input field to an external subroutine you should define a Work Field with the internal data type and size expected by the subroutine move the input field to the Work Field and then name the Work Field in the field name list SourceRecord name SourceRecord name identifies a record to be passed to the No external subroutine You can include up to 16 record names with this command The named records will be made available to the subroutine for processing TargetRecord name TargetRecord name identifies a record to be passed to the No external subroutine You can include up to 16 record names with this command The named records will be made available to the subroutine for processing Example TARGETFIELD1 FUNCTION FUN X Al Bl C1 TARGETFIELD2 FUNCTION NUMVAL WORK1 N Cc anc Act AQ ite MeraMa MANACER YE EA Q IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 STRUCTURED EDITOR 217 Remark Note that external subroutines almost always demand that A fixed number of records fields should be made available by the calling program i e by your program request Each record field made available by the calling program is in exactly the same internal data format as is expected by the subroutine The records fields named in the field name list appear in a predefined sequence Failure to adhere to these requirements may result in unpredictable action on the part
104. 3 Right click the Parameter File name and select Add Source Record 4 Select the file description you want to add and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath e Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically DATA SOURCES 86 The Record Properties window is displayed 01 multi record master_ S01 MRM EMPLOYEE DATA multi O1 multi record master S01 MRM EMPLOYEE DATA Source Record Technical Source Record Properties Name IRM EMPLOYEE DATA Dictionary Record MRM EMPLOYEE DATA el 5 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the section Fields page 86 6 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Source Record and its symbol t are displayed in the Tree View window 7 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Fields e Name page 86 Dictionary Record page 86 Name This field is updated automatically with the name of the Source Record when adding the Record If required you can change the name in this field The
105. 6 Export to MXL 316 Return Codes 317 P Packaging 176 Parameter File 83 Prerequisites 5 Program Procedures 144 Public Procedures 148 R Run time Parameters 307 SYS DATE CHECK 311 SYS ERROR LIMIT 312 SYS INPUT LIMIT 313 SYS LIMITS CHECK 313 SYS NUMERIC CHECK 313 SYS READ LIMIT 314 SYS RECORD SNAP 314 SYS USER DATE 315 SYS USER MIX 315 SYS USER NUM 315 S Source External Array 71 Array Procedure 79 Source Field 76 Source Record 75 Sub Source Field 77 Parameter File 83 Source File 50 File Procedure 63 Source Field 58 Source Record 56 Sub Source Field 59 88 Structured Field 83 Source Control Version Management 181 Source File 50 File Procedure 63 Source Field 58 Source Record 56 Sub Source Field 59 88 Source Wizard 90 Structured Editor 186 Attributes 274 Commands 188 Constants 264 Notation Conventions 188 Structural Elements 187 System Functions 283 Structured Field 83 Subfields 142 SYS DATE CHECK 311 SYS ERROR LIMIT 312 SYS INPUT LIMIT 313 SYS LIMITS CHECK 313 SYS NUMERIC CHECK 313 SYS READ LIMIT 314 SYS RECORD SNAP 314 SYS USER DATE 315 SYS USER MIX 315 SYS USER NUM 315 Target Target End Page 120 Target Field 114 Target File 104 Target Heading 119 Target Procedure 121 Target Record 111 Target Report 104 Target Title 119 Target End Page 120 Target Field 114 Target File 104 Target Heading 119 Target Procedure 121 INDEX 319 Target Record 111 Target Report 104 Target Title
106. 72 e Business Tab page 74 DATA SOURCES 72 5 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new External Array and its symbol E are displayed in the Tree View window 6 Save your changes by doing one of the following Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Technical Tab The following fields are available on the Technical tab e Name page 72 e Organization page 72 e Prefix page 72 e Dictionary File page 72 Occurrence page 73 e Warning Rate page 73 e Binary Search page 73 Use Sort Fields page 73 e Sort Fields page 73 Name This field is automatically updated with the name of the Dictionary File when you select it in the Dictionary File field below If required you can change the name in this field This name will be displayed in the Tree View window It can contain up to 32 characters Organization This read only field displays the File Type of the Dictionary File Prefix In this field you can enter a prefix for this Source File You might for instance define the prefixes OLD and NEW if you are working with different versions of the same file A Prefix has a fixed length of 4 characters and must start with an alphabetic character Dictionary File Click the Browse button at the right of the Dictionary File name to display the Dictionary File Properties window DATA SOURCES 73 Occurrence Enter the maximum num
107. 8 S02 SourceFile3 r 02 SourceFile3 ET WorkField1 EF WorkField1 ET WorkField2 P WorkField2 Cer SO2 EMPLOYEE DATA Cer SO2 EMPLOYEE DATA E SO02 EMPLOYEE NUMBER E SO2 EMPLOYEE NUMBER E SO2 DEPARTMENT E SO2 DEPARTMENT F E 502 PAY CODE E E SO2 PAY CODE E S02 JOB TITLE CODE E S02 JOB TITLE CODE E SO2 DATE OF HIRE E SO2 DATE OF HIRE E SO2 ANNUAL SALARY E SO2 ANNUAL SALARY E SO2 PAY RATE E SO2 PAY RATE E SO2 EMPLOYEE NAME E SO2 EMPLOYEE NAME E S02 STREET ADDRESS E S02 STREET ADDRESS E SO2 CITY ADDRESS E SO2 CITY ADDRESS E S02 STATE CODE 7 E S02 STATE CODE L S02 ZIP CODE E S02 ZIP CODE E S02 SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER E SO02 SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER E S02 SECURITY CLEARANCE CODE E S02 SECURITY CLEARANCE CODE S E S02 VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS S E SO2 VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS E SO2 VOL TYPE E SO2 VOL TYPE E S02 VOL CODE E S02 VOL CODE gt S02 VOL AMOUNT E E S02 VOL AMOUNT E S a mm gt This window lists the Source Files assigned to this Model 3 Define the required Matches You always have to create a match from a higher source file in the hierarchy of the tree to a lower source file If a conflict occurs because of this hierarchical order please modify the order of the files in the Tree View window Click and drag the required Fields from the first to the second Source File Then click and drag the required Fields from the second to
108. 98 Example 2 Test Assume that four types of calculations have to be performed depending on whether a sales branch number is in the city of New York BRANCH 5 in the eastern sales region BRANCH 1 through 13 in the state of Wyoming BRANCH 22 or in the western sales region any other BRANCH number A CASE command to execute a separate routine for each of these values of the BRANCH field would be coded as follows CASE BRANCH NUMBER EQ 5 DO NY CITY CALC E T3 DO EASTERN CALC EQ 22 DO WYOMING CALC ELS RO DO WESTERN CALC END CASE Note If the first and second tests were switched the New York City calculation routine NY CITY CALC would never be executed because a BRANCH number of 5 would satisfy the LE 13 less than or equal to 13 test Example 3 True command In the following example the true commands for the first and second tests each contain two assignment commands while the true command for the third test contains only a single assignment command CASE BALANCE DUE LT 0 NEG COUNT NEG COUNT 1 NEG TOT NEG TO BALANCE DUE GT 0 POS COUNT POS COUNT 1 POS TOT POS TO BALANCE DUE EQ 0 ZERO COUNT ZERO COUNT 1 END CASE Example 4 False command The previous example could be modified to use the ELSE option instea
109. Array to the Model See External Arrays on page 71 Source Wizard Select this option to start the Source Wizard The Source Wizard can assist you in selecting your data sources See Source Wizard on page 90 Add gt Path It is not possible to add a Path to an External Array Therefore this option is not active Add gt Array Procedure Select this option to add an Array Procedure to the External Array An Array Procedure is used to program additional logic to the Array See Array Procedures on page 79 There can only be one Array Procedure for an External Array Add gt Source Record Select this option to add a Source Record to the External Array Only Source Records belonging to the Dictionary File that have not yet been assigned to the External Array can be added See Source Records for an External Array on page 75 Create a Copy Select this option to create a copy of the Model Up The Up and Down options allow to reorder objects Down In the Tree View the objects are ordered per type If there are at least two objects of the same type the Up and Down options become available You can only reorder objects of the same type Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type IKAN Solutions METASUITE
110. Decimal e Numeric Separated Select the Separated checkbox when a sign indicator is stored as a separate digit By default this separate digit is appended at the end When both the Separated and Leading checkboxes are selected the sign digit is added in front of the field This only applies for the numeric field type When the Separated checkbox is checked the size will include the sign digit as well Leading Select the Leading checkbox when a sign indicator is stored in the first digit of the field When both the Separated and Leading checkboxes are selected the sign digit is added in front of the field This only applies for the numeric field type CCSID Enter the Coded Character Set Identifier CCSID is used by IBM as the abbreviation for Coded Character Set Identifier It is a 16 bit number that represents a specific encoding of a specific code page CCSID is commonly used for the data subtype CHARACTER in order to distinguish the different character sets per country language and the character encoding of the system Despite of the philosophical approach of Unicode CCSID can also be used on data type NATIONAL This CCSID is an enriched property and will not be collected Initial This field is optional 10 2 WorK FIELDS 142 Enter the initial value for the Work field This value will be stored in the field before processing begins The value specified must be of the same general data type as the Workf
111. E 8 1 3 TRANSFORMATION PROGRAMS 174 Code Meaning 9188 File name too large 9193 Error in variable length count 9194 File size too large 9195 DELETE REWRITE not preceded by a READ 9196 Record number too large in relative or indexed file 9210 File is closed with lock 9213 Too many locks 9218 Malformed MULTIPLE REEL UNIT file 9219 Operating system shared file limit exceeded IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 CHAPTER 15 Exporting a Model to CDIF format CDIF is a published set of vendor and method independent definitions for Metadata Concepts in general and for Data Modelling and related concepts in particular When you export a Model to CDIF format a CDF file is created This file contains all Objects available in the Model with their relationships and can be used to enter the MetaSuite Program definition in a Platinum repository 1 Open the required Model 2 Click the Export Active Model to CDIF icon 2 on the Standard Toolbar CHAPTER 16 Packaging a Model Packaging a Model means saving the following files in a specific Package folder defined in the User Profile the MetaMap Model MSM the MetaMap Model translated in text format MXL the COBOL source code MGL the run script MRL a summary file MUL listing the used MDLs the generated objects and the used run script The purpose of packaging a model is allowing the user to use a
112. E SELECT NUMBER fields and the EMPLOYEE MASTER indexed file To obtain a report of employee information you might use the code below SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE SELECTION SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER CONTROLLED BY EMPLOYEE SELECTION EY EMPLOYEE SELECT NUMBER REPORT 1 ETAIL 1 EMPLOYEE NUMBER DEPARTMENT JOB CODE EMPLOYEE NAME SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER Ee Sal At the run level that is for all reports and Target Files in the program there are two ways in which you can exclude paths at the level of the controlling Source File either before any controlled sets are built or after a controlled set is built You might also want to build controlled sets then exclude on the controlled Source File level STRUCTURED EDITOR 213 EXCLUDING BEFORE THE CONTROLLED SET IS BUILT To exclude individual paths from the controlling Source File before any controlled sets are built use an Initial Sort Source File input or record input procedure for the controlling Source File Example For our example above we might include the following procedure to eliminate all controlling records with an EMPLOYEE SELECTION NUMBER greater than 3000 BEGIN SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE SELECTION INPUT IF EMPLOYEE SELECTION NUMBER GT 3000 EXCLUDE A record input procedure would have been just as
113. ECORD INPUT Record Input Procedure Name RECORD INPUT m ap m 5 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections e Technical Tab page 62 e Business Tab page 63 6 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Record Procedure and its symbol GS are displayed in the Tree View window DATA SOURCES 62 7 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Technical Tab The following fields are available For detailed information refer to the separate sections e Name page 62 Commands Workspace page 62 Name The Record Procedure name is displayed in this field The default value is RECORD INPUT You can delete it and replace it by another name It is advised to select a name that describes the action performed by the Record Procedure The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree Window It can contain up to 32 characters Commands Workspace In this field you can enter the commands that build the Record Procedure These commands are written in the MetaSuite Definition language 1 Enter the required commands By default the list of available commands is displayed at the left of this field Invalid commands are displayed in red D Note If you do not need the assisted mode you can switch it off using th
114. ED SOURCEFILES If the Source File to be started is a keyed Source File start key must be any Source File or literal of the same general data type as the KeyField defined for the Source File STARTING SEQUENTIAL SOURCEFILES If the Source File to be started is a sequential i e non keyed file e Start key must be the name of a field in the Source File i e it may not be a Work Field or the name of a field in another SourceFile e The records of the Source File must appear in ascending sequence by the value of the start key field e Prior to coding the START command a starting value must be as signed to the field that is named as the start key field Examples Example 1 Starting Keyed SourceFiles The following Initial Sort procedure might be coded to begin processing a VSAM version of the EMPLOYEE MASTER Source File at the first employee number equal to or greater than 30000 The KeyField for this Source File is defined as a 5 digit packed numeric field BEGIN SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER INITIAL START EMPLOYEE MASTER KEY 30000 Example 2 Starting Sequential SourceFiles Assume that the records of the payroll detail Source File are in sequence by employee number The following initial Source File procedure positions that Source File at the first record for the first employee whose employee number is equal to or greater than 30000 BEGIN SOURCEFILE PAYROLL DETAIL INITIAL PD EMPLOYEE NUMBER 30000 START PAYROLL
115. EE NUMBER Example 3 The following command requests that a DEPARTMENT record from the DEPARTMENT DETAIL file be obtained for an employee whose department number DEPARTMENT and SUB DEPARTMENT on the EMPLOYEE MASTER file is equal to the department DD DEPARTMENT DD SUBDEPARTMENT field from the DEPARTMENT DETAIL file GET DEPARTMENT DATA KEY DEPARTMENT SUB DEPARTMENT Example 4 SYS DIRECT KEY To find the department description from the DEPARTMENT DETAIL file for the above mentioned employee the following commands are needed W INDEX DEPARTMENT DETAIL SYS DIRECT KEY IF W INDEX EQ 0 PUT NO DEPARMENT INFORMATION FOUND ELSE W DEPARTMENT DESC DD DESCRIPTION W INDEX Example 5 SYS CURRENT KEY To find the department description from the DEPARTMENT DETAIL file for the above mentioned employee the following commands can be used as well IF SYS CURRENT KEY EQ 0 THEN W DEPARTMENT DESCRIPTION NO DEPARMENT INFORMATION FOUND STRUCTURED EDITOR 220 ELSE W DEPARTMENT DESCRIPTION DD DESCRIPTION SYS CURRENT KEY END IF Example 6 GET RANDOM GET DEPARTMENT DATA KEY RANDOM W DEPARTMENT DESCRIPTION DD DESCRIPTION SYS CURRENT KEY After the GET RANDOM operation the v
116. EE NUMBER LT FIRST EMP OR EMPLOYEE NUMBER GT LAST EMP EXCLUDE However the compound conditional command requires more keystrokes and is more difficult to read Example 5 Nested IF To illustrate the nested IF command assume that a special calculation has to be performed for hourly employees only PAY CODE 1 but there are two variations of that calculation one for those employees with an hourly wage PAY RATE of 12 50 or more and one for all other employees If the two calculations are contained in routines named CALC A and CALC B the appropriate routine for each hourly employee could be executed by coding the following nested conditional command STRUCTURED EDITOR 306 IF PAY CODE EQ 1 IF PAY RATE GE 12 50 DO CALC A ELSE DO CALC B The first conditional expression tests whether the value of the PAY CODE field is equal to 1 Whenever that condition is true the second nested conditional expression is tested One of the two routines is executed depending on the evaluation of that expression Example 6 Compound conditional expressions combining conditional keywords The examples below illustrate the use of logical operators to create compound conditional commands The use of parentheses is described separately following those examples Assume that you want to print the second output line for only those employees from the third
117. EM FUNC TION cc ssecaciesseccesceesddu cen cedacedh oe thce ege beer cba aiieke onan deewshek Eed SES Gaede es te ade deseg 252 WISERZEU NGTIOWN zoeen erario era a a eege Eege eet 254 EIN EE 255 SYS CURREN THEY E 256 Ch EE 257 SYS GROUPHCOUNT RE 257 SYS GROUR TEVE EE 257 CH CTIE TT 258 SYS PAGE NUMBER degen deched scweseeis tea EEEE GEA tices dee deeedeeh REAREN OEE EEEE EREE EEEN RA 258 SYS RAN DOM D EE 259 SYS REC EE 259 SYS RECORD LENG Ti EE 260 SYS RES TART E 261 SYS RETURN C ODE oa ee EE ed 262 CN Seas E EE 262 SYS SOUES FATE EE 262 Eh ERREECHEN 263 SCH GER 263 SYS TIMESTAMP E 264 20 7 20 8 20 9 TABLE OF CONTENTS vii CONSTANTS A sicbeedvesiocdecs dane seceeatbndvotiea lavgeadesedntoeleaadabar vee snnsuescendubs cedenlangesseteevssbessaaduaawsdenbasbesventapiexes 264 EA REG Le RT 265 SYS EOF enges reegen eegen 265 EA TEE 266 le DT RE 266 SYS INVALIDsDA TE sss cesttestoscvestnssteavetdsataes esletacdhs RE EE RET E E A vveenel E ese eves dees 267 SYS INVOKEsRETUORN BEE 267 e TEE 268 EA e EU 268 EELER 269 EA EIERE TEE 269 SYS NUMVALIDATE visccsssesseccisteesseccs thevevessvedviacs sivasisscsietatebesactuaaysnsca A EEEE A i aeia a EE a 270 E EE D AEE E E O ATOE NEA 271 Ee 271 SYS OUTAOF RANGE eesriie nasi e vues ev TEE EE est sbaad ecb utasues din E EEE OEE EEES 272 SYS PROGRAM oschessedenctesasstiaveteiastvteussss tase EANES E EE EE EE E ES EEE A E TEE SEEE RANEES ARER 273 SYS WHEN COMPILED sses tiesiai ieia
118. ER INTERFACE 18 Object Types depending from a Work Field The following table lists the Object Type that may depend on a Work Field Dependent Object Type Symbol Meaning Subfield See Subfields on page 142 Context Menus This section provides an overview of the context menus which you access by right clicking an element Tree View Title Bar Ifyou right click the Model Name in the Title Bar the following context menu is displayed New Model Open Model Generate Active Model Export Active Model to CDIF tal Save Active Model Save Active Model As Close Active Model gt JOB TITLE CODE gt DATE OF HIRE gt ANNUAL SALARY ip PAYRATE E gt EMPLOYEE NAME gt STREET ADDRESS i gt CITY ADDRESS E gt STATE CODE gt ZIP CODE i E VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS 5 4 T01 datawarehouse These options have the following meaning Option Meaning New Model Select this option to create a new Model See MetaMap Models on page 47 Open Model Select this option to open an existing Model The list of existing Models with the msm extension available in the standard Model directory is displayed You typically open an existing Model if you want to verify or modify its settings Generate Active Model Select this option to generate the selected Model You need to generate a Model in order to obtain the MetaSuite program that will actually perform
119. ETASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 DATA TARGETS 130 5 Fill out the fields as required and click Next The business properties windows is displayed Add Target gt Specify the business related information of this Target File Business Rule The following fields are available Field Meaning Business Rule In this field you can enter a Business Rule describing this Target If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter additional information pertaining to this Target If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R 6 Fill out the fields as required and click Finish The new Target appears in the Tree View window 7 The next logical step is to define or map the Target Fields Use the Mapping Wizard page 130 if you want to define 1 to 1 mappings Use the Manual Procedure page 114 if you want to define more complex mappings 9 9 Mapping Wizard Mapping means defining the rules to calculate between the Source and Target Fields You can use the Mapping Wizard if you want to define 1 to 1 mappings 1 Open an existing Model or create a new Model For this procedure the Model named ModelForMapping Wizard was opened IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 DATA TARGE
120. F Field name SYS STATUS EQ SYS OUT OF RANGE Example Suppose the voluntary deductions within the EMPLOYEE MASTER file is an OCCURS DEPENDING ON Counter field If you want to check whether the Counter in the EMPLOYEE MASTER file contains a value within the range of possible occurring voluntary deductions you can add following logic in your program CASE Counter SYS STATUS EQ SYS NOT NUMERIC EQ SYS OUT OF RANGE Runtime setting You must set the runtime setting SYS NUMERIC CHECK to prevent the invalid numeric Source Fields to be excluded during initial processing from the normal program logic Example SYS NUMERIC CHECK IGNORE STRUCTURED EDITOR 273 SYS PROGRAM The SYS PROGRAM is set automatically in each generated program It will contain the COBOL program name of the extraction program It can not be overwritten in the extraction program Usage Field nam SYS PROGRAM SYS PROGRAM can only be used on the right hand side of an assignment Field name Field name is a character field that will be assigned the COBOL program name of the extraction program SYS WHEN COMPILED The SYS WHEN COMP ILED is defined automatically in each generated program It contains the timestamp the program was compiled formatted as a 21 character alphanumeric value that represents the calendar date time of day and local time differential factor provided by the system on which the functi
121. Field If required you can change the name in this field This name will be displayed in the Tree View window It can contain up to 32 characters and must be unique within the Record Dictionary Field This read only field displays the name of the Dictionary Field You can click the Browse button next to it to display its properties DATA Sources 90 8 19 Source Wizard Use the Source Wizard to e Adding a Source File page 90 e Adding an External Array page 94 e Adding a Parameter File page 97 Adding a Source File 1 Open an existing Model or create a new Model 2 Select the Source Wizard icon En from the Wizard Toolbar The following window is displayed Add Source gt Select a Dictionary File and one or more Source Record s New Source File The following fields are available Field Meaning Name This field will be updated automatically with the name of the Dictionary File after having selected the Dictionary File and the required Record s The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree View window Note If needed you can modify the name later on See Source Files on page 50 Prefix In this field you can enter a prefix for this Source File You might for instance define the prefixes OLD and NEW if you are working with different versions of the same file A Prefix has a fixed length of 4 characters including the dash Source Type Select Source
122. Field Xx MetaSuite Model 06 New Work Field Work Field Work Field Properties Name Occurrence 1 Parameter Expose Starting Position 1 Size 1 Content Te Date Format Decimals 0 A Calculat Edit Mask CCSID 0 Initialt code Two tabs are available Technical and Business 3 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections e Technical Tab page 136 e Business Tab page 142 Wopk FIELDS 136 4 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Work Field and its symbol Pp are displayed in the Tree View window 5 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model button on the Main Toolbar Select File gt Save Active Model Technical Tab The following fields are available on the Technical tab Work Field Properties Name page 136 Occurrence page 136 Parameter page 137 Expose page 137 Starting Position page 137 Size page 137 e Advanced Type page 137 Date Format page 138 Decimals page 139 Edit Mask page 139 Unsigned page 141 Separated page 141 Leading page 141 CCSID page 141 Initial page 141 Code page 142 Name Enter a name for the Work Field It is advised to select a name that describes the nature or purpose of the Work Field The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree Window It can contain up to 32 characters
123. File name identifies one of the Source Files being matched If the match key of the current record from the named Source File is equal to the current match key the condition will test as true and the specified true command will be executed If the match key is not equal to the current match key the condition will test as false the true command will be bypassed and any specified false command described below will be executed True command may be any procedural command or sequence of procedural commands except the CASE command See Example 1 True command on page 226 STRUCTURED EDITOR 226 Element Description Required false command The ELSE option specifies the action to be taken if the PRESENT No condition tests as false i e the current record from the specified Source File contains a record with a match key other than the current match key When this occurs the previously described true command will be bypassed and any specified false command will be executed False command may be any procedural command or sequence of procedural commands except the CASE command See Example 2 False command on page 226 Examples Example 1 True command For example if the current match key is 12345 and the current record from the EMPLOYEE MASTER Source File contains that match key value the following command IF EMPLOYEE MASTER PRESENT PUT 4 tests as true and the fourth detail line is printed However if the c
124. GE ED Public Procedure Organization Standard v GP Work Field Prefi fo Dictionary File datawarehouse v45 Eq Output S Description Ka Source Record PP_employee is being reused as source An unique pr Autosaving SampleModel OK save changes to SampleModel msm Cancel MetaSuite MetaMap Manager Save changes to SampleModel msm D m r Compile Generate IKAN Solutions N V C Users ano AppData Roaming MetaSuite MetaSuite ini 22 06 2011 10 57 by IKAN ano 22 12 2011 9 57 by IKAN ano NUM Note You can also position the window outside the main MetaSuite window on your Desktop IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 CHAPTER 6 MetaMap Models Overview Creating a new Model involves the following steps Chapters Sections MetaMap Models page 47 Source Files page 50 Source Records page 56 Source Fields page 58 Record Procedures page 61 Path page 67 Source Path Records page 69 File Procedures page 63 External Arrays page 71 Source Records for an External Array page 75 Source Fields for an External Array page 76 Array Procedures page 79 Parameter Files page 83 Source Records for a Parameter File page 85 Source Fields for a Parameter File page 87 Data Sources page 49 Target Files or Reports page 104 Target Records page 111 Target F
125. GH VALUE can be used in the ADD RECORD command to identify a record in a multiple record type SourceFile ADD RECORD record name KEY key field EQ SYS HIGH VALUE nat STRUCTURED EDITOR 267 SYS INVALID DATE The SYS INVALID DATE Source Field status will be set when the Source Field that is defined as a date does not have a valid date value When the Source Field is a numeric date you must first check whether the value in the Source Field is indeed numeric through SYS NOT NUMERIC before checking whether the field contains a valid date Usage IF Field name SYS STATUS EQ SYS INVALID DATE Example If you want to check whether the date of hire in the EMPLOYEE MASTER file contains a valid date you can add following logic in your program CASE date of hire SYS STATUS EQ SYS NOT NUMERIC EQ SYS INVALID DATE Runtime Setting To prevent the invalid date Source Fields to be excluded during initial processing from the normal program logic you must set the runtime setting SYS DATE CHECK Additionally when the date is a numeric date you must set the runtime setting SYS NUMERIC CHECK to prevent the invalid numeric Source Fields to be excluded during initial processing from the normal program logic Example SYS NUMERIC CHECK IGNORE SYS DATE CHECK IGNORE Note Source date fields with value 0 or spaces all zeroes for numeric
126. GIN REPORT or BEGIN TARGETFILE command Public procedures may be nested which is to say that within the named procedure other public procedures within the scope of the current main Source File Report or Target File procedure can be executed Example 2 The most common use of the DO command is to simplify the coding of conditional commands The example below illustrates this use The following conditional command is difficult to code and follow because each condition of the IF command true or false results in the execution of multiple commands IF SALES REGION EQ 1 2 EAST COUNT EAST COUNT 1 EAST AMT EAST AMT BALANCE DUE PUT 2 3 ELSE WEST COUNT WEST COUNT 1 WEST AMT WEST AMT BALANCE DUE PUT 4 5 This command is not only cumbersome to code it is very easy to omit a continuation character for example but also difficult to read The same process could be defined using the DO and BEGIN commands below IF SALES REGION EQ 1 2 DO EAST CUST ELS Bo DO WEST CUS EGIN EAST CUS AST COUNT EAST COUNT 1 EAST AMT EAST AMT BALANCE DUE UT 2 3 bi Ww TO BEGIN WEST CUST WEST COUNT WEST COUNT 1 W E EST AMT WEST AMT BALANCE DUE UT 4 5 Coded this way the IF comma
127. IELD UT 1 UT COUNT OUT COUNT 1 OU OH BEGIN REPORT 1 EOJ IF OUT COUNT EQ 0 SYS RETURN CODE 16 SYS SOL AREA The SYS SQL AREA is automatically defined in each generated program that accesses an RDBMS through SQL either as an SQL Source File or as an embedded SQL statement It contains the SQLCA contents of the last executed SQL statement You can either check the SYS SQL AREA in the Source File Input procedure to check the SOL CA for the selected row within the SQL SourceFile or after an embedded SQL statement SYS SOLSTATE The SYS SQLSTATE is automatically defined in each generated program that accesses an RDBMS through SQL either as an SQL Source File or as an embedded SQL statement It contains the SQLSTATE after the execution of an SQL statement The SQLSTATE is a 5 character field that is filled by the RDBMS when an embedded SQL statement is executed You can check the SYS SQLSTATE after an embedded SQL statement STRUCTURED EDITOR 263 SYS RUNTIME STATUS The SYS RUNTIME STATUS system variable is automatically defined in each generated program This variable contains the status of the last executed statement when e either the command is a computation assignment in this case when an error occurs the program will return 8006 e or the assignment is a date assignment e or in case of an I O operation e or any other cas
128. L function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher Constants The following constants are available SYS DUPLICATE page 265 SYS EOF page 265 SYS ERROR page 266 SYS HIGH VALUE page 266 SYS INVALID DATE page 267 SYS INVOKE RETURN page 267 SYS LOW VALUE page 268 SYS NOT NUMERIC page 268 STRUCTURED EDITOR 265 e SYS NOT RELATED page 269 e SYS NULL VALUE page 269 e SYS NUMVALIDATE page 270 e SYS OK page 271 e SYS OUT OF LIMIT page 271 e SYS OQUT OF RANGE page 272 e SYS PROGRAM page 273 e SYS WHEN COMPILED page 273 SYS DUPLICATE The SYS DUPLICATE Source File status is used to check whether a duplicate occurrence is read from a Source File based on the values of the Source File Sort fields It can be used in a Source File Input procedure or on a Target File Detail procedure Usage IF SourceFile name SYS IO STATUS EQ SYS DUPLICATE Example The following code prevents the processing of duplicate values for the EMPLOYEE NUMBER in the EMPLOYEE MASTER SourceFile BEGIN SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER INITIAL SORT EMPLOYEE NUMBER IF EMPLOYEE MASTER SYS IO STATUS EQ SYS DUPLICATE EXCLUDE When a row is read from the EMPLOYEE MASTER that has the same EMPLOYEE NUMBER as the previous row the EMPLOYEE MASTER SYS IO STATUS field will be equal to SYS DUPLICATE In this case
129. METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 28 Option Meaning Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the External Array s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See External Arrays on page 71 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove the selected External Array from the MetaMap Model External Array Source Record Context Menu If you right click a Source Record name belonging to an External Array in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed Source Field Find Ctrl F Find Next F3 Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All Properties Remove Option Meaning New Select this option to add a Source Record for the External Array See Source Records for an External Array on page 75 Add gt Source Select this option to add a Source Field to this Source Record See Source Fields for an Field External Array on page 76 Up The Up and Down options allow to reorder objects Down In the Tree View the objects are ordered per type If there are at least two objects of the same type the Up and Down options become available You can only reorder objects of the same type Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a
130. MVALC STRUCTURED EDITOR 295 Field name Field name must be a character field that contains a printed numeric value When the field name contains a numeric value with decimals the expected decimal point is set by the CHANGE DEFAULT DECIMAL command within the MetaSuite generator The CHANGE DEFAULT DECIMAL will switch the representation of a decimal point from Point to Comma and vice versa For more information on the CHANGE DEFAULT DECIMAL command refer to the Generator Manager User Guide SYS NUMVALC is implemented as the NUMVALC function within COBOL It can therefore be used to move the numeric value of an alphanumeric field in a numeric field Remarks SYS NUMVALC can not be used on occurring fields Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher SYS RANDOM The Field name SYS RANDOM is automatically defined in each generated program for numeric fields either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will generate a random sequence number for which the numeric field is taken as a seed Format Field name SYS RANDOM Field name Field name must be a numeric field SYS RANDOM is implemented as the RANDOM function within COBOL Remarks SYS RANDOM can not be used on occurring fields Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher STRUCTURED EDITOR 296 SYS RAW The SYS RAW field is automatically defined in all g
131. MetaMap Manager User Guide Release 8 1 3 November 2013 D METASUITE IKAN Solutions N V Schali nhoevedreef 20A B 2800 Mechelen BELGIUM Copyright 2013 IKAN Solutions N V No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronically or mechanically for any purpose without the express written permission of IKAN Solutions N V MetaSuite is a trademark of IKAN Solutions N V Table of Contents Chapter 1 About This Manual si iccsssncevsniecsennasessaisasenaccsssdsoventancensaneesdusanabiseseanacs 1 Lat Related Publications cecesscesasaidesdexseaeceasendvcsabagvons icendaanasaceuevs sada E ni EE EENE EESE NEEE E ER 1 Chapter 2 Purpose of MetaMap sesssssseosssseseoossssssccesssssccossseeecossssseeessssssee 3 Chapter 3 Key NOt Ons caissccsenesavinncnseactantesesentaneeseens r E NEEE SEE EEEE E RS 4 Chapter 4 Prerequisites for Using MetaMap ccccccssssssceccccessssceeceeeeseees 5 Chapter 5 MetaMap Manager User Interface cececceeessssceeeceeesssceeeceeeseees 6 Dt Logging Onto MetaMap Manage rissa icsssiedccccessesssceeossnesdieiseves cveveusctendivosencacsbassebdstsensdecediiiapessactdiosdaesiiesssnnstedents 6 52 Ment TE 9 BS Mam RTE 11 54 Developer Toolbar neeese se E EE EEE E E ERE E EE 12 E EE 13 5 6 Tree View Win E 13 Object Types depending from a Source File ecesssessecesseseceneessecsecseesseseeecseesseceesseceseesuecsecssecesess
132. NE 6 EXCLUDE EMPLOYEE SELECTION When the generated program encounters an employee who is not from Department 6 it will bypass processing for that employee and it will read the next record from the EMPLOYEE SELECTION file This has the potential of reducing processing time and resources significantly Note that you would have get the same results with the simple EXCLUDE command IF DEPARTMENT NE 6 EXCLUDE However in this case processing would not have been as efficient because the system would have read all the EMPLOYEE MASTER records for the employee from Department 6 before retrieving another EMPLOYEE SELECTION record STRUCTURED EDITOR 214 EXIT The EXIT command is used to leave the current procedure and return to the calling procedure For Source File and report Target File procedures the calling procedure is one of the generated control procedures of the generated program For public procedures the calling procedure is the one containing the DO command that requested execution of the public procedure Following the execution of an EXIT command no further commands in the procedure will be executed Unlike the EXCLUDE command described earlier in this section the EXIT command does not cause any input records to be bypassed Rather it is used only to bypass execution of the remaining commands in the procedure
133. NE NUMBER dd m SYS PAGE NUMBER SYS RETURN CODE Delete Two tabs are available Technical and Business 4 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections e Technical Tab page 123 e Business Tab page 124 5 Apply or discard your changes Discard Close The name of the new Target Procedure and its symbol are displayed in the Tree View window DATA TARGETS 123 6 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Technical Tab The following fields are available e Name page 123 e Execution Time page 123 e Commands Workspace page 124 Name Enter a name for the Procedure It is advised to select a name that describes the action performed The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree View window It can contain up to 32 characters Execution Time Select the required execution time from the drop down list Note The value properties of the fields also contain procedures Those value assignment procedures will be executed between Detail Output Pre and Detail Output Post except if the accumulate flag has been deactivated and a GROUP KEY has been defined in which case the non accumulate logic is situated between Total Output Pre and Total Output Post The following options are available Option Meaning Init
134. NTERNAL STATUS SYS MATCH COUNT The SourceFile name SYS MATCH COUNT field is automatically defined for each Source File specified in the generated program with the MATCH option This field may be referenced only in report or Target File detail procedures and indicates whether the current record from the named Source File matches the current match key that is whether the Source File is PRESENT in the current match set If the current record from SourceFile name does not match the current match key this field will contain a value of zero For the first record from the Source File indicated by SourceFile name that matches the current match key SourceFile name SYS MATCH COUNT will contain the value 1 for the next record from the Source File that matches the current match key it will be 2 and so forth STRUCTURED EDITOR 279 Format SourceFile name SYS MATCH COUNT Example The following sequence of commands illustrates the use of the SourceFile name SYS MATCH COUNT field to control the printing of selected detail lines The first two detail lines are printed for the first occurrence of an employee on the PAYROLL DETAIL SourceFile only the second detail line is printed for each subsequent record for the same employee CASE PAYROLL DETAIL SYS MATCH COUNT EQ 1 PUT 1 2 GT 1 PUT 2 SYS PATH COUNT The record name SYS PATH COUNT field is defined automatically in all generated programs containing A Source File that
135. Name This field is automatically updated with the Record Name you select from the Entry Record drop down list below Entry Record Select the required Record from the drop down list Distinct This checkbox applies for SOL Source files Select this checkbox if you want to use the SELECT DISTINCT SQL statement instead of the normal SELECT statement Per key only one record will be selected In other words all selected rows will have a unique key duplicates will be removed Clear this checkbox if you do not want to eliminate duplicate values Where In this field you can enter a clause containing a select statement The data retrieved from the Data Source are based on this statement Input Order Field It is interesting to define InputSort Fields if the file is not ordered in the sequence you want This field is only available e for RDBMS source files Order field SOL statement ORDER BY e ifthe ENTRY record has been specified Via Index This field applies for multi record non SQL Source Files only The index of the entry level Record is used to define the access sequence at a higher level than the preceding level Each subordinate record is assumed to be subordinate to the record specified immediately previously When this is not the case the VIA option is used to name the record to which the subordinate record is subordinate 6 Fill out the fields as required and click Finish The new Source File appears in the Tree
136. Null value OutNulR The position to the right of the Target Field can contain a special character that marks the Null value You cannot change this value in MetaMap as it is defined in the Dictionary Definition of the Target Field Refer to the MetaStore Manager User Guide DATA TARGETS 118 Skip Lines This checkbox applies for Reports only Enter the number of lines to be skipped before printing the next specified value The value entered must not exceed the number of lines on an output page This value is applied if the Skip checkbox is selected Skip This checkbox applies for Reports only Select this checkbox if you want to skip a certain number of lines before printing this value Short This checkbox applies for Reports only Select this checkbox if you want to suppress the printing of repetitive occurrences of the same value in a report The value of the field to which the Short option applies will be printed only when that value changes or if it is the first occurrence of the value appearing on a new page Clear this checkbox if every occurrence of the same value must be printed Position Enter the column position in which the following value is to begin The start position specified must not overlay a character position already occupied on the line and must allow enough space on the line to contain the specified value Format This checkbox applies for Reports only This option is used to reques
137. ODE Field name Field name must be an alphanumeric field Example UCS2 CHAR 20 EBC CHAR 10 SYS EBCDIC UNICODE EBC CHAR 10 contains 10 characters UCS2 CHAR 20 contains 20 characters UTF 16 based This example is perfectly possible since each 2 byte couple will be translated into one byte Remarks SYS EBCDIC UNICODE can not be used on occurring fields SYS EDIT The Field nameSYS EDIT field is automatically defined in all generated programs for fields with an edit mask It will use the edit mask of the field to determine the value Format Field name SYS EDIT Field name Field name can be any field with an edit mask defined The result of the SYS EDIT will be a character value Example When your want to use the edit mask of ANNUAL SALARY on your TargetFile you can use SYS EDIT ADD FIELD ANNUAL SALARY OF EMPLOYEE DATA POSITION 16 SIZE 9 TYPE ZONED UNSIGNED STRUCTURED EDITOR 289 DECIMAL 2 EDIT 9999999 99 W ANNUAL SALARY ANNUAL SALARY SYS EDIT Remarks SYS EDIT can not be checked on occurring Source Fields SYS EDIT can not be checked on a DATE field nor numeric DATE field neither alphanumeric DATE field since using a DATE field will automatically transform the value according to its DATE format which is its edit mask SYS HEXADECIMAL The SYS HEXADECIMAL Source Field function converts the Sour
138. OINT is less than zero the record is not selected If CUMULATIVE START POINT is positive the record is selected for inclusion e INTERVAL is subtracted from the current value of CUMULATIVE START POINT The process continues reading each record in sequence The value of each occurrence of field name is added to CUMULATIVE START POINT until CUMULATIVE START POINT becomes positive again At that point the current record is selected for inclusion in the sample The process continues looping through Steps 3 and 4 until it reaches the end of the Source File In other words after it selects a record it subtracts INTERVAL from the current value of CUMULATIVE START POINT reads subsequent records and adds their field values to CUMULATIVE START POINT Each time CUMULATIVE START POINT becomes positive the process selects the current record SET The SET command is used in the Program Initial Procedure It allows you to change the Generator Options MTL Options dynamically in order to influence the Generator Process Format SET option CVS separator Now the program can read from delimited files with separator START The START command is used to position a Source File It allows you to begin accessing records at a specified point bypassing all preceding input records Note that START does not read a record for processing it simply excludes the current record if any and then positions the Source File at the desired recor
139. ONS A7 TO 1 datawarehouse m r The following MetaMap Object Types exist METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 14 Category Symbol Object Type Reference Source Source File See Source Files on page 50 Har External Array See External Arrays on page 71 Parameter File or See Parameter Files on page 83 A Structured Field Target Target File or Report See Target Files or Reports on VER page 104 Procedures Initial Program See Program Procedures on W i Procedure page 144 Read Write Cycle See Program Procedures on Prd Program Procedure page 144 End of Job Program See Program Procedures on aa Procedure page 144 Public Procedure See Public Procedures on page 148 Pus Work Field Work Field See Work Fields on page 135 ET For each of the Object Types a number of depending objects exist Object Types depending from a Source File page 15 Object Types depending from an External Array page 16 e Object Types depending from a Parameter File page 16 e Object Types depending from a Target Field or Target Report page 16 Object Types depending from a Work Field page 18 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 15 Object Types depending from a Source File Dependent Object Type Symbol Reference Source Record See Source Records on page 56 SCH Path See Path on page 67 Ka Input File Procedure See
140. PIGIAS ccc oh 53cecei0s Sa chte cake ches eshanicatek weade dottesd see Gie Eege eddekeeh Egeter eege eege 57 E Source IGN DEE 58 Bro eclute eiessietarge eiedndDE Seege Eege a Ee eege naman de Oa waned os enw eas eebe 58 Filas eege dacs eaves ees Aabbeckzes cies cases EOE ugedon Magee testes an eset 59 9 4 1 EE 59 reiege eege Ae 59 Field Surin ege eegene ebe geed ewes bd e ua aR Gas awed RSA ea EE 60 8 5 Record Procedures EE 61 Pr ced e ege Ee ENEE deed 61 Technical TaD isis ssecebecteascitecececededeuhavianbas vases coaveatenae AEREE E ee isk Sea UetTEAR Tea 0 REAPS Cae EO tN Bs dEUS CE 62 Business TaD aao A R O TAA E deccaeasnesecsus lateness ET ia bose cetuslaeetesssigvietes N 63 B 6 File Procedure Srne r a EE E E EE E a 63 POCO GUEG isser oieee ra EE gies AEE EET ENE E AE AEE AREE AN EEA RE ee 64 Technical Tab sscesesesesscceedesseieaaoceetaccacadisxecyeadaiaceeenes a E EE ERE EE E eR 65 Bueipese Tab age gees 66 ede Pathe EE 67 PROCO GUNG istics scdvazd a edebe cae sauiicaaas Se eege deeg e EE ege eege ee TAS 67 PION AS E eeSasahised egesben dees geesde eae ack 68 8 8 Source Path Records gnetteesesbieggegec ege CECR geesde eege gege eg 69 POCO WEE 69 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 17 8 18 8 19 8 20 TABLE OF CONTENTS iii PGI EE 70 SEIT 71 ele EE 71 Technical Taben eege dees Ee eae tse 72 BuSin s Tab csshex ecibeecs222 Seeszeecheencesedest anes dosed
141. PUT 4 Although it has no effect on the evaluation of a compound conditional expression you may find it useful to ae eae SC P P eer l enclose pairs of conjunctive conditions in parentheses and to spread out compound conditional expressions to simplify the reading of the code that you create To illustrate this consider the command below IF UNITS GT 250 AND INVENTORY STATUS EQ NA OR COST GT 4500 AND INVENTORY STATUS EQ BO PUT 3 The intent of this command is somewhat clearer than the intent of the following identical compound conditional command IF UNITS GT 250 AND INVENTORY STATUS EQ NA OR COST GT 4500 AND INVENTORY STATUS EQ BO PUT 5 Examples Example 1 Testing for a value equal to one of the values in a list The following command could be coded to print detail line number 3 whenever the DEPARTMENT field contains the value 1 3 or 4 IF DEPARTMENT EQ 1 3 4 PUT 3 This type of conditional expression is actually an abbreviated format of a compound conditional expression where field name is always the same the relational operator is always EQ and all components of the compound expression are joined by the word OR The command above could have been coded as follows STRUCTURED EDITOR 304 IF DEPARTM KS ENT EQ 1 OR DEPAR OR DEPAR A w 10 10 KS PUT 3
142. Procedure IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 40 Public Procedure Context Menu If you right click a Public Procedure name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed LL Target Procedure P gt Program Procedur pud duze EP Work Field New Close Model Up Down Find Ctrl F Find Net F3 e Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All S Description H Save changes made t Properties MetaSuite MetaMap M Terre Del Delete test Program Option Meaning New Select this option to add a new Public Procedure See Public Procedures on page 148 Up The Up and Down options allow to reorder objects Down In the Tree View the objects are ordered per type If there are at least two objects of the same type the Up and Down options become available You can only reorder objects of the same type Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Public Procedure s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Public Proc
143. Properties window Target Type The following options are available Option Meaning Abacus BRS Select this option when you want to produce a Target File in the ABACUS BRS format Controlled Sequential Select this option when the Dictionary file on which the TargetFile is based contains complex structures such as redefines and occurring fields Delimited Select this option if your Target must be a Delimited File A Delimited File contains a delimiter sign after every last digit or character of a field If a field can be 20 positions long but contains only 5 characters the delimiter sign is placed on the sixth position The unused 14 positions are not left unused HTML Select this option if your Target must be an HTML File Line Sequential Used on open systems Windows UNIX and Linux Select this option if the records of the file are physically stored in sequential order and may only be retrieved in the order in which they are written Each record is separated by a delimiter which is the Carriage Return Line Feed character Parameter File Select this option if your Target must be a Parameter File Record Sequential Used on mainframes Z OS BS2000 etc Select this option if the records of the file are physically stored in sequential order and may only be retrieved in the order in which they are written Each record is identified by its position within the file and is not separated by a special delimiter Th
144. Q 0 BEGIN FIND LAST PAY PERIOD WEEK WEEK 1 and all occurrences of the EMP PAY field in an employee record contained the value of zero a subscripting error would occur when the value of the WEEK field reached zero and processing of the generated program would be halted EXEC IDMS END EXEC The EXEC IDMS command is used for inserting IDMS commands into the MetaSuite logic Some of the IDMS commands are automatically inserted into the MetaSuite logic If the User wants more advanced functionality he can insert the EXEC IDMS command The IDMS commands must be terminated with the END EXEC command For more information about the syntax of the supported IDMS commands please refer to MetaSuite IDMS File Access Guide EXEC SOL END EXEC The EXEC SQL command is used for inserting SQL commands into the MetaSuite logic Some of the SQL commands are automatically inserted into the MetaSuite logic like declarations opening and closing the database defining the cursor getting data But sometimes the User wants more updates for instance In that case the user can insert EXEC SQL in order to define the UPDATE command The User must end the command with END EXEC The User can test weather the operation was successful using the system variable SQLCODE Supported SQL commands are in alphabetic order
145. ROUP vivsetiscesesscisistessassasoedaaasivensend eae r aE ANE NE Er A a a aa 309 el DIE 309 PP TAP WEE 309 KAREN e e e 310 SAG EE 310 EAR ECKE 311 Runtime Parameter EE 311 21 2 SYS DATIE GHECK ET 311 21 8 SY S DB CONNEG RE 312 EAR CCRN 312 21 10 SYS DB PASSWORD EE 312 NEW E EI E 312 21 12 SYSERRORLIMI EE 312 21 13 SYS INPUT WEE 313 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1x 21514 SYS LIMITS CHEGK E 313 Ae EE leet ET 313 2116S Y SeREAD LIMUM erri ctecanedcebusennecvechendedteavacswectesessndiacuesunledesueaseedesbaeanthaeseesateasebeeesticvanessntteaie 314 H NN e Oe EE 314 21 18 SYS USER DATE victisdacessseseatedenest cag cadaneaeg iesestang lebieecgs NEEE dag Midethd pdeedstann debeshatiaeenacipit ines sain cebeehaieteesenneees 315 2119 SYSAUSER E 315 21 20 SYS USER NUM E 315 Chapter 22 Calling the MetaMap Manager in Batch ccceesseeeeeeseees 316 22 1 Using MSBMAP to Export MetaMap Models to the MXL Files eeceecescessecsseceneeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeenseeenaeenaaees 316 22 2 MSBMAP Return Codes iss isccivesiateiaaspasgdeseposundetizsianle Ue geb GEAR EEN 317 22 3 Calling MetaMap Manager Via the Commande 317 CHAPTER 1 Ei About This Manual This manual is the MetaMap Manager User Guide for MetaSuite 8 1 3 It is part of the MetaSuite documentation set intended for MetaSuite Users Related Publications The following table gives an overview of the complete MetaSuite documentation set Release Informatio
146. RT2 Remark SYS CURRENT KEY is not an exclusive property of the array procedures This keyword can also be used in other procedures Within an array procedure the values SYS READ COUNT and SYS CURRENT KEY are similar to each other However only SYS CURRENT KEY can be used as an index Usage in other procedures In non array procedures the SYS CURRENT KEY variable contains the result of the last GET statement SourceField SYS CURRENT KEY Example GET POSTALCODE ARRAY KEY 3000 IF SYS CURRENT KEY NE 0 THEN WS COMMUN END IF T POSTALCODE COMMUNE SYS CURRENT KEY Di Remark When taking a random element of an array using SYS RANDOM KEY as an index the value of SYS CURRENT KEY will be adapted automatically When using SYS CURRENT KEY independently not as an index its value is the result of the last GET statement Therefor you should be careful when using SYS CURRENT KEY in combination with multiple external arrays STRUCTURED EDITOR 257 SYS GROUP The SYS GROUP field is defined automatically in all generated programs and may be referenced in report or Target File total procedures It is a 38 character field containing the name of the field that just triggered a grouping process You may test the contents of the field in a report or Target File total procedure to control the output of total formats or to perform other proc
147. RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter any additional information pertaining to the Model Note If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Click OK to save the new Model The properties window is closed and the new model is displayed in the Tree View window Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model al icon on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model The next possible step will be to generate or package the MetaMap Model When generating the MetaMap model the model will be exported into MXL format which is a readable format for the Generator Next the Generator will transform this MXL into a COBOL program and a run script so that it can be run on a remote machine The COBOL program will be compiled using a compile script e Packaging a MetaMap Model is nearly the same as generating a MetaMap Model with this exception that the compile procedure will be replaced by a packaging procedure Packaging can be used for delivering a model to a remote system via an Application Lifecycle Management System such as IKAN ALM CHAPTER 8 Data Sources Data Sources are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned directly to a Model Apart from Data Sources it is also possible to assign Data Targets Program Procedures Public Pr
148. Record in a Multi Record Source File before it is processed If a Source File contains just one Record there is no difference between an Input File Procedure and Record Procedure See Record Procedures on page 61 There is only one type of Record Procedure i e Input and there can only be one Record Procedure for a Source Record Up The Up and Down options allow to reorder objects Down In the Tree View the objects are ordered per type If there are at least two objects of the same type the Up and Down options become available You can only reorder objects of the same type Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Source Record s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Source Files on page 50 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove this Source Record IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 25 Source Field Context Menu If you right click a Source Field name in the Tree View window the foll
149. S The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher 20 10 Conditional Keywords The production of a Report or Target File will often require the evaluation of one or more logical relationships in order to produce the desired output An example of such an evaluation might be If an employee belongs to department four do not include that employee in the report A logical relationship compares the value of a single field with one or more other values and the relationship is always determined to be either true or false Within the language of the program generator logical relationships are referred to as conditional expressions which are used in the IF CASE and DO WHILE commands Format field namerelational operatorvalue Elements Description Element Description field name Field name is the name of any field whose value is to be tested relational operator Relational operator identifies the relationship to be tested value Value is the value to be tested against the named field STRUCTURED EDITOR 301 Coding Conditional Keywords The following table summarizes the combinations of relational operators and values that may be coded within conditional expressions Relational Operators and Values Conditional Expression is Evaluated as True if Field Name is EQ value equal to value NE value not equal to value LT value less than value LE value less than or eq
150. S ASCII UNICODE ASC CHAR 10 contains 10 characters UCS2 CHAR 20 contains 20 characters UTF 16 based This example is perfectly possible since each 2 byte couple will be translated into one byte Remarks SYS ASCII UNICODE can not be used on occurring fields SYS BINARY The SYS BINARY Source Field function converts a hexadecimal string into its BINARY form This function can be used to store special character sequences The SYS HEXADECIMAL function converts the BINARY values back to the original format Usage Field name SYS BINARY Field name Field name must be an alphanumeric field The number of characters in Fie d name must be even All characters in Fie d name must belong to the following range 0 to 9 A to F or space Space is treated as Zero The resulting string length will be half of the original length STRUCTURED EDITOR 286 Example W HEX 3242 C BIN W HEX SYS BINARY DEBUG W HEX IS W HEX DEBUG C BIN IS C BIN RESULT W HEX IS 3242 C BIN IS 2B Remarks SYS BINARY can not be used on occurring fields SYS DATE OF INTEGER The Field name SYS DATE OF INTEGER is automatically defined in each generated program for numeric fields of type binary either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will give you the possibility to determine the date value of the binary field for which the value is seen as the number of days since the 31th of Decembe
151. SE ia aai 104 Ee EE 105 Technical Ta Desrosiers rrera naear toie e Rae aaa deed os AE 105 BUSI GSS ET GE 111 TABLE OF CONTENTS iv 9 2 Tar TE 111 PROCGAUPO sssscicsdavacescedees Gs Eegeregie eebe eege Ra EES 112 PGI AS vi e essbigietessieteggengt tege ba gans sss eet 0d cos ae Saeed sa E Seege ee 112 9 3 Target Fields EE 114 Proced re deg eEge een piae EET EOT RET E E EEEE EEE AEE 115 e EEE E E E A 116 QA Target Titl S irissen a a a A a aN i 119 95 target Headings EE 119 9 6 target End e GE 120 DJs Target TE 121 PROC AUIG neseser eredes i Ata EEEE ETEEN E EIE EAE E A LEASE OA EE tae 122 KR TE EE 123 BUSINCSS Val EE 124 9 8 Farget Wizara eriei i aereo E E ie sa ER E ET EEEO EE ORE EERTE ATAS 125 E ENEE E 130 Chapter 10 Worle Fields enee ege 135 10 Merten ee EE lee 135 PROCO UNG 53s di vsscivned a a EDE a R oaalec ad kssnue a id etege ties EE 135 RTE o iassasit eco 65 lt 5 soca caeek EIEE E oa aa de aaa aha sts ESS esd RSS 136 B siness Eed 142 10 2 SUbHEIAS isce devsndescesieuide A E aE RE AEA ENNEA AEE ENN EE EART 142 PROCCAUIG geess erini i AEE AEE ENEE REEERE EROT EE ed E ege LAEST ENEE 143 Chapter 11 Program Procedures esssseesessssssssesssssscocesssscecssssseceessseseessss 144 MN Wes Procedure EE 145 KI E Technical KEE 146 IN QING EEE E EI E EAN E T A E T E A Sovaededasoacuae 146 EXECUTION TIME E 146 COMIMANAS EE 146 VS Business Tab raria nE A EAEAN een 147 BUSINGSS R le m urcenie
152. SYS AUTO SOLCODE page 310 SYS CURRENT KEY page 256 SYS DATE page 311 System variable not usable as runtime parameter SYS GROUP page 257 SYS GROUP COUNT page 257 SYS GROUP LEVEL page 257 SYS LINE NUMBER page 258 SYS PAGE NUMBER page 258 SYS RECORD page 259 SYS RECORD LENGTH page 260 SYS RESTART page 261 SYS RUNTIME STATUS page 263 SYS RETURN CODE page 262 SYS SOL AREA page 262 SYS SOLSTATE page 262 SYS TIME page 263 SYS TIMESTAMP page 264 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 256 SYS CURRENT KEY The SYS CURRENT KEY is automatically defined in each procedure SYS CURRENT KEY contains the index of the current external array record At all times an external array field must be subscripted Usage within an array procedure In the external array procedure the index of the array record that was read is put into SYS CURRENT KEY SourceField SYS CURRENT KEY Example J BEGIN SOURCEFILE D IF DEPARTMENT NUMB EXCLUDE IF DEPARTMENT NUMBER 03453 SYS CURRENT KEY SYS STATUS EQ SYS NULL VALUE EXCLUDE PARTMENT ARRAY INITIAL R 03453 SYS CURRENT KEY EQ 3 E DO SYS LOCAL INI A1 1 SORT DEPARTMENT NUMBER 03453 WF S
153. Source File input procedure the START command should be executed conditionally to prevent execution of an infinite loop Miscellaneous Functions In assignments the arguments do not always have to consist of basic strings numbers or variables The arguments can be more complicated For instance you can use a part of a string or the difference between two dates This section treats the possibilities that are available in simple assignments AGE The AGE function calculates the difference in days between two date fields The AGE function is used only on the right hand side of an assignment command Format Field Name AGE Date field Aging date Elements Description Element Description Required Date field Date field specifies the name of the field that will be aged against Yes either the current system aging date SYS AGE DATE or a user supplied reference date Aging date Aging date If you do not specify an aging date the field will be aged against No SYS AGE DATE The aging field must be defined with the DATE option See Example Aging date on page 245 Examples Example Aging date As an example if the field named DUE DATE contained the date March 14 2010 in any date format and the current system aging date was April 10 2010 the following command DAYS LATE AGE DUE DATE STRUCTURED EDITOR 246 Would result in the number 27 being assigned to the numeric fiel
154. Source Files are being matched on an employee number and the first two Source Files contain records with an employee number of 12345 but the third does not When employee number 12345 becomes the current match key the first two Source Files will be present in the matched set and the third Source File will be absent Note Both the PRESENT and ABSENT match conditions can only be tested within Report or Target File detail procedures or within Public Procedures performed by Report or Target File detail procedures Format IF SourceFile name ABSENT THEN true commands ELSE false commands END IF Elements Description Element Description Required SourceFile name The name of one of the Source Files being matched Yes true command The IF SourceFile name ABSENT true command sequence Yes specifies the action to be taken if the match key from the current record from the named Source File is not equal to the current match set key SourceFile name identifies one of the Source Files being matched If the match key of the current record from the named Source File is not equal to the current match key the condition will test as true and the specified true command will be executed If the match key is equal to the current match key the condition will test as false the true command will be bypassed and any specified false command described below will be executed True command may be any procedural command or sequence of p
155. T ADDRESS E VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS pi VOL TYPE BY S01 EMPLOYEE DATA E S O1 EMPLOYEE NUMBER E b S01 DEPARTMENT i gt S01 PAY CODE E S01 JOB TITLE CODE Ah SO1 DATE OF HIRE ei S01 ANNUAL SALARY E S01 PAY RATE m l m Ir The FR Field Matches are displayed and numbered in order to show the order of priority olutions DATA Sources 102 4 To edit a Field match click the matching line The selected line is displayed in blue The following shortcut menu is displayed ModelForMat ching Wizard Mat x q E p ModelForMatchingWizard S i SourceFile1 EMPLOYEE DATA f gt EMPLOYEE NUMBER Air PAY RATE t EMPLOYEE NAME gt STREET ADDRESS CITY ADDRESS A STATE CODE Alt S01 PAY CODE S01 JOB TITLE CODE gt S01 DATE OF HIRE gt S01 ANNUAL SALARY r S01 PAY RATE a S01 EMPLOYEE NUMBER S01 DEPARTMENT i E 01 PAY CODE 01 JOB TITLE CODE E SO1 DATE OF HIRE E SO1 ANNUAL SALARY E SO1 PAY RATE g gt SO1 EMPLOYEE NAME These options have the following meaning Option Meaning Remove Select this option to remove the Match Remove Chain Select this option to remove the Match Chain All Matches with the same number will be removed Move Up Select this option to move the Match to a higher position lower sequence number
156. T be selected the two pre defined values A or B The possible definitions are e COMMAND OPTION A e COMMAND OPTION B 20 4 Commands Commands are reserved words that always appear in upper case They must not be used as Object Names Category Command Assignment commands Basic Assignments page 189 Arithmetic Expressions page 191 Concatenation page 193 COMPUTE page 194 Conditional commands CASE page 196 IF page 222 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 189 Category Command Input Output commands EXEC IDMS END EXEC page 205 EXEC SOL END EXEC page 205 EXCLUDE page 207 GET page 217 PUT Source page 228 PUT Target page 230 START page 242 Calling commands DO page 200 DO FOR page 201 DO WHILE page 203 INVOKE page 227 Program terminating commands EXIT page 214 HALT ALL page 220 HALT SOURCEFILE page 221 HALT TARGETFILE page 221 Miscellaneous commands DEBUG page 199 REM REMARKS page 232 SAMPLE page 233 SET page 242 Basic Assignments An assignment is a simple content copy between two fields working source target or between a fixed value and a field Format 1 Field name 1 Field name 2 fixed value Rules The following rules apply e Both fields must have the same ty
157. TAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 34 Option Meaning Add gt EndPage Select this option to define an EndPage for the Target See Target End Pages on page 120 Create a Copy Select this option to create a copy of the Model Up The Up and Down options allow to reorder objects Down In the Tree View the objects are ordered per type If there are at least two objects of the same type the Up and Down options become available You can only reorder objects of the same type Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand all Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Target s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Data Targets on page 104 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove the selected Target from the MetaMap Model Target Record Context Menu If you right click a Target Record name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed Find Next Find Previous Option Meaning New Select this option to add a Record to the selected Target See Target Records on
158. TOR 252 Format String T SUBSTRING String S position length Elements Description Element Description Required String S The name of the alphanumeric field Target Source or Work Field that Yes will provide the Source string from which the Substring will be derived position This can be a numeric field or a hard coded numeric value This refers Yes to a position within the string String S From this position on characters will be copied from String S to String T Position must be a value between one and the length of String S length This can be a numeric field or a hard coded numeric value This refers No to a length within the string String S This value refers to the number of characters that will be copied from String S to String T Length must be a value between one and the number of bytes in String S from position position to the end of String S This length parameter is not mandatory When omitted its intrinsic value will become the size of the part of the string that starts at the specified position and ends at the end of String S Example 1 If the 20 character type CHARACTER field named NAME contained the value ELVIS PRESLEY ms then the instruction WORK NAME SUBSTRING NAME 3 5 would result in the value VIS P being assigned to the field named WORK NAME Example 2 If the 20 character type CHARACTER field named NAME contained the value ELVIS PRESLEY y then the instruction
159. TS 131 2 Select the Mapping Wizard icon II from the Wizard Toolbar The following window is displayed ModelForMappingWizard Mapping Wizard Select Source and Target Record Source Record Source File Target Record Target File 01 EMPLOYEE DATA 01 SourceFile1 T01 PP_employee T01 Targetfile 1 S02 EMPLOYEE DATA 02 SourceFile2 TO2 EMPLOYEE DATA T02 Targetfile 2 S03 EMPLOYEE DATA 03 SourceFile3 E Map by Name This window contains two selection areas e Source selection area on the left e Target selection area on the right In the Source selection area each line represents a Source Record assigned to the Model For each Source Record its name and the name of the Source File it belongs to are displayed In the Target selection area each line represents a Target Record assigned to the Model For each Target Record its name the name of the Target File it belongs to and the Subtype of the Target File are displayed The subtype for T01 TargetFile is Sequential and the subtype for T02 TargetFile is Delimited Underneath the following checkboxes are displayed Mapping by Sequence Select this checkbox if the sequence of the Source and Target Fields are identical The fields will be automatically mapped in the sequence they occur Mapping by Name Select this checkbox if fields with the same name must be mapped automatically Fields that are mutually incompatible e g alphanumeric and date fields w
160. Target File are output automatically by the system for all non excluded records An exception to this occurs if you include the NOAUTO DETAIL option on the REPORT or TARGETFILE command This option suppresses output of all detail records A PUT command in a Report or Target File group procedure deactivates the automatic writing of all total records for that Report or TargetFile for all non excluded groups If no PUT command is coded in a group procedure and the NOAUTO TOTAL option is not specified on the REPORT or TARGETFILE command all total records are written automatically by the system for all non excluded groups The use of the PUT command in a Report or Target File initial end of file or end of job procedure has no effect on the automatic production of detail or total records Thus to produce a Report or Target File that includes data only from within initial end of file or end of job procedures you must code EXCLUDE commands in the report s or TargetFile s input and total procedures In all cases with the PUT command you have the choice of processing ALL formats or only specific formats Format Specification Language PUT ALL format number Format MetaMap PUT ALL format name Elements Description Element Description Required ALL The ALL option is used to indicate that all detail or total record No formats should be output In an initial input or end of file procedure ALL indicates that
161. The Source Wizard can assist you in selecting your data sources See Source Wizard on page 90 Mapping Wizard Select this option to start the Mapping Wizard The Mapping Wizard can assist you in defining one to one mappings between Source and Target Fields See Mapping Wizard on page 130 Test Data Wizard Use this option to select a sample of input records See Test Data Wizard on page 151 Target Wizard Select this option to start the Target Wizard The Target Wizard can assist you in defining your Data Targets See Target Wizard on page 125 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 20 Option Meaning Add gt Source gt Source File Select this option to add a Source File to the Model See Source Files on page 50 Add gt Source gt External Array Select this option to add an External Array to the Model See External Arrays on page 71 Add gt Source gt Parameter File Select this option to add a Parameter File to the Model See Parameter Files on page 83 Add gt Target Select this option to add a Target File or Report to the Model See Data Targets on page 104 Add gt Work Field Select this option to add a Work Field to the Model See Work Fields on page 135 Add gt Program Procedure Select this option to add a Program Procedure to the Model See Program Procedures on page 144 There can be only one Initial Program Procedure and one End
162. The name of the new Target Title and its symbol Ey are displayed in the Tree View window 5 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model 9 5 Target Headings Target Headings only apply to Target Reports You can assign one Target Heading to each Target Report The Heading will be displayed on every page of the printed Report DATA TARGETS 120 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Target is displayed 3 Right click the Target name and select Add gt Heading The Target Heading properties window is displayed T01 datawarehouse T01 employee_name New Heading Exercise 0 T01 datawarehouse New Heading Heading It contains the following fields Field Meaning Name By default this field contains the indication New Heading You can change this if required Text Enter the Target Heading as it will appear on the Target File or Report 4 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Target Heading and its symbol tE are displayed in the Tree View window 5 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model 9 6 Target End Pages Target End Pages only apply to Target Reports You can assign one Target EndPage to each Target Report The Title will be di
163. Type of the Dictionary File Prefix In this field you can enter a prefix for this Source File You might for instance define the prefixes OLD and NEW if you are working with different versions of the same file A Prefix has a fixed length of 4 characters and must start with an alphabetic character Dictionary File Click the Browse button at the right of the Dictionary File name to display the Dictionary File Properties window 8 16 DATA SOURCES 85 Business Tab The following fields are available on the Business tab Business Rule page 85 Note page 85 Business Rule In this field you can enter a description of the Parameter File If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter additional information pertaining to the Parameter File If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Source Records for a Parameter File Source Records are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Parameter File Note This option is only available if not all Source Records have been added When adding a Source Record all Source Fields and Sub Source Fields will be added automatically Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Parameter File is displayed
164. UM _ This screen contains the following elements IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 MeTAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 8 Element Description Menu Bar page 9 The Menu Bar gives access to the different MetaMap menus Main Toolbar page 11 The Main Toolbar gives access to some frequently used options These options can also be accessed from the Menu Bar Wizard Toolbar page 13 The Wizard Toolbar gives access to the Wizards that can also be accessed from the Tools menu Developer Toolbar page 12 The Developer Toolbar gives access to the frequently used options when working with the MetaSuite Definition Language It is only visible when a Properties window allowing the introduction of these commands is displayed Tree View Window page 13 The Tree View Window displays all opened MetaMap Models with their dependent Objects such as Data Sources Data Targets Procedures etc If you just started working the Tree View Window is empty Workspace page 43 In the Workspace the Properties windows for the MetaMap Objects will be displayed These windows can be used for verifying or updating the Properties If you just started working the Workspace is empty Output page 43 The Output window contains all messages generated during the current session of MetaMap Package Compile Generate e Generate window Window page 43 When generating this window will display the MXL
165. UT EMPLOYEE MASTER SourceFile GET EMPLOYEE DATA KEY SA EMPLOYEE NUMBER IF EMPLOYEE MASTER SYS IO STATUS NE SYS OK PUT 1 EXCLUDE OUT WHOLE EMP WHOLE EMP PUT OUT EMPLOYEE DATA IF OUT EMPLOYEE MASTER SYS IO STATUS NE SYS OK PUT 2 HALT ALI Using the KeyField value from the SALARY ADJUSTMENTS Source File the first command attempts to get a record from the EMPLOYEE MASTER Source File If the read is unsuccessful detail line 1 is printed presumably an error message and the current record from the SALARY ADJUSTMENTS Source File is excluded If the read is successful the value of the OUT WHOLE EMP field in the new Source File is set equal to the value of WHOLE EMP in the existing Source File WHOLE EMP is a single field defined to the dictionary as consisting of the entire EMPLOYEE DATA record Following the assignment command the new record is written and the Source File status checked If the write operation fails detail line 2 is printed again presumably an error message and the run is halted In this case since it is known that the KeyField for the old record is a valid KeyField value and that those KeyField values are occurring in the appropriate sequence the only type of write error possible would be one that would prohibit the writing of any further records to the output Source File i e an unrecoverable I O error In
166. Work Pei Mapping Wizard Close Model Add Target Record Create a Copy Target Procedure Up Title Down Heading Find Ctrl F dibs Find Next H Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All Properties Remove Option Meaning New Select this option to add a Target to the Model See Data Targets on page 104 Mapping Wizard Select this option to start the Mapping Wizard The Mapping Wizard can assist you in defining one to one mappings between Source and Target Fields See Mapping Wizard on page 130 Add gt Target Record Select this option to add a Target Record to the Target See Target Records on page 111 Add gt Target Procedure Select this option to add a Target Procedure to the Target A Target Procedure is used to define additional logic that will be executed before or after the logic defined in the Value text box available on the Target Field Properties windows See Target Procedures on page 121 There can only be one Target Procedure of each type for a Target File e Detail Output Post DOT Detail Output Pre DOE End of File EOF End of Job EOJ Initialization INIT Total Output Post TOT Total Output Pre TOE Add gt Title Select this option to define a Title for the Target See Target Titles on page 119 Add gt Heading Select this option to define a Heading for the Target See Target Headings on page 119 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 ME
167. WorkField2 m ET EP WorkField1 EP WorkField2 01 EMPLOYEE NAME S01 EMPLOYEE NAME 7 To remove a mapping right click the middle of the mapping line in the grey mapping area and select Remove Relationships from the shortcut menu S01 EMPLOYEE DATA T01 P e E ModelForMappingWizard msm 3 E ModelForMappingWizard E b ModelForMappingWizard 4 01 SourceFile1 B E T01 Targettfile 1 Ch S01 EMPLOYEE DATA Cu T01 PP_employee gt S01 EMPLOYEE NUMBER ln i 101 EMPLOYEE NUMBER gt S01 DEPARTMENT ul TO1 DEPARTMENT Hp S01 PAY CODE Lui TO1 PAY CODE gt S01 JOB TITLE CODE E T01 JOB TITLE CODE E S01 DATE OF HIRE Lui T01 DATE OF HIRE EJ S01 ANNUAL SALARY Lal TO1 ANNUAL SALARY i gt S01 PAY RATE Lal TO1 PAY RATE L S01 EMPLOYEE NAME 8 T01 EMPLOYEE NAME i gt SO1 STREET ADDRESS i gt S01 CITY ADDRESS Bp S01 STATE CODE iE TO1 STREET ADDRESS p ei S01 SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER SECURITY NUMBER t S01 SECURITY CLEARANCE CODE CLEARANCE CODE Si S01 VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS if S01 VOL TYPE gt S01 VOL CODE f S01 VOL AMOUNT 177 WorkField1 i WorkField2 If you right click the mapping line in either of the 2 white source or target areas you will have access to another pop up menu DATA TARGETS 134 Option Explanation Allow Data Source Mapping Hold Shift down When holding down the Shift key while creating the mapping the Data S
168. Y ADDRESS LS TO1 STATE CODE gt E T01 ZIP CODE gt E T01 SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER Si T01 SECURITY CLEARANCE CODE On the left the selected Source Record and its dependent fields are displayed On the right the selected Target Record and its dependent fields are displayed H Ee DATA TARGETS 133 6 Click and drag the Source Fields to the Target Fields they should be mapped to The following screen is displayed SO1 EMPLOYEE DATA T01 P e NW EE Medel orMappingWzard en a E b ModelForMappingWizard Sp ModelForMappingWizard r 01 SourceFile1 B T01 Targetfile 1 Cu SO1 EMPLOYEE DATA Cut T01 PP_employee El S01 EMPLOYEE NUMBER ln TO1 EMPLOYEE NUMBER ei S01 DEPARTMENT i oE T01 DEPARTMENT E S01 PAY CODE a T01 PAY CODE E 01 JOB TITLE CODE i 9 T01 JOB TITLE CODE gt 01 DATE OF HIRE E T01 DATE OF HIRE i gt SO1 ANNUAL SALARY i TO1 ANNUAL SALARY E SO1 PAY RATE TOL PAY RATE a gt SO 1 EMPLOYEE NAME Leg TO1 EMPLOYEE NAME i gt SO1 STREET ADDRESS TT iE TO1 STREET ADDRESS E SO1 CITY ADDRESS Lui TOL CITY ADDRESS gt SO1 STATE CODE E T01 STATE CODE gt S01 ZIP CODE E T01 ZIP CODE Lei S01 SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER TO1 SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER E gt S01 SECURITY CLEARANCE CODE E T01 SECURITY CLEARANCE CODE S E S01 VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS deet Total Output Post gt SO1 VOL TYPE o ET WorkField1 E S01 VOL CODE ET
169. YS ABSOLUTE VALUE page 284 SYS ASCII page 284 SYS ASCII UNICODE page 285 SYS BINARY page 285 SYS DATE OF INTEGER page 286 SYS DAY OF INTEGER page 286 SYS EBCDIC page 287 SYS EBCDIC UNICODE page 288 SYS EDIT page 288 SYS HEXADECIMAL page 289 SYS INTEGER page 289 SYS INTEGER OF DATE page 290 SYS INTEGER OF DAY page 291 SYS INTEGER PART page 291 SYS LENGTH page 292 SYS LENGTH R page 292 SYS LOG page 293 SYS LOG10 page 293 SYS NUMVAL page 294 SYS NUMVALC page 294 SYS RANDOM page 295 SYS RAW page 296 SYS REVERSE page 296 SYS SORT page 297 SYS TRIM page 297 SYS UNICODE ASCIl page 298 SYS UNICODE EBCDIC page 298 String System Functions SYS LOWERCASE page 299 SYS UPPERCASE page 299 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 284 SYS ABSOLUTE VALUE The SYS ABSOLUTE VALUE function can be used on all numeric fields The result will be a positive value Usage Field name SYS ABSOLUTE VALUE Field name Field name must be a numeric field Example Y X SYS ABSOLUTE VALUE If argument X is a negative value then the resulting Y will be minus X If argument X is a positive value then the resulting Y will be X Remarks SYS ABSOLUTE VALUE can
170. a File Key has been defined on the selected Dictionary File Select this checkbox to perform a Binary Search on the External Array Clear this checkbox to perform a Serial Search on the External Array Input Sort Fields Select this option if you want to use Sort Fields Sort Fields It is interesting to define one or more Sort Fields for your External Array if it is not ordered in the sequence you want Double click the New button kt and select the required Sort Field from the list It will be displayed in the selection box If you double click this entry the Sort Field Properties window is displayed See Sort Fields on page 73 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 DATA SOURCES 96 4 Fill out the fields as required and click Next The Business definition window appears Add Source gt Specify the business related information of this source The following fields are available Field Meaning Business Rule In this field you can enter a Business Rule describing this External Array If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter additional information pertaining to this Source File If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R 5 Fill out the fields as required and click N
171. a deg a ei ieai iia iiia 273 ETH eieaa E TAEAE ee EEEE ET OEA AR EAEE 274 SYS DBNAME oeiee aiaia EE EE RE O EEA AEN sted A E EE EE E E E e as 274 EAR EE 275 SYS INPUT COUNT reee EET OEE EE E EE GETE O ET EE OTE E E E sehen cate 276 EA RER AT 277 SYS1O S TALUS iisi niiin ia AAE a EATE AEREE EA ENAA AA ALAE E Eii 277 SYS MATCHECOUN RRE 278 SYS PAT Dee EC RE 279 SYS READ2 COUNT E 280 SYS SOL LENG UE creeeren iei eunea Onak EEE e E EENEN sess avensie suaeeasechcu ted votasesse sath caxevvasessbedvensssdegezabasee dbus Gostevsussisesteds 281 ACHEN 281 System Functions MetaSuite Export Language 283 SYS ABSOLUTE VALUE ees eegene deene 284 tr Eegen saad E ldebesdeeadieh soeseveutestes 284 SYS ASCIFUNIC ODE E eiiie EEEE EEEE EEE O E E EEEE EE E EER 285 SYS BINARY ET 285 EAR ET 286 SYS DAY OF INTEGER voserion tens derei deist oE EAEE E debi suds eat EAEE EE EEEE 286 SYS EBC EE 287 SYS EBCDIC UNICOD E rsen i er EE EEE EEE E E E E EE E OE TER 288 o e a D i E A E E E E T EA 288 EAR 289 SY SPIN TE GER cote A E EER A A tes asicchu vote lt outss vans E T E dhsberdens 289 SYS INTEGER2OF DAT Es engen ees EE EELER EES 290 SYS INTEGER OF DAY EE 291 AE 291 SYS LENGTH enden E E RT A A ERE ERT E T EA E R EE 292 SYS LENGT ET 292 Eeer eege eebe 293 DV SLOG EE 293 TABLE OF CONTENTS viii SYS NUMVA gege leede 294 SYS2NOMVALGC rarr E E thes sedlne bi ckslesdsedey costes ode AE E iuss deck savers itseiceysed otter foeteas 294 En e TEE 295 RAAM estate
172. alid numeric data and not their corresponding records RUNTIME PARAMETERS 315 21 18 SYS USER DATE SYS USER DATE is a runtime parameter of type DATE that can be used for different purposes It avoids having to create a workfield with a parameter flag and a date format Usage SYS USER DATE yyyyddd A value is supplied to SYS USER DATE at runtime in yyyyddd format Only one value can be supplied to SYS USER DATE per program execution 21 19 SYS USER MIX SYS USER MIX is a runtime parameter of type CHARACTER that can be used for different purposes It avoids having to create a workfield of type CHARACTER with a parameter flag Usage SYS USER MIX text In this format ex is a value is supplied to SYS USER MIX at runtime It can be up to 32 characters long Only one value can be supplied to SYS USER MIX per program execution 21 20 SYS USER NUM SYS USER NUM is a runtime parameter of type NUMERIC that can be used for different purposes It avoids having to create a workfield of type NUMERIC with a parameter flag Usage SYS USER NUM number SYS USER NUM is defined automatically to the generated program as a full word binary field Number is any numeric value Only one value can be supplied to SYS USER NUM per program execution CHAPTER 22 Calling the MetaMap Manager in Batch Users can call the MetaMap Manager in batch in order to export existing MetaMap Models
173. alue of SYS CURRENT KEY will be a non zero value Testing on ZERO is useless Example 7 SYS RANDOM KEY Example 6 can also be written as W DEPARTMENT DESCRIPTION DD DESCRIPTION SYS RANDOM KEY The value of SYS RANDOM KEY will be copied to SYS CURRENT KEY The following command blocks will have a different result SYS RANDOM K al 1 W DEPARTMENT NAME DD NAMI GI Y W DEPARTMENT DESCRIPTION DD DESCRIPTION SYS RANDOM KEY Y zal 2 W DEPARTMENT NAME DD NAMI GI SYS RANDOM K W DEPARTMENT DESCRIPTION DD DESCRIPTION SYS CURRENT KEY In the second example W DEPARTMENT NAME and W DEPARTMENT DESCRIPTION will point to the same row in the external array HALT ALL The HALT ALL command is used to stop all processing After a HALT ALL is encountered the system will execute no further procedures or system routines and no further output will be produced This command is useful when an unexpected event occurs that will produce invalid output For example if you write a program that depends on the value of a Work Field being set as a runtime parameter and no value is supplied for that parameter at execution time the program should be halted to prevent the per haps costly production of unwanted reports and Target Files The HALT ALL co
174. ame the Work Field in the field name list Litteral Can be fixed text a number or a date No Example TARGETFIELD1 TARGETFIELD2 USER FUNCTION FUN X Al Bl Cl USER FUNCTION FUN Y WORK1 tax payer Remark Note that external functions almost always demand that A fixed number of fields should be made available by the calling program i e by your program request e Each field made available by the calling program is in exactly the same internal data format as is expected by the function STRUCTURED EDITOR 255 e The fields named in the field name list appear in a predefined sequence Ifa USER FUNCTION and a SYSTEM FUNCTION have the same name MetaMap will automatically ignore the SYSTEM FUNCTION because of the duplicate names However you can still explicitely call the SYSTEM FUNCTION with that name by adding the name in a string For more information refer to the User defined Functions Guide this additional option is sold separately Failure to adhere to these requirements may result in unpredictable action on the part of the called function 20 6 Variables The following variables are available Category Variable MetaMap Objects Source File SourceRecord Source Field TargetFile TargetRecord Target Field Work Field System variable also usable as runtime parameter SYS AGE DATE page 308 SYS APPLICATION page 309 SYS APPLICATION GROUP page 309
175. ands Workspace the look ahead parser Comman x Program Procedure Xx CASE a SampleModel ProgramProcedure Program Procedure COMPUTE CONTINUE DEBUG DO EXCLUDE EXEC IDMS EXEC SQL EXIT GET HALT IF INVOKE NEXT PUT REM SAMPLE X Syntax error Unexpected d SET Source Field 4 m r Source File Source Record z Delete Apply Discard Close When entering a character in the commands workspace the cursor will automatically jump to the commands starting with that character in the list Technical Business I Program Procedure Properties Name Program Procedure Execution Time Read Write Cyde m Use the up and down arrow keys while holding down the Ctr key to navigate through the list Double click a command or use the Tad key to add the selected command to the workspace Use the Discard button to empty the commands workspace e Find and Replace buttons are also available e When adding the command Source Field Target FieldorWork Field a pop up window STRUCTURED EDITOR 187 listing all available items is displayed Source Field baad Select Item EMPLOYEE DATA Name Item Path Type ANNUAL SALARY ANNUAL SALARY Source CITY ADDRESS CITY ADDRESS Source DATF OF HIRF DATF OF HIRF Source Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When
176. aning New Select this option to add a Source Field See Source Fields for a Parameter File on page 87 Add gt Sub Select this option to add a Subsource Field Source Field In the current version of MetaSuite all fields and subfields are automatically added when adding a record In earlier versions however you had to add all fields one by one This option can be used for example to add subfields to old Models Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Source Field s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Source Fields for a Parameter File on page 87 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to delete this Source Field IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 33 Target Context Menu If you right click a Target name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed gt sourdefile2 128 datawarehouse 1 A 01 External Array ER 03 datawarehouse e ET
177. arameter Work Fields are fed during the program initialization phase even before the reading of the Parameter Files Their values can be defined in the program inzi file This file is referred to by the logical data name PPTIPT Note A Parameter Field is not a Parameter File Field Example The program EXUDB35A that is displayed below contains several Work Fields Among those Work Fields two fields have the parameter flag set W DBCONNECT and W DBUSER Some system parameters such as SYS USER NUM or SYS DB DATABASE behave like Parameter Fields Models M EXUDB35A MSM ax W DBCONNECT x W DBUSER x w Age EXUDB35A W DBCONNECT Work Field EXUDB35A W DBUSER Work Field H employee master i H TO1 Insert into SQL Technical Business Technical Business ES END OF JOB ae S Work Field Properties R gt CONNECT mn EE EP W Address Name Name W DBUSER Oc EF W SQLState EP W DBCONNECT V Parameter Expose EP W SQLCODE EP W DBUSER ame ZE Content Type Character Z Decimals 0 n Initia Code ae Code No Code X 21 2 During the run of the generated program the Parameter Fields receive their values from the program name ini file Some system parameters can receive their content by means of the same file An alternate way to enter values in the Parameter Fields is to specify these parameters in the program execution command line For example in Windo
178. arch at position 20 POS2 will become 1 POS3 will become 0 because starting from position 3 the word Captain can not be found anymore POS4 will become 21 STRUCTURED EDITOR 247 LENGTH This is the length of the remainder after trimming all spaces low values and non displayable characters from the right Format numeric field LENGTH string fiela Elements Description Element Description Required LENGTH Returns the length of the remainder after trimming all spaces low yes values and non displayable characters from the right Examples w num LENGTH W PAY CODE CHAR MANUAL INPUT This function allows to ask information while the program is running using manual input Format field name MANUAL INPUT literal 1 string 1 Elements Description Element Description Required field name The receiving field This can be a numeric field a date field or a yes character field literal 1 The text that will be displayed on the console string 1 A character variable that contains the text that will be displayed on the console Examples Comment Please enter a name or part of a name for selection W CHAR MANUAL INPUT Comment1 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 248 Sample Screenshots E Console P6500A Please enter a name or part of a name for selection E T7 Console P6500A se Please enter a
179. ase of this compound conditional expression more keystrokes are required and the command is harder to read Note that neither of the two IF commands above is equal to the following sequence of two simple conditional commands IF D EPARTM ENT NE EXCLUDE F IF D EPARTM ENT NE EXCLUDE F These two commands exclude all input records the first excludes all records except those for DEPARTMENT 1 the second excludes all DEPARTMENT 1 records Although the function of the NE operator followed by a list of values cannot be duplicated by coding separate simple NE conditional commands the function can be duplicated by nesting the conditions as follows IF DEPARTMENT NE 1 IF DEPARTMENT NE 3 EXCLUDE In this case the second condition is executed only when the first condition is true but again more coding is required STRUCTURED EDITOR 305 Example 3 Testing for a range of values To print the third detail line only if the value of the PD GROSS PAY field is within the range 1000 2000 you might use the command below CASE prn ANNUAL SALARY IR 0 TO 12499 W NUM1 prn ANNUAL SALARY R 12500 TO 24999 W NUM1 prn ANNUAL SALARY 100 R 25000 TO 99999 W NUM1 prn ANNUAL SALARY 500 Hi H This form of the conditional expression first tests the value of the spe
180. ating system when the generated program did not have any serious errors itself The possible values returned by the generated program vary with the operating system For example in z OS a return code of 0 all zeroes indicates a successful completion of program execution SYS RETURN CODE is used in MetaMap to replace the automatically set value with a different value in order to influence processing of subsequent steps in a job stream The replaced value of SYS RETURN CODE is displayed as a user exit status in the PPTLST the system set value of the SYS RETURN CODE is displayed as the system exit status in the PPTLST When the system exit status is 0 the user exit status is passed to the operating system When the system exit status is not 0 the system exit status is passed to the operating system Example Two programs are scheduled to be executed one after another The first program writes records to a target file that is read as a source into the second program If in a given execution of the first program no records are written to the target file then SYS RETURN CODE is set so that the computer operators can identify quickly that the second program should not be executed By default the code returned to the operating system would identify the first program as having executed successfully The pertinent commands from the first program are EGIN REPORT 1 INPUT F true condition EXCLUDE UTPUT FIELD INPUT F
181. ays contain the real number of jobs read into storage which will be in a range of 0 to 44 SYS READ COUNT The SYS READ COUNT field is defined automatically in all generated programs for each Source File It contains a count of records read for the named Source File The count includes all records not named in a PATH option all records excluded from within Source File or record procedures and all records excluded because of validation errors Do not confuse this field with SYS INPUT COUNT which contains a count of all records read and processed from the Source File i e all records read and not excluded in a Source File procedure for any reason Format SourceFile name SourceRecord name SYS READ COUNT SourceFile name When SourceFile name is given the count of all the record read for the named Source File will be kept in SYS READ COUNT STRUCTURED EDITOR 281 SourceRecord name When SourceRecord name is given the count of this specific record read will be kept in SYS READ COUNT The SYS READ COUNT field may be referenced anywhere in a program request If it is referenced with a Source File report or Target File initial procedure or within a record input procedure executed during the initial processing phase it refers to the number of records read in the INITIAL SORT EXTRACTY PREPASS procedure If it is referenced anywhere else it refers to the number of records read in the
182. ber of Records This value is needed because the generated program must reserve a certain amount of space for the Array Warning Rate Enter a Warning Rate percentage This percentage is derived from the value entered in the Occurrence field For instance if you define 200 as Occurrence value the maximum number of lines in the Array and a Warning rate of 80 a warning will be generated if the number of lines in the Array exceeds 160 When the program is run this warning will be saved in the file ExecName st It has the following format External Array almost full Binary Search This checkbox is only active if a File Key has been defined on the selected Dictionary File or if the Use Sort Fields flag has been set Select this checkbox to perform a Binary Search on the External Array e Clear this checkbox to perform a Serial Search on the External Array Use Sort Fields This checkbox is only active if Sort Keys have been defined for the selected Dictionary File Select this checkbox in order to use the Sort Keys in stead of the File Keys for the sequential or binary search operations Sort Fields It is interesting to define up to 16 Sort Fields for your External Array if it is not ordered in the sequence you want External Arrays are sorted in memory no sort workfile will be used Use this field as follows 1 Double click the New button The list of Fields available in the Records belonging to the External Array is
183. bjects of the same type the Up and Down options become available You can only reorder objects of the same type Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Work Field s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Work Fields on page 135 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove the selected Work Field IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 42 Option Meaning Auto Position The auto calculate position functionality Flagging this option makes it possible to automatically calculate the position In most cases this results in the end position of the last field 1 There are some exceptions to this standard rule e The first field has no predecessor Obviously in this case the position will be 1 e Redefines in this case the position of the redefined field will be taken e Subfields this is in fact a variation of redefines The first subfield will have the same position as the group field it belongs to T
184. ce Field contents into its hexadecimal representation This function can be used when the user needs to transfer binary or packed decimal values from one system to another in non binary file format The SYS BINARY function converts the hexadecimal values back to the original format Usage Field name SYS HEXADECIMAL Field name Field name must be an alphanumeric field The resulting string length will be the double of the original length Example C BIN 1A W HEX C BIN SYS HEXADECIMAL DEBUG C BIN IS AND W HEX IS C BIN W HEX RESULT C BIN IS 1A AND W HEX IS 3141 Remarks SYS HEXADECIMAL can not be used on occurring fields SYS INTEGER The Field nameSYS INTEGER is automatically defined in each generated program for numeric fields either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will determine for you the greatest integer value that is less than or equal to the numeric field value STRUCTURED EDITOR 290 Format Field name SYS INTEGER Field name Field name must be a numeric field SYS INTEGER is implemented as the INTEGER function within COBOL Remarks SYS INTEGER can not be used on occurring fields Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher SYS INTEGER OF DATE The Field name SYS INTEGER OF DATE is automatically defined in each generated program for
185. ce File A File Procedure is used to manipulate the Source File before it is processed See File Procedures on page 63 There can only be one File Procedure of each type Initial Input and End of File for a Source File Add gt Source Record Select this option to add a Source Record to the Source File Only Source Records belonging to the Dictionary File that have not yet been assigned to the Source File can be added Create a Copy Select this option to create a copy of the Model Up Down The Up and Down options allow to reorder objects In the Tree View the objects are ordered per type If there are at least two objects of the same type the Up and Down options become available You can only reorder objects of the same type IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 22 Option Meaning Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Source File s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Source Files on page 50 You can also access the Properties window by double
186. ce Files on page 183 2 Right click the Model name in the Tree View Window and select Add to Source Control The following screen is displayed Comment Comment 3 Enter a comment and click OK The MetaMap Model is now checked in In the Tree View Window checked in Models are represented LP by the FA icon If you want to make changes to a checked in Model you first have to check out the Model See Performing Changes to MetaMap Models Under Source Control on page 184 19 4 Showing the Source Control Status of Opened Source Files 1 Open the MetaMap Model you want to display the status for 2 Select Show Status from the Source Control menu The applicable status message is displayed The following table lists the different possibilities VERSION MANAGEMENT WITH SOURCE CONTROL 184 Status Displayed message Icon MetaMap Model not added to p i Status information for MetaSuite Model 04is as follows File is not under source code control kaf MetaMap Model added to Source ra Control not checked out MetaMap Manager Information US a Status information for MetaSuite Model 04is as follows File is under source code control File is not checked out MetaMap Model added to Source S e Control checked out by you MetaMap Manager Information elo This message does not exclude that a a an ee this file has also been checked out by pars a vat eevee
187. cess of viewing Records from up to 16 Source Files simultaneously In order for the generated program to determine what Records from which Source Files are to be viewed together Match Fields must be defined on all Source Files to be matched The Matching Wizard can be used to define these Match Fields 1 Open an existing Model or create a new Model For this procedure the Model named ModelForMatching Wizard was opened This Model contains three Source Files and two Work Fields e Each Source contains one or two Records with a number of fields H 01 SourceFile2 H 02 SourceFile3 158 T01 TargetFile bE T02 TargetFile ip WorkField1 EP WorkField2 DATA SOURCES 100 2 Select the Matching Wizard icon A from the Wizard Toolbar A window similar to this one is displayed ModelForMatchingWizard Matc V ModelForMatchingWizard Matc 1 ModelForMatchingWizard Mat e a Ge E SO1 PAY RATE D E SO1 EMPLOYEE NAME a E SO1 EMPLOYEE NAME E S01 STREET ADDRESS E S01 STREET ADDRESS E SO1 CITY ADDRESS p SO1 CITY ADDRESS E S01 STATE CODE E S01 STATE CODE gt S01 ZIP CODE S01 ZIP CODE E S01 SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER E S01 SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER E SO1 SECURITY CLEARANCE CODE E SO1 SECURITY CLEARANCE CODE S E SO1 VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS S E SO1 VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS E SO1 VOL TYPE b S01 VOL TYPE b S01 VOL CODE gt S01 VOL CODE gt 01 VOL AMOUNT gt S 01 VOL AMOUNT
188. ch field type Field Type Mask description Signed numeric The default mask contains a minus sign as the rightmost character All negative values fields are printed with a trailing minus sign Numeric fields The default mask contains a decimal point and as many digit replacement characters with decimals 9s to the right of the decimal point as are specified by the Decimal option Numeric fields The default mask contains as many digits as its size without zero suppression Date fields The default mask is its selected date format Alphanumeric The default mask contains as many alphanumeric character replacement characters X fields as are required to print the field Examples of default masks Field Type Size Default mask Signed numeric fields without decimal positions 6 999999 Signed numeric fields with two decimals 6 9999 99 Character Field 6 XXXXXX You can also define customized masks Examples Field Type Field Size Mack Field value Printed value Character 6 XXBXXXX AB138B AB 138B IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 WorK FIELDS 141 Field Type Field Size Mask Field value Printed value Numeric with 2 decimal 2 99 35 35 positions 0 00 12 12 Unsigned Select Unsigned check box to indicate that a numeric value is not signed i e that it does not contain a sign indicator or This field applies for the following field types e Binary Binary Native
189. checkbox if you have defined GroupBy Fields and want to obtain Totals based on these Fields in your Target File or Report Note Setting the Total checkbox allows the user to set or unset the Accumulate flags of the fields within the record H one of these Accumulate flags has been set it is not possible to unset the Total flag of the record again In that case that flag is disabled Page Checkbox The Page checkbox only applies for Target Reports Select this checkbox if you want to insert a Page Break for each Record Prefix In this field you can enter a Prefix for this Target Record The prefix will appear in the Tree View window between the Target Prefix T99 and the Record name A Prefix has a fixed length of 4 characters and must start with an alphabetic character Column Separator In this field you can enter the character s used as Column Separators for this Target Record This can only be specified for Delimited BRS file types If the field contains a default value for instance this default value has been defined in the User Profile you are currently using The procedure on how to change this default value is explained in the MetaSuite INI Manager Guide 9 3 IKAN Solutions DATA TARGETS 114 Some alphabetic characters have been used to refer to special separators Alphabetic Matching separator character character B Blank character space L Low value character Hex 00 H High
190. cific Model e Initial Read Write Cycle End of Job See Execution Time on page 146 11 1 Procedure 1 2 e Open the required Model PROGRAM PROCEDURES 145 Right click the Model name and select Add gt Program Procedure The properties window is displayed ic X New Program Procedure k Exercise 0 New Program Procedure Program Procedure Technical Business Program Procedure Properties Name m SAMPLE Source Field Source File Source Record START SYS APPLICATION SYS APPLICATION GROUP SYS AUTO SQLCODE SYS DATE SYS DB CONNECT SYS DB DATABASE SYS DB PASSWORD Execution Time Initial SYS DB USER SYS INVOKE RETURN SYS LINE NUMBER m ai i SYS PAGE NUMBER SYS RETURN CODE Delete Two tabs are available Technical and Business Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections e Technical Tab page 146 e Business Tab page 147 Apply or discard your changes Discard Close The name of the new Program Procedure and its symbol rd are displayed as a dependent Object of the Model Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model icon on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model PROGRAM PROCEDURES 146 11 2 Technical Tab The following fields are available on the Technical
191. cified field to see if it is greater than or equal to the first specified value If so it tests whether the value of the field is less than or equal to the second specified value If both tests are true the condition is true and the action indicated will occur The command above is equal to both of the following commands CASI G prn ANNUAL SALARY D AND LE 12499 W NUM1 prn ANNUAL SALARY GE 12500 AND LE 24999 W NUM1 prn ANNUAL SALARY 100 GE 25000 AND LE 99999 W NUM1 prn ANNUAL SALARY 500 D D The first alternative is a compound conditional command Example 4 Testing the absence of a range of values If two work fields FIRST EMP and LAST EMP contain the starting and ending employee numbers that you wanted to include in a report you could eliminate all unwanted employees from the report using the following command T IF EMPLOYEE NUMBER NI FIRST EMP TO LAST EMP EXCLUDE If the NI not in the range of relational operator is coded the value of the specified field is tested against the first value to determine if it is lower than that value If not it is tested against the second value to determine if it is higher than that value If either of these tests is true the condition is true and the specified action will occur The command above is essentially an abbreviation of the following compound conditional command IF EMPLOY
192. count of all the record read and processed for the named Source File will be kept in SYS INPUT COUNT SourceRecord name When SourceRecord name is given the count of this specific record read and processed will be kept in SYS INPUT COUNT The SYS INPUT COUNT field may be referenced anywhere in a program request If it is referenced within a Source File report or Target File initial procedure or a record input procedure during the initial processing phase it refers to the number of records input to the INITIAL SORT EXTRACT PREPASS procedure If it is referenced anywhere else it refers to the number of records input to but not excluded by the Source File input procedure The value of SYS INPUT COUNT is set at the end of the Source File input procedure before any report or Target File processing begins The only exception to this is a reference to the SYS INPUT COUNT for an external array a Source File with the TABLE TREE option In this case the reference is always to the number of records read into storage and processed during the initial processing of the external array Example Assuming that in a Source File input procedure the total salary for all employees has been accumulated in a field named TOT SAL the following command in an end of file procedure would calculate an average salary for all employees AVG SAL TOT SAL EMPLOYEE MASTER SYS INPUT COUNT STRUCTURED EDITOR 277 SYS INTERNAL
193. d Database SourceSafe Repository Cx Genet Gate 2 Fill out the fields as required and click OK Field Description Username Enter a username you can use to access the Source Control database Password Enter the required password Database Enter the name of the Source Control database to be used You can also use the Browse button to access the required database VERSION MANAGEMENT WITH SOURCE CONTROL 182 The following screen is displayed Add to SourceSafe Select location to store your project a Si J J MetaSuite SEO D msm Ga BS MetaSuite MSP MetaSuite MSP Ce Cen 3 Select MetaSuite gt MSP and click OK If you do not have a SCC compatible versioning tool the MDL and MSM folders are not used for checking in or out In that case those folders are considered to be workspaces and you will use a packaging script in order to promote the Models with a non SCC tool e g remote check in by means of a scheduler It is not very likely that the workspaces MDL MSM folders will be used to promote those files because often they are put within shared folders and between the time of packaging and the scheduled check in time things might change Therefore a separate MSP folder has been provided containing MSM and MDL folders and information files to bind them together Note The MSP folder is the default folder for MetaSuite Packages You can mod
194. d The START command is used only in the Initial Sort or input procedure for the Source File to be started START may be used with any Source File type If it is used on a sequential i e non keyed Source File the Source File must be in sequence by the field being used as the start key Any number of START commands can be coded in a program request STRUCTURED EDITOR 243 There are two types of start operations a generic key start and an exact key start A generic key start allows you to specify a partial or inexact starting key value If an exact match for the specified key value cannot be found the Source File will be positioned to the first record whose KeyField is greater than the specified key If the Source File contains no record with a KeyField value greater than that specified the Source File will be positioned at the end of file and the next read request will raise the end of file condition An exact key start requires an exact KeyField value If a record containing the specified value does not exist in the Source File the Source File will be positioned at the end of file even if records with higher KeyField values exist It follows then that if you are performing a start operation on a Source File for which only exact key starts are allowed you must know the exact KeyField value of the record at which you want to begin processing The system determines which type of start operation is performed This determination
195. d record is encountered Processing time will be improved because the overhead of constructing unwanted record buffers is eliminated Example Using our CUSTOMER INVOICE example to discontinue processing of a customer once an invoice record has been found containing an INVOICE CODE of 1 the following Source File input procedure would be coded BEGIN SOURCEFILE CUST SALES INPUT IF INVOICE CODE EQ 1 PUT 1 EXCLUDE Ea CUSTOMI CJ R Following the exclusion of a CUSTOMER record the generated program will simply keep reading input records bypassing the data validation and path construction processes until the next CUSTOMER record is obtained This can result in a dramatic reduction in processing time Note If the record name option had been omitted from the EXCLUDE command the same output would have been produced but at a greater processing cost Specifically each buffer would have to be constructed fully Processing Controlled Sets Controlled sets are built only after any Source File or record procedures for the controlling Source File have been processed Therefore to exclude an individual path based on information in the controlling Source File use an Initial Sort Source File input or record input procedure for the controlling Source File Example Assume that you have a controlling Source File called the EMPLOYEE SELECTION file which contains EMPLOYE
196. d DAYS LATE If the same date of April 10 2010 were assigned to a Work Field named AGING DATE the following command would produce the same result DAYS LATE AGE DUE DATE AGING DATE INSTRING INSTRING is a function that returns the position 1 based positions of a substring within a main string You can also specify a starting position You can use this function for 1 Replacing a string with a string of the same length page 248 2 Replacing a string at a specific location page 249 Format numfield O INSTRING string 1 string 2 litteral 2 numfield 3 numeric 3 numfield 4 numeric 4 Elements Description Element Description Required string 1 The main string yes string 2 The substring you are searching for within the main string yes numfield 3 The size of the substring If omitted the size is derived no from the LENGTH without trailing spaces of the second parameter numfield 4 The starting position If omitted the starting position is 1 no Example MY STRING1 Captain Haddoc will go to the doctor tomorrow MY STRING2 Captain POS1 INSTRING MY STRING1 doc 3 20 POS2 INSTRING MY STRING1 MY STRING 2 POS3 INSTRING MY STRING1 MY STRING 2 3 POS4 INSTRING MY STRING1 go to 4 POS1 will become 31 because this is the first occurrence of the substring doc when starting to se
197. d Use this option to add a Source to your Model using the Wizard See Z Source Wizard on page 90 Target Wizard Use this option to add a Target to your Model using the Wizard See Target rey Wizard on page 125 Mapping Wizard Use this option to define 1 to 1 mappings between Source and Target EA Fields See Mapping Wizard on page 130 Matching Wizard Use this option to define Matchings between Source Files Matching is e only possible with this Wizard See Matching Wizard on page 99 Test Data Wizard Use this option to select a sample of input records See Test Data Wizard ER on page 151 Tree View Window If the Tree View Window option in the View menu is checked the Tree View Window is displayed in the upper left corner Note As this is a dockable window you can modify its position Docking a Window page 44 You can also hide the window by clicking the Auto Hide 8 icon in its upper right corner Reclicking the Auto Hide jicon will restore the window to its original position The Tree View Window displays the hierarchical structure of a Model You can open several Models at the same time For easy navigation a Tab will be available at the bottom of the Tree View Window for each open Model Click the 9 plus sign in front of the MetaMap Model symbol in order to expand it A screen similar to this one is displayed sg EMPLOYEE DATA eh SECURITY CLEARANCE CODE H E VOLUNTARY DEDUCTI
198. d be coded BEGIN REPORT 3 INPUT IF ANNUAL SALARY GE 15000 EXCLUDE This procedure bypasses all employees with an annual salary greater than or equal to 15 000 for the third report only Any subsequent Report or Target File detail procedures will have access to the records bypassed by the third report Excluding Within a Path With records within a path two or more individual records are seen together as a single logical record Example A structured sequential file named CUST SALES might contain CUSTOMER records with a variable number of INVOICE records for each CUSTOMER To list all invoices for each customer the following simple program request might be coded SOURCEFILE CUST SALES PATH CUSTOMER INVOICI REPORT 1 DETAIL 1 CUST NUMBER SHORT INVOICE NUMBER Fl The first nine paths passed to the report might result in the output below with the path number shown on the right CUST INVOICE NUMBER NUMBER HK KK AK KKK path 162092 SC22021 1 STRUCTURED EDITOR 211 SC20344 SC39374 207389 SC15083 SC18938 SC47835 298330 SC36254 SC41048 312048 SC20924 O OO Jon OB GA k During report processing nine paths of data were constructed using the four CUSTOMER and nine INVOICE records accessed The same CUSTOMER record remains in the path until all of the INVOICE records associated with that CUSTOMER are processed At the run level that is
199. d click Next The technical properties windows for the Target Record is displayed Add Target gt Specify the technical information of this Target Record Detail Total Prefix Column Separator The following fields are available Field Meaning Detail and Total The Detail and Total checkboxes operate as toggles checkboxes Procedure will be executed after the Value logic defined for the Targets fields if the Target is configured to report Total values Prefix In this field you can enter a Prefix for this Target Record The prefix will appear in the Tree View window between the Target Prefix T99 and the Record name A Prefix has a fixed length of 4 characters and must start with an alphabetic character Column In this field you can enter the character s used as Column Separators for this Separator Target Record If the field contains a default value for instance this default value has been defined in the User Profile you are currently using The procedure how to change this default value is explained in the MetaSuite INI Manager User Guide Row Terminator In this field you can enter the character s used as Row Terminators for this Target Record If the field contains a default value for instance this default value has been defined in the User Profile you are currently using The procedure how to change this default value is explained in the MetaSuite INI Manager User Guide IKAN Solutions M
200. d name and select Add gt Sub Source Field 4 Select the file description you want to add and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath e Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically DATA SOURCES 89 The Source Field Properties window is displayed SO1 MRM VOL TYPE we Exercise 0 01 multi record master S01 MRM EMPLOYEE DATA S01 MRM VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS S01 MRM VOL TYPE Technical Source Field Properties Name MRM VOL TYPE Dictionary Field MRM VOL TYPE MRM VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS MR j 5 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections Fields page 59 6 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Sub Source Field and its symbol E are displayed in the Tree View window 7 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Fields The following fields are available e Name page 60 e Dictionary Field page 60 Name This field is updated automatically with the name of the Source Field you selected when adding the Source
201. d of Job Messages sscssscsecsseessessecesecsseesecesecesecesecseceaecaeessaeeseesaecseesseeeescnseseeeeaeseees 170 toeerst EES 170 EI 171 Chapter 15 Exporting a Model to CDIF format ssssssccecceessesceeceeeees 175 Chapter 16 Packaging a Model 5 icisisnscnsensessasnnsnceneontaesaysasnaseceaneasiasesneeneresenses 176 Chapter 17 Display Options seeesseeesssecosssesosssscssesccsssesssecocssssesssscsssseesssso 178 Chapter 18 User Prone icsancoussasarsdascevasdaniweaanssdinanacdtauateunnantasasocnsabeonanancaenasa 180 Chapter 19 Version Management with Source Control sseesseseseeesesseeeeeee 181 19 1 Establishing the Connection Between MetaMap and the Source Control Gwstem 181 19 2 Terminating the Connection Between MetaMap and the Source Control System ceeseceseeeeecseeenecneteeeenes 182 19 3 Adding MetaMap Models to Source Control 183 19 4 Showing the Source Control Status of Opened Source Piles eeeeeesseesecesesecceseceeeesceeaeceseceeeesesenecaeeatenaeeas 183 19 5 Performing Changes to MetaMap Models Under Source Control 184 19 6 Undoing the Check out of a MetaMap Model 185 Chapter 20 Stuttgart egeeeedee regeert 186 20 1 Using the Structured Elek stets fee czctesncatecsbesed E sea sidesci au deeg eSEeE deed 186 COMPONENTS EE 187 20 25 META e EE 187 20 3 Notation Conventions cic sc cdsssssgccecssuteocensenes ia E iei ege EENS 188 20 4 COMMAS E 188 Basie ASSiIQOMOENtS rier sena
202. d of the last test EQ 0 since the only possible values for the BALANCE DUE field would be negative positive or zero CASE BALANCE DUE LT 0 NEG COUNT NEG COUNT 1 NEG TOT NEG TO BALANCE DUE GT 0 POS COUNT POS COUNT 1 POS TOT POS TO BALANCE DUE ELSE ZERO COUNT ZERO COUNT 1 END CASE This version of the command would be slightly more efficient than the previous example because the code generated for the command would contain two tests instead of three STRUCTURED EDITOR 199 DEBUG The DEBUG command is used to print debugging information on controlled points in your generated program The debugging information will only be produced if your program is generated in the MetaSuite generator through the Trace option Format DEBUG Debug label Field name SourceRecord name Elements Description Element Description Required Debug label Debug label is a literal of 40 characters enclosed between single Yes quotes which will be printed as a label before the real debugging information If the debug label contains as many occurrences of the special character as the number of parameters behind then the debug label will act as a mask Every character in the debug mask will be replaced by a parameter value The output format of a numeric field depends on the edit ma
203. d the Dictionary File its Records are displayed in the Dictionary Records selection box History Selecting this option will display all existing versions of the Dictionary Files By default this option is not selected and only the latest version of the Dictionary Files will be displayed Dictionary After having selected the required Dictionary File from the drop down list select Records the required Record in the selection box As Parameter Files can only have one Record you are not able to select more than one 3 Fill out the fields as required and click Next The Business definition window appears IKAN Solutions Add Source gt Specify the business related information of this source METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 DATA SouRCES 99 The following fields are available Field Meaning Business Rule In this field you can enter a Business Rule describing this Source File If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter additional information pertaining to this Source File If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R 4 Fill out the fields as required and click Finish The new Parameter File appears in the Tree View window 8 20 Matching Wizard Matching is the pro
204. dd a Path Record See Source Path Records on page 69 Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand all Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Path Record s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Source Path Records on page 69 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove this Path Record IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 24 Source Record Context Menu If you right click a Source Record name belonging to a Source File in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed Source Field Record Procedure Ctrl F Find Next F3 Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All Properties Remove Del Option Meaning New Select this option to add a Source Record See Source Records on page 56 Add gt Source Field Select this option to add a Source Field See Source Fields on page 58 Add gt Record Select this option to add a Record Procedure A Record Procedure can be used to Procedure manipulate a
205. deeg ge OSERE TERE EREE 30 Parameter File Record Context Menu 31 Parameter File Field Context Men 32 RE 33 TABLE OF CONTENTS ii Target Record Context Menus sscssccsteoesscsccbessesicbives soi csstessasesscbenscdss tens suessbeussbes divest i i iaiia 34 Target Field Context Meggie erinnerte ege Edgard 36 Target Title Heading and End Page Context Menu 37 Target Procedure Context Men ssccctissssccccsnsieicssbessivceseessascecsevigeets conus e EEEE EEEE devas deed 38 Program Broeecdute Contesplent ease geed NEESS Eddie Eed NEEN 39 Public Procedure Context ent ccsvsiccsvecseigcetecxesckesescpadatescesvesanedesecdiuetedchaccteoucedesauetesassiuetenss ssasteoetestivetescescaiengcaeee 40 Work Field Context Men 41 Sub Work Field Context Men 42 NEE 43 DF en EE 43 5 10 Package Compile Generate Wimdow stenst trust ttnt en ttt tnttt ssnst tett esssteessiessseesseeesseeeeet 43 A E T A EET E EE NE E A A E EE A E EE AE E N A E 44 5 12 DOCKING EW 44 Chapter 6 MetaMap Models Overview ssssccccessceeceesseeccescceecessceeeees 46 Chapter 7 MetaMap Model Sis sciiesscicossasccasicssmanecearenessaiacseaisccmaneanssanssnewascunenees 47 Chapter 8 Data Eegeregie eebe 49 8l Source GE 50 PROG OCU EE 50 UR TT Tabs E 51 BUSINGSS E 56 BZ SOUCCE RECO RAS eee eas bees ies seca cos costae eden AGN eoecc cet E das butane ose A E snas caters ca cohen dasa daa iow aues hace E OER 56 Procedure gd egene Dee Se eege ee EE ed d e ie 56
206. depends on operating system and or access method restrictions governing the Source File being accessed Wherever possible a generic key start will be used CAUTION It is easy to create an infinite loop when using the START command The following table shows when each type of start will be performed When using the START command to position a database Source File refer to the appropriate database supplement Source File Type z OS Start Operation VSE Start Operation Sequential generic key generic key Indexed ISAM exact key generic key Random BDAM exact key exact key VSAM generic key generic key Format START SourceFile name KEY start key Elements Description Element Description Required SourceFile name SourceFile name is the name of a Source File specified on a Yes SOURCEFILE command in the program request It may be any type of Source File but the corresponding SOURCEFILE command cannot contain either the CONTROLLED or the TABLE option STRUCTURED EDITOR 244 Element Description Required start key The KEY option is used to specify a starting KeyField value start key Yes The coding of start key varies depending on whether the Source File being started is a keyed or sequential Source File For keyed Source Files the KeyField is defined to the MetaStore and the system knows which field is the access key For sequential Source Files you must identify the KeyField to be used STARTING KEY
207. determine whether or not a record from the specified Source File is absent from the current set of matched records When matching the records from two or more Source Files the system always designates one or more Source Files as being present in the current matched set and may designate one or more Source Files as being absent The current matched set consists of one or more input records whose match keys are equal to the current match key For example assume that three Source Files are being matched on an employee number and the first two Source Files contain records with an employee number of 12345 but the third does not When employee number 12345 becomes the current match key the first two Source Files will be present in the matched set and the third Source File will be absent Note Both the PRESENT and ABSENT match conditions can be tested only within Report or Target File detail procedures or within public procedures performed by Report or Target File detail procedures Format IF SourceFile name PRESENT THEN true commands ELSE false commands END IF Elements Description Element Description Required SourceFile name The name of one of the Source Files being matched Yes true command The IF SourceFile name PRESENT true command sequence Yes specifies the action to be taken if the match key from the current record from the named Source File is equal to the current match set key Source
208. displayed 2 Select the required field and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Showall When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath e Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically DATA SOURCES 74 The selected field is displayed in the Input Sort Order Field Properties window Input Sort Order Field DEPARTMENT NUMBER excercise 1 501 DEPARTMENT ARRAY ISRT DEPARTMENT NUMBER Input Sort Or Technical Input Sort Order Field Properties Name _ Descending Source Field S01 DEPARTMENT NUMBER SO1 DEPAI X Field Meaning Name This field contains the name of the Sort Field You can edit this name It may contain up to 32 characters Descending By default this checkbox is not selected so that the sorting is done in ascending order If you select this checkbox the sorting will be done in descending order Source Field The Browse button next to this selection box can be used in two ways e If the field contains the name of a Sort Field clicking the Browse button results in displaying the Properties window of the matching Source Field See Source Fields for an External Array on page 76 e Ifyou empty t
209. down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath e Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically The Source File Properties window is displayed EH x Exercise 0 employee master Source File Technical Business Source File Properties Name employee master Sort Fields Organization Standard New Prefix Dictionary File employee master v 95 J Advanced V Automatic Manu Match Field E Special Write Only ge Match With el Match On a Controlled By x Control Key x Two tabs are available Technical and Business 4 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections e Technical Tab page 51 e Business Tab page 56 5 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Source File and its symbol HH are displayed in the Tree View window 6 Save your changes by doing one of the following Click the Save Active Model Gi button on the Main Toolbar Select File gt Save Active Model Technical Tab The following fields are available on the Technical tab Source File Properties Name page 51 Organization page 51 Prefix page 51 Dictionary File page 52 Sort Fields page 52 e Advanced Name Automatic Checkbox page 53 Manual Checkbox page 54 Special Write Only Checkbox page 54 Match With page 54 Match On page 54
210. ds either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will determine for you the value of the character field in reverse sequence Format Field name SYS REVERSE STRUCTURED EDITOR 297 Field name Field name must be a character field SYS REVERSE is implemented as the REVERSE function within COBOL Remarks SYS REVERSE can not be used on occurring fields Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher SYS SORT The Field nameSYS SQRT is automatically defined in each generated program for numeric fields either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will determine for you the square root of the numeric field value Format Field name SYS SQRT Field name Field name must be a numeric field SYS SQRT is implemented as the SQRT function within COBOL Remarks SYS SQRT can not be used on occurring fields Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher SYS TRIM The SYS TRIM Source Field function removes all leading spaces in a string Usage Field name SYS TRIM STRUCTURED EDITOR 298 Field name Field name must be an alphanumeric field Example W TRIM XYZ W TRIM W TRIM SYS TRIM DEBUG TRIM W TRIM RESULT TRIM XYZ Remarks SYS TRIM can not be used on occurring fields SYS UNICODE ASCII The SYS UNICODE ASCITI Source Field functi
211. e icon in the Edit Toolbar and enter the commands manually To switch it on again click the Stop Edit icon a Wb We 1 2 Select the required command by clicking it The command will be added to the Workspace Any error messages or warnings are displayed underneath the Commands Workspace CEEE 3 Once you have finished entering the commands click the Stop Edit icon w The Procedure is verified If syntax errors are found the errors message are displayed underneath the Workspace 4 Save your changes by doing one of the following Click the Save Active Model kd button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model 8 6 DATA SOURCES 63 Business Tab The following fields are available For detailed information refer to the separate sections Business Rule page 63 Note page 63 Business Rule In this field you can enter a description of the Record Procedure If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter Notes for this Record Procedure If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R File Procedures File Procedures are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Source File Apart from File Procedures it is also possible to assign Path page 67 and Sou
212. e DO FOR command or a single time only using the DO command The DO FOR and DO commands are described separately in this section STRUCTURED EDITOR 204 A public procedure always remains within the scope of either a single Source File procedure a single report procedure or a single Target File procedure That is it may be executed directly or indirectly via another public procedure only from within a single Source File Report or Target File procedure Format DO procedure name WHILE conditional expression Elements Description Element Description Required procedure name Procedure name is the name of the public procedure to be Yes executed It must match the name appearing on the BEGIN command that delimits the beginning of the procedure within the scope of the current procedure conditional Conditional expression identifies the condition or conditions expression under which the specified public procedure is to be executed In the DO WHILE command a conditional expression is coded exactly the same way as a conditional expression within the IF command For a complete description of the rules that apply to the coding of conditional expressions refer to the section Conditional Keywords page 300 It is important to note that at least one of the values that are contained in the specified conditional expression must be modified within the performed procedure Otherwise if the condition is true the program
213. e Source Control menu The following screen is displayed 7 lf required enter a Comment and click OK The Comment will be available in the Source Control program i e Visual SourceSafe 19 6 Undoing the Check out of a MetaMap Model You can undo the check out of a MetaMap Model if you want to revert to the last saved version of a MetaMap Model while ignoring the changes made in the mean time 1 Select the required MetaMap Model in the Tree View Window 2 Select Undo Check Out from the Source Control menu The following message appears X MetaMap Manager Information changes made to the file ModelForMappingWizard2 version 6 O Are you sure you want to undo checkout and lose all 3 Click Yes to confirm the operation LO The check out is undone and the MetaMap Model icon on the Tree View Window changes to F You can also click No to cancel the operation and keep the file checked out CHAPTER 20 Structured Editor 20 1 Using the Structured Editor The Structured Editor is used to easily define the logic for MetaMap Procedures and Target Fields To activate the Structured Editor click inside the Properties window You can also use the following buttons to activate or deactivate this feature to Start Stop Editing e to Toggle the Assisted Mode Once the structured editor has been activated the list with available commands is displayed at the left side of the Comm
214. e a Source File for binary or serial search you can define it as an External Array The layout of an External Array is identical to a normal Source File but the processing speed is a lot higher because the External Array is kept entirely in memory When using an External Array you will need to e define a unique key e define a maximum number of reads Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Right click the Model name and select Add gt Source gt External Array 3 Select the file description you want to add and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically The External Array Properties window appears DEPARTMENT ARRAY e NI MetaSuite Model 06 DEPARTMENT ARRAY External Array Technical Business External Array Properties Name Sort Fields Organization Standard MM en Prefix Dictionary File DEPARTMENT ARRAY V 2 el Occurrence 9999 Warning Rate OK Binary Search Two tabs are available Technical and Business 4 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections e Technical Tab page
215. e displayed underneath e Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically DATA SOURCES 50 The Source Field Properties window is displayed MRM EMPLOYEE DATA MRM DEPARTMENT 1 MRM VOL TYPE Exercise 0 multi record master MRM EMPLOYEE DATA MRM VOLUNTA Technical Source Field Properties Name IRM VOL TYPE Dictionary Field MRM VOL TYPE MRM VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS MR 5 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections Fields page 59 6 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Sub Source Field and its symbol E are displayed in the Tree View window 7 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model lal button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Fields The following fields are available e Name page 60 e Dictionary Field page 60 Name This field is updated automatically with the name of the Source Field you selected when adding the Source Field If required you can change the name in this field This name will be displayed in the Tree View window It can contain up to 32 characters and must be unique within the Record Dictionary Field This read only field displays the name of the Dictionary Field You can click the Browse button next to it to display its properties DATA SOURCES 61 8 5
216. e drawn It is an integer or a non subscripted integer Work Field random number See general description above No seed How it works The first time that the SAMPLE command is executed the sample size SS is calculated as follows SS log 1 C log 1 R SS is then rounded up to the next integer value The remaining terms used in the calculation are e log the logarithmic function C the confidence level R the maximum expected error rate Once the discovery sample size has been calculated the sample selection process is exactly like the fixed size sample selection process described earlier SAMPLE with amount field and standard deviation This format of the SAMPLE command is used when you are concerned with the materiality i e gross amount of error in the population rather than just the rate of errors Format SAMPLE amount field confidence level precision POPULATION population count STD DEV standard deviation RANDOM random number seed Elements Element Description Required amount field Enter the name of the field to be sampled It must be a totalable non Yes subscripted field defined on a Source File confidence level Enter the statistical probability expressed as a percentage that the Yes selected sample is representative of the population It is a number or a non subscripted Work Field having a value in the range 80 99 9 The larger a value specified here the larger the sampl
217. e field NEXT REPORT DATE being set to two weeks from the current system date NEXT REPORT DATE SYS DATE 14 Runtime Parameter Usage SYS DATE yyyymmdd The value of the default system date SYS DATE field may be set at execution time using a runtime parameter that provides the date in yyyymmdd format yyyy is a four digit year mm is a two digit month and dd is a two digit day Each component of the date must consist of all necessary digits and must include leading zeros where appropriate If no runtime parameter is specified the value defaults to the current system date from the computer Example The following runtime parameter establishes June 1 2012 as default system date SYS DATE 20120601 In the generated program any reference to SYS DATE will use the value 20120601 SYS DATE CHECK The SYS DATE CHECK runtime parameter is used to control system error handling for invalid date input fields You can Specify the maximum number of invalid date fields to be trapped and excluded e Instruct the system to display an error message only once when it first encounters an invalid date e Instruct the system to ignore all invalid dates A date is considered invalid when it does not contain appropriate values for the year month and or day portions of the field as defined via the DATE option of the field definition The normal system action when an invalid date is
218. e length of each record is fixed or variable If the length is variable the value is put in the four byte Record Descriptor word that is put before each record Report Select this option if your Target must be a readable report A Target Report is built during the creation of your MetaMap Model DATA TARGETS 108 Option Meaning Sequential Select this option if your Target must be a Sequential Target File A Sequential File does not contain delimiter signs The size of the fields is fixed meaning that any unused positions are left blank SOL Select this option if your Target must be an SOL file User Defined Select this option if your Target must be a User Defined File XML Select this option if your Target must be an XML file Fixed Select this checkbox if you want to export the Target File as FIXED If not selected the file will be exported as VARIABLE By default the value defined in the MetaStore database will be proposed Action Select the required Action from the drop down list The following options are available Option Meaning Delete Remove the Records from the Database Insert Use the INSERT command for every record Unknown INSERT UPDATE will be chosen Update Use the INSERT command for every record Page Length This field only applies if you selected Report in the Target Type drop down list Enter the Page Length of the Report in number of lines per page If the length is set t
219. e message you want to find The following types are available e Any e Error Messages e Warning Messages e Informational Messages Condition The following conditions can be selected e Contains e Ends With e Exact e Starts With Search String Enter the search string TRANSFORMATION PROGRAMS 166 3 Use the Find Next and Find Previous Generator Message buttons to continue your search 14 3 Executing a Transformation Program 1 Transfer the compiled Transformation Program ExecName exe and the run script ExecName mrl to the platform where the program must be executed Note If the COBOL source code was not compiled automatically during the generation process page 163 transfer the COBOL source code ExecName mg to the required platform and compile the code manually 2 Edit the run script file in a text editor It has the following structure E ExecName mrl Notepad iol E File Edit Format Help win NT 95 Runscript For ExecName 0001 Execname log ExecName Ist ExecName dol ExecnName do2 Execname rol ExecName tol Execname td2 PPTIPT NUL PPTFO1 Sour cemMDL1L PPTFO2 Sour cemMDL2 PPTTOL ExecName tOL PPTTO2 ExecName t02 PPTLOG ExecNname log PPTLST ExecName Ist PPTDBG ExecNname dbg PPTTDOL ExecName dol PPTTDO2 ExecName do2 PPTROL ExecName ROL ExecName exe del ExecName tol del ExecName t02 echo error level These lines have the following meanin
220. e name of the new Target Record and its symbol oE are displayed in the Tree View window 6 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Fields The following fields are available Name page 113 Dictionary Record page 113 Detail and Total Checkboxes page 113 Page Checkbox page 113 Prefix page 113 Column Separator page 113 Row Terminator page 114 DATA TARGETS 113 Name If you create a Target Record it is based on a Dictionary Record available in the MetaStore and this field is updated automatically with the name of this Dictionary Record when you select it in the Dictionary Record field below After having made the selection you can change the name in this field If you create a Target Report it is not based on a Dictionary File and you must define it manually In this case you enter a name describing the Target Record in this field The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree View window It can contain up to 32 characters Dictionary Record This field displays the name of the Dictionary Record You can click the Browse button to select the required Dictionary Record Detail and Total Checkboxes The Detail and Total checkboxes operate as toggles Select the Detail checkbox if you want to obtain every processed Record separately in your Target File or Report Select the Total
221. e required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections e Technical Tab page 105 e Business Tab page 111 4 Apply or discard your changes Technical Business Target Properties Name New Target Sort Fields Organization D Nen Prefix T02 Dictionary File E x Target Type V Fixed Action GroupBy Fields Page Length e New Page Width D Version 1 Identifier Title E Grand Total The name of the new Target and its symbol KEE are displayed in the Tree View window 5 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Technical Tab The following fields are available on the Technical tab e Name page 106 e Organization page 106 e Prefix page 106 e Dictionary File page 107 DATA TARGETS 106 e Target Type page 107 e Action page 108 e Page Length page 108 e Page Width page 108 e Version page 108 e Identifier Title page 109 e Grand Total page 109 Sort Fields page 109 e GroupBy Fields page 110 Name If the Target is based on a Dictionary File available in the MetaStore this field is updated automatically with the name of this Dictionary File when you select it in the Dictionary File field below After having made the selection you can change the name in this field If the Target is not based on a Dicti
222. e size will be Maximum Error Rate The expected occurrence rate of errors in the population expressed as a percentage It is a number or a non subscripted Work Field having a value in the range of 0 00001 to 99 99999 Random Base Number A one to eight digit integer or integer Work Field to be used as a seed by the random number generator This seed is not itself the first random number used but it is the starting point for the calculation used to generate the first random number If this specification is omitted a random number seed will be generated from the computer s clock The advantage of specifying a Random Base Number is that you can duplicate a sample by later entering the same value for Random Base Number provided there has been no change in the number or order of records on the Source File All of the sampling techniques employ at one time or another the random number generator supplied with the system This random number generator uses the multiplicative congruence technique with a period of 2 to the 32nd power 7 6 Variables Test Data Wizard gt Sampling Method gt Parameters _ Select sampling options for the method Variables The following fields are available Field Meaning Amount Field The name of the field to be sampled It must be a totalable non subscripted field defined on a Source File Confidence Level The statistical probability expressed as a percentage that the sel
223. e size will be precision Enter the total tolerable amount of error for the population not the Yes tolerable error per item in the population It is a number or non subscripted integer Work Field population Enter the exact count of records contained in the population from Yes count which the sample will be drawn It is an integer or a non subscripted integer Work Field IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 239 Element Description Required standard The STD DEV option is used to specify the standard deviation of the Yes deviation amount field being sampled This statistic is necessary for the computation of the variables sample size The larger the standard deviation of the amount field the larger the sample size If your population contains a large standard deviation you will find that the variables sampling algorithm requires that nearly all or in some cases all of your input records be included in the sample When this occurs you should consider stratifying the population of amount fields and drawing separate variables samples from each stratum Using this approach the total number of records selected will be reduced mainly because the standard deviation within each stratum will be reduced random number See general description above No seed How it works The first time the SAMPLE command is executed the sample size SS is calculated as follows SS 1 R T
224. e that calls the error routine that puts error messages on the output list It can be used to trigger some program states or error conditions It can be tested on the following values SYS OK SYS NOT NUMERIC SYS NULL VALUE SYS OUT OF LIMIT SYS INVALID DAT SYS OUT OF RANG SYS OVERF LOW Not in buffer I O error String error You can trigger for instance a SYS OVERFLOW when a COBOL ON SIZE ERROR occurs When testing this variable you can take appropriate action from within the program 8 y pprop prog O O OO Jon G GA u a rz s Gl Fl Ros e SC SR Soe ZZ FF F F F F F Resetting The SYS RUNTIME STATUS is not reset automatically You can set it to any value so you can reset it to zero at any place This makes it possible to test the status e on field level by resetting the status before using the field and testing afterwards on record level by testing it in the OUTPUT POST mapping and resetting it again or on program level by resetting the status in the PROGRAM INIT and testing it in the PROGRAM END Example BEGIN TARGETFILE 1 INPUT TOl employee_number EMPLOYEE NUMBER 11288 5000 IF SYS RUNTIME STATUS EQ SYS OVERFLOW DEBUG OVERFLOW SYS TIME The SYS TIME field is defined automatically for each report It contains the current system time in hh mm ss format Use
225. ect this option to open a Model which is already under Source Control IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 21 Option Meaning Show History Select this option to display the history for the Model Show Status Select this option to display the status of the Model Source File Context Menu Ifyou right click a Source File name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed S p MetaSuite Model 04 Gr DMS Car Distances mr DMS CAR DISTANCES RECORD gt NUMBER PLATE E PERIOD i E DISTANCE Cam fe New Mapping Wizard d Add ee 8 Target Record Create a Copy Target Procedure Up Title Down Heading Find Ctrl F End Page Find Next F3 Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All Properties Option Meaning New Select this option to add a Source File to the Model See Source Files on page 50 Source Wizard Select this option to start the Source Wizard The Source Wizard can assist you in selecting your data sources See Source Wizard on page 90 Add gt Path Select this option to add a Path to the Source File The purpose of a Path depends on the Source File type There can only be one Path for a Source File If a Path has already been defined the Path option will not be active in the context menu Add gt File Procedure Select this option to add a File Procedure to the Sour
226. ected sample is representative of the population It is a number or a non subscripted Work Field having a value in the range 80 99 9 The larger a value specified here the larger the sample size will be IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 TEST DATA WIZARD 159 Field Meaning Precision The total tolerable amount of error for the population not the tolerable error per item in the population It is a number or non subscripted integer Work Field Random Base Number A one to eight digit integer or integer Work Field to be used as a seed by the random number generator This seed is not itself the first random number used but it is the starting point for the calculation used to generate the first random number If this specification is omitted a random number seed will be generated from the computer s clock The advantage of specifying a Random Base Number is that you can duplicate a sample by later entering the same value for Random Base Number provided there has been no change in the number or order of records on the Source File All of the sampling techniques employ at one time or another the random number generator supplied with the system This random number generator uses the multiplicative congruence technique with a period of 2 to the 32nd power 8 The Mapping window is displayed testdata msm SS testdata SS TO 1 employee master Cu TO1 EMPLOYEE DATA E T01 EMPLOYEE NUMBER
227. ed random number See general description above No seed How it works A sample size is calculated using the standard variables sampling calculation shown previously The system then calculates the number of units SU of the total value of the population that must be sampled SU V N SS The components of this calculation are as follows e V the total value of the amount field e N the population count SS the sample size calculated using the standard variables sampling formula Rather than assign an equal probability of selection to each input record as for standard variables sampling the system now assigns an equal probability of selection to each unit tens hundreds thousands etc in the total value of the sampled field Here a record having an amount value of 100 will be ten times more likely to be selected than one having a value of 10 a record having an amount value of 5000 will be fifty times more likely to be selected than one having value of 100 etc For each input record the probability of selection is thus P A SU T where P the probability is calculated to seven decimal places The remaining terms in the calculation are as follows e A the value of the amount field from the current record SU the total number of units to be sampled minus the number of units already included in the sample T the total number of units of the amount field in the population minus the number of unit
228. ed once at the end of the job Commands Workspace In this field you can enter the commands that build the File Procedure These commands are written in MXL MetaSuite Export Language 1 Enter the required commands By default the list of available commands is displayed at the left of this field Invalid commands are displayed in red Note If you do not need the assisted mode you can switch it off using the icon in the Edit Toolbar and enter the commands manually To switch it on again click the Stop Edit icon Web d i 1 2 Select the required command by clicking it The command will be added to the Workspace Any error messages or warnings are displayed underneath the Commands Workspace 3 Once you have finished entering the commands click the Stop Edit icon 5 The Procedure is verified If syntax errors are found the errors message are displayed underneath the Workspace 4 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Business Tab The following fields are available Business Rule page 125 e Note page 125 9 8 DATA TARGETS 125 Business Rule In this field you can enter a description of the Target Procedure If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this fie
229. edBy Source Files e bypass the current Path in case of Source Files with a Path e exit from the Procedure STRUCTURED EDITOR 208 Most Reports and Target Files that you produce will only be interested in some subset of records from a Source File The EXCLUDE command can be used in a number of ways to bypass unnecessary records In order to optimize the coding of your program request and the processing of the generated program this should be done as early as possible Format EXCLUDE record name SourceFile name Elements Description Element Description Required record name When the Source File contains a path you can specify which No record within the path needs to be excluded For more information on excluding on a record level please refer to Excluding at Record Level page 212 SourceFile name When the Source File is a controlling Source File you can exclude No a controlling set of records from within the Controlled By Source File logic For more information on excluding on a Source File please refer to Excluding at Source Level page 213 Depending on the type of procedure in which the command appears the current record may be excluded only from a specific Report or TargetFile or from all reports and Target Files in the program request The EXCLUDE processing that occurs within each type of procedure is described below Note An EXCLUDE in a public procedure is treated like an EXCLUDE in the Source F
230. edures on page 148 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove the selected Public Procedure IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 41 Work Field Context Menu If you right click a Work Field name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed b SampleModel Source File gt S02 datawarehouse 1 1 S01 External Array 8 S03 datawarehouse i 8 ADAB EMPLOYEE CLUSTER T01 Target A Program Procedure B Public Procedure BIL Close Model Add gt Sub Work Field Create a Copy Up Down Find Ctrl F Find Net P Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All Properties Remove Del S Description Auto Position Auto Size Delete test F MetaSuite M uto Layout Autosaving Manual Layout Option Meaning New Select this option to add a new Work Field See Work Fields on page 135 Add gt Sub Work Field Select this option to add a Subfield to the selected Work Field A Subfield can be used to divide the Workfield in several parts See Subfields on page 142 Create a Copy Select this option to create a copy of the Model Up The Up and Down options allow to reorder objects Down In the Tree View the objects are ordered per type If there are at least two o
231. eege eege egene 296 CR e MET 296 En ee 297 SY SSRI EE 297 SYS UNIGODE ASCI EE 298 EAR ee Re 298 ee 299 SYS UPPERCASE E 299 20 10 Conditional EE 300 POLINA E A dds cuauteccdedeuaeessdecnaeescdecnantvossedadsteesestb ened EENEG 300 Elements Diesel renoier A e E EENS 300 Coding Conditional KeyWordS sississssseciiriirsesisiirsrrieiiirrasisiiisiiruesidsiirsvstddisrinesei EES ikiiki ii isinisi saaist 301 TESTING FOR A VALUE EQUAL TO ONE OETHEVALUESINA IST 301 TESTING FOR A VALUE NOT EQUAL TO ANY OF THE VALUES IN A LIST cecccsecccesscesseecseesneesseeeessenseeenaes 301 TESTING FORA RANGE OF VALUES ees eege ee AS E E AE 302 TESTING THE ABSENCE OF A RANGE OF MAUER 302 Neste EE 302 Compound Conditional Expressions Combining Conditional Keywords csccssscessecsseccseeeeeseeeeessenseeenaes 302 Ettel tied testes dead 303 Chapter 21 Runtime Parameters aicsiccsesosnnsveccsncsssvaciesnvsdensesessersesseseneenenme Ee 307 21 1 Parameter Files vs Parameter Fields vis scisscssscesscesecelcaecsshevsventepaetteuie ence ssacdendectsanesse chevdeseeocnenedsoreeeresenteentee suena 307 Param ter Files iscicsesccstecvarscieccosadssetessssscatensthoactsversseecsuees saccessees NEESS SEENEN ege 307 Parameter Fields crer teene i EE EEEE A ETE O AE NTE EET AEAEE ER 308 212 SYS AGE RE 308 1a S C E E AE E E EEEdEEENee 308 Runtime Parameter Usage usir oiio nena a Annio ia Eege EAR EE AEA EAEAN 309 21 3 SYSsAPPLICA TION E 309 21 4 SYS APPLICATION G
232. eference date in that function defaults to the value of SYS AGE DATE SYS APPLICATION The SYS APPLICATION field is available in all generated programs and can be assigned a value representing the application name of the program An application name will be used to give a more logical name to the program than its execution name The assigned value is stored in the PPTLOG file during execution of your MetaSuite generated program SYS APPLICATION will be initialized with the program name SYS APPLICATION GROUP The SYS APPLICATION GROUP field is available in all generated programs and can be assigned a value representing the application group name of the program An application group name will be used to group all programs that are run in one execution flow You will have to assign all these programs to the same application group name to document this logical execution flow The assigned value is stored in the PPTLOG file during execution of your MetaSuite generated program You can assign a value to SYS APPLICATION GROUP either on runtime in PPTLID file or in PPTIPT file or in the MetaSuite program PPTLID The value which is set in PPTLID will be assigned automatically to the SYS APP LICATION GROUP system constant PPTIPT The assignment done in PPTIPT SYS APPLICATION GROUP will overwrite the PPTLID value when present RUNTIME PARAMETERS 310
233. ei Test Data Wizard gt Source Selection lm Select the Dictionary File and Dictionary Record Dictionary File Dictionary Record No Input Data Required The following fields are available Field Meaning Dictionary File Select a Dictionary File from the drop down list TEST DATA WIZARD 152 Field Meaning Dictionary Record Select a Dictionary Record from the drop down list No Input Data This option is only available for Standard Files Required Select this option if you want to use the Source File as a dummy file it wil be exported as a function file and write the Target a specified number of times 3 Fill out the fields as required and click Next If the Test Data Wizard is started from an existing Model and if an existing File has been selected as test file the following window is displayed Select the appropriate answer datawarehouse is already available in the list of source files Do you want to use this file as input file j Note If you answer Yes be aware of the fact that existing File Procedures might be changed The following window is displayed Test Data Wizard gt Target Selection _ Select the Dictionary File Dictionary Record and Target Type 4 The following fields are available Field Meaning Dictionary File Select a Dictionary File from the drop down list Dictionary Record Select a Dictionary Record from the drop down list
234. eld You can edit this name It may contain up to 32 characters GroupBy Type Select the required option from the drop down list The following options are available for Reports e None one line will be skipped following group processing e Page a page feed will be given after group processing e Skip a number of lines will be skipped after group processing Lines To Be This field is only available if Skip is selected as GroupBy Type Skipped Enter the number of line breaks to be inserted Target Field The Browse button next to this selection box can be used in two ways e lf the field contains the name of a Target Field clicking the Browse but ton results in displaying the properties window of this Target Field See Target Fields on page 114 e Ifyou delete the name of the Sort Field from the field first and then click the Browse button the list of Fields that can be selected as Target Fields is again displayed Work Field This field is only accessible when a Work Field is selected The Browse button next to this selection box can be used in two ways e Ifthe field contains the name of a Work Field clicking the Browse button results in displaying the properties window of this Work Field e Ifyou delete the name of the Sort Field from the field first and then click the Browse button the list of Fields that can be selected as Work Fields is again displayed Business Tab The following fields are available on the Busine
235. eld The position at which the replacement string must be yes inserted LENGTH numfield The length of the replacement string no RETURNCODE Numeric field yes The result is the position of the replaced string The result is 0 if no replacement took place For example SUB STRING1 does not completely fit in the MAIN STRING Example MAIN STRING You can insert Documentation Comments also called Doc Comments SUB STRINGI NUM1 REPLACE MAIN STRING SUB STRINGI 21 3 Result You can insert Docum ation Comments also called Doc Comments The function returns 21 This is the position at which the replacement took place REPLACE ALL The REPLACE ALL function replaces all occurrences of a substring within a string The substring concerned will be replaced by a string with an identical size Format lt numfield gt REPLACE ALL MAIN STRING SUBSTRING 1 Literal 1 SUB STRING2 literal 2 LENGTH numfield START POSITION numfield II IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 251 Elements Description Element Description Required MAIN STRING The name of the alphanumeric field Target Source or yes Work Field that contains the string in which the replacement will occur SUB STRING1 literal 1 The substring or literal that needs to be replaced yes SUB STRING2 literal 2 The replacement substring or litteral yes LENGTH numfield The l
236. eld contains a value within its limits Usage IF Field name SYS STATUS EQ SYS OUT OF LIMIT STRUCTURED EDITOR 272 Example Suppose the department within the EMPLOYEE MASTER file should have a value between 1 and 4 If you want to check whether the department in the EMPLOYEE MASTER file contains a department number within its limits you can add following logic in your program CASE department SYS STATUS EQ SYS NOT NUMERIC EQ SYS OUT OF LIMIT Runtime setting To prevent the Source Fields to be excluded during initial processing from the normal program logic you must set the runtime setting SYS LIMITS CHECK Additionally when the field is a numeric field you must set the runtime setting SYS NUMERIC CHECK to prevent the invalid numeric Source Fields to be excluded during initial processing from the normal program logic Example SYS NUMERIC CHECK IGNORE SYS LIMITS CHECK IGNORE SYS OUT OF RANGE The SYS OUT OF RANGE Source Field status will be set when the Source Field defines the number of occurrences for an OCCURS DEPENDING ON Source Field and the value of the Source Field is bigger than the maximum number of occurs for the OCCURS DEPENDING ON field You must additionally first check whether the value in the Source Field is indeed numeric through SYS NOT NUMERIC before checking whether the field contains a value within its range Usage I
237. encountered is to print an error message and bypass the processing of the record containing the invalid date Format SYS DATE CHECK number gt OFF gt IGNORE Use the number option to specify a number of invalid date values to be trapped Trapped values are listed in the error listing and excluded from the run Once the indicated number of errors has occurred the system will convert any subsequent invalid dates to zero and accept those fields as valid data De continue processing Use the OFF option to specify that although the system will perform error checking it will print an error message only for the first error it encounters not for any subsequent errors The system will bypass processing of the record containing the invalid data Use the IGNORE option instead of a number of errors to be trapped if you want the system to convert all invalid dates to zero and accept them as valid data It will return a count of such errors RUNTIME PARAMETERS 312 21 8 SYS DB CONNECT 21 9 This runtime parameter is applicable for some types of database for instance for Informix Oracle and SQLServer In order to connect the generated program to some database types a connection string is required That connection string can be provided by means of this runtime parameter Sample Oracle users should supply the following runtime variables in the PPTIPT file to connect to a specific database SYS DB CONNECT
238. enerated programs for all its Source Records and Source Fields It will be used to get the raw contents of a record or a field without numeric validation conversions The result of the SYS RAW will be a character value Format SourceField name SourceRecord name SYS RAW SourceField name SourceField name can be any Source Field but will mainly be used to find the non numeric contents of a numeric field or to get the contents of an invalid date Example When your Source File EMPLOYEE MASTER contains invalid EMPLOYEE NUMBER and you want to output the invalid values you can use SYS RAW IF EMPLOYEE NUMBER SYS STATUS EQ SYS NOT NUMERIC W INVALID EMPLOYEE EMPLOYEE NUMBER SYS RAW SourceRecord name SourceRecord name can be any Source Record The full contents of the Source Record will be taken as is Example When your Source File EMPLOYEE MASTER contains too much invalid data and you want to output the invalid rows you can use SYS RAW IF W ERRORS GT 0 TO1 ERROR ROW EMPLOY 7 E DATA SYS RAW Remarks SYS RAW can not be checked on occurring Source Fields It is advised not to use the SYS RAW in a concatenation since a concatenation will apply an Edit mask to the field as well which could produce unexpected results SYS REVERSE The Field name SYS REVERSE is automatically defined in each generated program for character fiel
239. ength of both the replacement string and the string no that will be replaced The length of both strings must be identical Note If the value of LENGTH is not given the default value will be the value of the function LENGTH applied to SUB STRING 1 START POSITION numfield The position at which the REPLACE ALL should start If the no position is not specified or set to 0 or a negative value the position will be set to 1 Note All strings are 1 byte encoded or National length and position are 1 byte encoded and the result will be 1 byte encoded or National Example MAIN STRING You can insert Documentation Comments also called Doc Comments SUB STRING 1 Doc SUB STRING2 Cod NUM1 REPLACE ALL MAIN STRING SUB STRING1 SUB STRING2 3 4 Result MAIN STRING will be changed Doc will be replaced by Cod both literals of size 3 The change will start from position 4 to the end of MAIN STRING NUM1 is irrelative of no importance MAIN STRING becomes You can insert Codumentation Comments also called Cod Comments SUBSTRING SUBSTRING is a function that can be applied on a string The result of the SUBSTRING function is a part of the string on which the SUBSTRING function is applied The result of the SUBSTRING function is also a string Thus within the system SUBSTRING may be used only to create values to be assigned to non numeric fields in assignment commands STRUCTURED EDI
240. epending on the statistics requested up to six numeric work fields are identified in the command These fields will contain the calculated statistics Only a single COMPUTE command may be coded in an Initial Sort The calculated values of the statistical work fields will be set following the completion of the initial processing for that Source File and may be accessed in any subsequent procedure This includes any subsequent Initial Sort any Source File input or end of file procedures and Report or Target File procedures of any type When used in a Source File input procedure only a single COMPUTE command may be coded The values of the statistical work fields are not set until that Source File reaches the end of file Consequently these values cannot be accessed within that Source File s initial or input procedures but may be accessed in that Source File s end of file procedure Additionally these values cannot be accessed in any Report or Target File initial or detail procedure but may be accessed in any Report or Target File end of file or end of job procedure If a Report or Target File is sorted the values of the statistical work fields may be accessed in the group procedure for that Report or TargetFile however if the report Target File is unsorted the values cannot be referenced in a group procedure Format COMPUTE field name count work field COUNT value work field VALUE std work field STD DEV min work field
241. er than the known rate The advantage of discovery attributes sampling is that a much smaller sample size is obtained than when using acceptance attributes sampling Variables The variables method is used when you are concerned with the materiality i e gross amount of error in the population rather than just the rate of errors IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 TEST DATA WIZARD 154 7 Depending on the sampling method you selected different fields will be available Fill out the fields as required and click Next 7 1 Percentage EE E Test Data Wizard gt Sampling Method gt Parameters E Select sampling options for the method Percentage The following fields are available Field Meaning Percentage The approximate percentage of records to be included in the sample You can also enter the name of a non subscripted Work Field containing a value in the inclusive range 0 00001 99 99999 Random Base Number A one to eight digit integer or integer Work Field to be used as a seed by the random number generator This seed is not itself the first random number used but it is the starting point for the calculation used to generate the first random number If this specification is omitted a random number seed will be generated from the computer s clock The advantage of specifying a Random Base Number is that you can duplicate a sample by later entering the same value fo
242. erations unique to your site One or more fields from the generated program can be made available passed to the external subroutine and these fields may be modified by the subroutine Format INVOKE Subroutine name Language Field name SourceRecord name Elements Description Element Description Required Subroutine name Subroutine name identifies the external subroutine to be Yes executed STRUCTURED EDITOR 228 Element Description Required Language You can enter the language in which the external subroutine is No written when it is not written in COBOL Subroutine name Language should be enclosed by single quotes The entire literal is limited to 40 characters Field name Field name identifies a field to be passed to the external No subroutine You can include up to 16 field names with this command The named fields will be made available to the subroutine for processing You should not name numeric Source Fields in the field name list because in the process of validating a numeric input field the system may convert that field to a different internal data type and size than was originally defined for it When you need to pass the value of a numeric input field to an external subroutine you should define a Work Field with the internal data type and size expected by the subroutine move the input field to the Work Field and then name the Work Field in the field name list SourceRecord name S
243. erii ei eeeSggte eenzege e EEEE E SAE ia edad a aS 147 le 147 Chapter 12 Public Procedures ei sicaicsiccsessiaesscisnuccasnsoadonsiinedonnecendemmenmandcinmaweatens 148 121 cl ot EE 148 E technical ta E 149 N I 149 Commands WOKS DP ACO ssscces hess levi ctuss Addendssvetesiaves EEE E OE AA REEE OENE E EERE 149 123 Business KE E 150 B si ess le geeenkesgiees enee eer EEE ENEE I E EEA E EE EEA EEES 150 TABLE OF CONTENTS v Chapter 13 Test Data Wizard icc seacctccancsnctcrenstcdernceententaccentanenceva tanavanratantenns 151 Chapter 14 Transformation Programs ssssssssssceeecceecceeceeeessessesceeeeees 163 14 1 Generating a Transformation Program cscesccssesssessecsseesseeseesecaeeeseceeeesaesseesaecaeceseceseesaeeaeesecerecsaeenecnaeeatenaeeas 163 14 2 Finding Error Messages vsssvscssscsssseten Gavin taetbeaiasasdeasiaasteeeeaia EEE N EE Ea 165 14 3 Executing a Transformation Program 166 14 4 Programming Runtime Messages sciccessicscssoesserssvseesvosnssessnstadesenssinateseeuuonleesosvudeassosedtecnsdseetecnattosutsatsenevenets 168 Runtime Parameter Messages cccsccssssccsssssenccssssassecesssanensesssaansseessadanscccassanenseadassnedccdssennnecdasssnseccdasssenseassssenseas 168 RUNTIME Error Messages sssini erreian eenei En RE EEEE cused snsneases tinned REEERE EES 168 Source File End 0f Job Messages eege eege trine aier eE AEEA AEE OAOE AAEE EERE nE Aee EEEa RAEE S AEE 170 Target File or Report En
244. ermines when the processing will be stopped STRUCTURED EDITOR 222 If HALT TARGETFILE is in this type of Action Taken procedure INITIAL No Target File output will be produced INPUT or EOF No further detail lines will be produced but totals will be generated for any detail lines printed already GROUP Total processing will stop and no further totals will be produced EOJ No action Specification Language Format HALT TARGETFILE TargetFile number MetaMap Format HALT TARGETFILE TargetFile name Elements Description Element Description Required TargetFilename The name of one or more Target Files for which processing is being No halted It must specify a Target File for which a TARGETFILE command has been coded If TargetFile name is omitted from the command within a Target File procedure it defaults to the Target File in whose procedure the command is contained Example The HALT TARGETFILE command is useful in a program request that optionally produces several Target File Assume that the fourth file in a program request is an optional TargetFile that is it is produced only upon request at execution time A Work Field named WRITE SUMMARY defined as a CHARACTER field with an initial value of N has been defined to control production of the Target File The following initial procedure will suppress the production of the transfer unless the value of WRITE SUMMARY has been changed
245. es tolerable error per item in the population It is a number or non subscripted integer Work Field IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 240 Element Description Required total amount Enter total value of the amount field in the population being sampled Yes field value It must be the exact total amount of the specified amount field and can most easily be obtained using the VALUE option of the COMPUTE command in a Source File initial procedure population Enter the exact count of records contained in the population from Yes count which the sample will be drawn It is an integer or a non subscripted integer Work Field standard The STD DEV option is used to specify the standard deviation of the Yes deviation amount field being sampled This statistic is necessary for the computation of the variables sample size The larger the standard deviation of the amount field the larger the sample size If your population contains a large standard deviation you will find that the variables sampling algorithm requires that nearly all or in some cases all of your input records be included in the sample When this occurs you should consider stratifying the population of amount fields and drawing separate variables samples from each stratum Using this approach the total number of records selected will be reduced mainly because the standard deviation within each stratum will be reduc
246. es above this line executes the MetaSuite Program E TRANSFORMATION PROGRAMS 168 del ExecName t01 del Once the MetaSuite Program has been executed the temporary ExecName t02 sort files are deleted echo errorlevel This line causes the Program Error Level to be displayed Perform the required changes to the Run Script Rename the run script so that it can be executed on the applicable platform For execution on a Windows platform replace the mrl extension by bat For execution on a UNIX platform replace the mrl extension by sh e For execution on a z OS platform the file must be placed in a PDS of type CNTL For execution on another platform remove the extension Note This step can be avoided if the MRL dictionary tables are adequately customized Run the renamed run script The Target Files and Reports are generated in the directory where the run script and program are located Load the flat files into the database Use the load scripts generated by MetaStore for this purpose Refer to the section Collecting Target Files in the MetaStore Manager Guide 14 4 Programming Runtime Messages The results of each generated program include a Runtime Messages report PPTLST This report includes Runtime parameter messages Runtime error messages Source File end of job statistics messages Report end of job statistics messages Target File end of job statistics messages Runtime Parameter Messa
247. es of the specified range For that reason the increment if specified can be positive or negative If the start value is less than or equal to the end value the increment value should be positive otherwise the procedure will not be executed If the start value is greater than or equal to the end value the increment value should be negative otherwise the procedure will not be executed Examples DO CALC TOT FOR QUARTER 4 TO 1 BY 1 will be executed correctly DO CALC TOT FOR MONTH LAST MONTH TO FIRST MONTH will result in no executions of the CALC TOT procedure assuming that the value of LAST MONTH is greater than the value of FIRST MONTH Note The DO WHILE command is more appropriate than the DO FOR command for certain types of iterative processes DO WHILE The DO WHILE command is used to conditionally execute a public procedure repeatedly for as long as the specified condition is true A public procedure is simply a set of one or more procedural commands If the condition is not true or when the condition is no longer true the next command following the DO WHILE command will be executed Use of the DO WHILE command with public procedures eliminates the need to write the same sequence of commands over and over Public procedures can be executed repeatedly under a specified condition using the DO WHILE command a specified number of times using th
248. es window is displayed 03 ADAB JOB TITLE CODE x SampleModel 503 ADAB EMPLOYEE CLUSTER 503 ADAB EMPLOYEE DATA 503 ADAB JOB CODE S03 ADAB JOB TITLE CO Technical Source Field Properties Name ADAB JOB TITLE CODE Dictionary Field ADAB JOB TITLE CODE ADAB JOB CODE ADAB EMF el 5 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections Fields page 59 6 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Sub Source Field and its symbol E are displayed in the Tree View window 7 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Fields The following fields are available e Name page 78 e Dictionary Field page 78 Name This field is updated automatically with the name of the Source Field you selected when adding the Source Field If required you can change the name in this field This name in this field will be displayed in the Tree View window It can contain up to 32 characters and must be unique within the Record Dictionary Field This read only fields displays the name of the Dictionary Field You can click the Browse button next to it to display its properties DATA SOURCES 79 8 13 Array Procedures Array Procedures are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to an External Array Apart from an Array Procedure it is also
249. essing of customer numbers beginning with the digit 2 the following record input procedure would be coded BEGIN RECORD CUSTOMER INPUT IF CUST NUMBER IR 200000 TO 299999 EXCLUDE Using this input procedure the report would contain only the information shown above in paths 1 2 3 and 9 The CUSTOMER record would be read for paths 4 and 7 but would be excluded before any invoice records were read Following the exclusion of a CUSTOMER record the generated program will simply read input records bypassing the data validation and path construction processes until the next CUSTOMER record is obtained STRUCTURED EDITOR 212 Excluding at Record Level Optional applicable only in Initial Sort Source File input or record input procedures The record name option is used when a path of records is being accessed to limit the paths built for the named record based on data in another record that is subordinate to the named record Record name must be the name of a record specified on the PATH option of the SOURCEF ILE command When the EXCLUDE falls within a record input procedure record name must be at the same level in the path or higher than the record named by the BEGIN RECORD command When an EXCLUDE command with the record name option is executed the generated program will skip occurrences of any other record types until the next occurrence of the named exclude
250. essing specific to a given group Note that when the grand total group is processed this field will contain the value GRAND TOTAL SYS GROUP can be used as an alternative to the SYS GROUP LEVEL field to determine what action should occur at each group process Example To print total line format 1 for the grand totals and total line format 2 for all other groups you would use the following command IF SYS GROUP EQ GRAND TOTAL PUT 1 ELSE PUT 2 SYS GROUP COUNT The SYS GROUP COUNT field is defined automatically in all generated programs and may be referenced in report or Target File total procedures It contains a count of the detail formats produced in the current group and is useful for calculating averages Example Assuming that ANNUAL SALARY is a field named on a detail line in a report and only one detail format is produced for each input record the following command from the report s total procedure calculates an average of the salaries printed for the current group AVG SALARY ANNUAL SALARY SYS GROUP COUNT SYS GROUP LEVEL The SYS GROUP LEVEL field is defined automatically in all generated programs and may be referenced in report or Target File total procedures It contains a relative group level number where 1 is the lowest level GroupBy field and the highest numbered GroupBy field is for the grand totals SYS GROUP LEVEL can be used as an alternative to the SYS GROUP field to determine what actio
251. esults of the operation to insure that valid data has been obtained Usage IF SourceFile name SYS IO STATUS EQ SYS OK Example The following code prevents the printing of invalid values in the EMPLOYEE NUMBER and EMPLOYEE NAME fields of the EMPLOYEE MASTER Source File when a random access to that Source File fails GET EMPLOYEE MASTER KEY SELECTED EMPLOYEE IF EMPLOYEE MASTER SYS IO STATUS NE SYS OK EMPLOYEE NUMBER 0 EMPLOYEE NAME NOT ON SOURCEFILE If the GET operation fails to locate a record on the EMPLOYEE MASTER Source File with the KeyField value specified in the SELECTED EMPLOYEE field the EMPLOYEE MASTER SYS IO STATUS field will not be equal to SYS OK In this case the EMPLOYEE NUMBER field will be set to zero and the EMPLOYEE NAME field will be set to NOT ON SOURCEFILE Note that when a GET operation fails the fields for that Source File will contain values from the last record successfully retrieved or if no records have been retrieved unpredictable data SYS OUT OF LIMIT The SYS OUT OF LIMIT Source Field status will be set when the Source Field that has limits defined in the MetaStore does not have a value within the defined limits When the Source Field is a numeric field you must first check whether the value in the Source Field is indeed numeric through SYS NOT NUMERIC before checking whether the fi
252. etrieve the group of related records described by the PATH option for that Source File STRUCTURED EDITOR 218 Element Description Required KeyField value The KEY option is coded to indicate that Required for Table Tree Source Files the records of the Source File are to be Optional for Controlled Source Files accessed according to a specified Not allowed for VSAM Sequential fields KeyField value This value must be of the with no Key option same data type as the KeyField defined for the SourdeFile being accessed RANDOM The field will be accessed randomly Required Coding for the GET Command Element Description SYS DIRECT KEY When the GET command is used for an external array you can use the SourceFile name SYS DIRECT KEY field to determine the index to access the wanted occurrence within the Table Tree Source File This field contains the value 0 when no occurrence is found for the wanted key value It contains the index value when the occurrence is found for the wanted key value When the GET command is used for an external array without key you need to assign the proper start value to the SourceFile name SYS DIRECT KEY field prior to the GET command See Example 4 SYS DIRECT KEY on page 219 SYS CURRENT KEY When the GET command is used on an external array the returned value is not only obtainable by means of the expression SourceFile name SYS DIRECT KEY The return value can also be obtained by means
253. ext The Path definition window appears Note This window is only available for multi record files and database files Add Source gt Specify the entry level record in the path Name Entry Record we amp Distinct Cached oe IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 DATA SOURCES 97 The following fields are available Field Meaning Name This field is automatically updated with the Record Name you select from the Entry Record drop down list Entry Record Select the required Record from the drop down list Distinct This checkbox applies for SOL Source files Select this checkbox if you want to use the SELECT DISTINCT SQL statement instead of the normal SELECT statement Per key only one record will be selected In other words all selected rows will have a unique key duplicates will be removed Clear this checkbox if you do not want to eliminate duplicate values Where In this field you can enter a clause containing a select statement The data retrieved from the Data Source are based on this statement Input Order Field It is interesting Sort Fields if your file is not ordered in the sequence you want Via Index This field applies for multi record non SQL Source Files only The index of the entry level Record is used to define the access sequence at the top of the Path 6 Fill out the fields as required and click Finish The new External Array appears in t
254. f the SYS NUMERIC CHECK page 313 and SYS RECORD SNAP page 314 runtime parameters E NON NUMERIC DATA IN FIELD ANNUAL SALARY OF INPUT FILE enployee master Within Source Record Number 1 POSITION WITHIN RECORD 10 Date Field Validation If an invalid date field is encountered a message in the following format will be produced E DATE FORMAT INVALID IN FIELD DATE OF HIRE OF INPUT FILE enployee master Within Source Record Number VALUE AT TIME OF ERROR 999999 Note You can control the numeric validation process and the production of record dumps through use of the SYS DATE CHECK page 311 and SYS RECORD SNAP page 314 runtime parameters Limits Check Validation Ifa numeric field exceeds the limits defined for it a message in the following format will be produced E LIMIT ERROR IN FIELD DEPARTMENT OF INPUT FILE enployee master Within Source Record Number 5 VALUE AT TIME OF ERROR 8 Note You can control the numeric validation process and the production of record dumps through use of the SYS LIMITS CHECK page 313 and SYS RECORD SNAP page 314 runtime parameters TRANSFORMATION PROGRAMS 170 Source File End of Job Messages Source File EOJ messages summarize the processing of the files accessed by the program There will be one set of these messages for each Source File processed Depending on how the Source Files are processed by the program
255. f file status codes that can be returned in a FILE STATUS data item for a MicroFocus COBOL compiler at run time When the FILE STATUS code does not appear in this listing please refer to your COBOL documentation for more information on the status code Code Meaning 9001 Insufficient buffer space On OS 2 could indicate that the SWAPPATH has not been set correctly or the SWAPPATH drive is full Could also indicate an out of memory situation 9002 File not open when access tried 9003 Serial mode error 9004 Illegal file name 9005 Illegal device specification 9006 Attempt to write to a file opened for input 9007 Disk space exhausted 9008 Attempt to input from a file opened for output 9009 No room in directory also directory does not exist 9010 File name not supplied 9012 Attempt to open a file which is already open 9013 File not found 9014 Too many files open simultaneously 9015 Too many indexed files open 9016 Too many device files open 9017 Record error probably zero length IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 TRANSFORMATION PROGRAMS 172 Code Meaning 9018 Read part record error EOF before EOR or file open in wrong mode 9019 Rewrite error open mode or access mode wrong 9020 Device or resource busy 9021 File is a directory 9022 Illegal or impossible access mode for OPEN 9023 Illegal or
256. g rem Win NT 95 Runscript for This remarks rem line contains the following information ExecName 0001 e Platform type where the program will be executed in this case Windows NT or Windows 95 family e Name of the Program in this case ExecName e Version number of the run script in this case 0001 del ExecName These lines make sure that any old Target Files that might still exist are deleted before the new Target Files are generated Ke TRANSFORMATION PROGRAMS 167 set PPTIPT NUL The PPTIPT line identifies the file containing the runtime parameters for the Parameter Workfields page 137 in the Model This file is manually created using a text editor Its name typically refers to the Model Execution Name for instance ExecName ini for NT platforms It may be located in any directory If it is located in another directory than the run script MRL the path must be included on this line The values must be defined before the Model is actually executed In the following example the ExecName ini defines the runtime values for two Parameter Workfields StartDate and ReportLines P ExecName ini Notepad LI File Edit Format View Help StartDate 20 05 2006 ReportLines 44 If no runtime parameters need to be defined the PPTIPT parameter must be set to the default value NUL set PPTFO1 SourceMDL1 set The PPTF lines contain the Dictionary File names that have PPTFO2 SourceMDL2 been defined as sources in the M
257. ges When you code runtime parameters for each parameter both new and changed initial values are shown In the following example the SYS READ LIMIT and SELECTED DEPARTMENT receive a new initial value Value SYS READ LIMIT 100 Replacing 0999999999 Value SELECTED DEPARTMENT 4 Replacing 0 Runtime Error Messages A data validation error message is produced for each error discovered in a numeric date or limits checked field You will get one message for each invalid field referenced in your program TRANSFORMATION PROGRAMS 169 If a data validation error occurs the error message will describe the location and contents of the erroneous data field and the record containing the invalid data will be excluded from the report Note that this exclusion occurs before any processing and therefore cannot be affected by procedural code You may disable all data validation entirely at run time however you should do this only if you are certain that all referenced data is valid The validation types are described in the following sections Numeric Validation If a numeric exception is encountered a dump of the record will be printed after the validation process has been completed for all fields in the record For example the following message was produced when the system detected an invalid value in ANNUAL SALARY Note You can control the numeric validation process and the production of record dumps through use o
258. get Field It will determine the length in number of characters after having trimmed all spaces low values and non displayable characters from the right Format Field name SYS LENGTH R Field name Field name can be a character or a numeric field SYS LENGTHLR is implemented as the LENGTH function within COBOL Remarks SYS LENGTH R can not be used on occurring fields STRUCTURED EDITOR 293 Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher SYS LOG The Field name SYS LOG is automatically defined in each generated program for numeric fields either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will determine for you the logarithm to the base e of the numeric field value Format Field name SYS LOG Field name Field name must be a numeric field SYS LOG is implemented as the LOG function within COBOL Remarks SYS LOG can not be used on occurring fields Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher SYS LOG10 The Field nameSYS LOG10 is automatically defined in each generated program for numeric fields either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will determine for you the logarithm to the base 10 of the numeric field value Format Field name SYS LOG10 Field name Field name must be a numeric field SYS LOG10 is implemented as the LOG10 function within COBOL STRUCTURED EDITOR 294 Remarks SYS LOG10 can
259. h the RESTARTABLE execution mode For more information on the EXEC mode refer to the Generator Manager User Guide This variable is valid at runtime It contains nothing spaces if the execution mode is non restartable If a program is generated restartable then the program remembers which records it has already read from the database If the previous run has ended correctly then the next start will be a COLD start If the previous run failed due to a system crash or something else the next start will be a WARM start This state can be tested by the system variable SYS RESTART which can contain COLD or WARM Example IF SYS RESTART WARM DEBUG SEVERE ERROR PREVIOUS RUN HAS FAILED DEBUG STANDARD METASUITE RESTART PROCEDURE DEBUG WILL BE HALTED HALT ALL Remarks SYS RESTART can be validated in INITIAL procedures program initial initial sort or targetfile initial The COBOL function implementation only works e on IMS databases on RDBMS type databases if special restart information is saved by a user program By example a customized version of MSRSTxxx STRUCTURED EDITOR 262 SYS RETURN CODE The SYS RETURN CODE system field is defined automatically in all generated programs Its value is passed to Program user exit status The Program user exit status will be assigned to the system return code that is passed to the oper
260. has a path defined A Source File that is CONTROLLED BY another SourceFile e An external array The record name SYS PATH COUNT fields can be used in a Source File Input procedure or on a Target File Detail procedure Format Record name SYS PATH COUNT Record name Required The record name specifies the Source Record of the Source File for which the count of records must be given On Source Files with PATH For Source Files with a path there is a record name SYS PATH COUNT field for each record named in the PATH option of the Source File command That field contains the count of records identified by record name currently in the input path Example Assume that the following SOURCEFILE command has been coded SOURCEFILE SALES PATH CLIENT ACCOUNT OCCURS 5 Within a report or Target File detail procedure the CLIENT SYS PATH COUNT field will always contain a value of 1 and the ACCOUNT SYS PATH COUNT field will always contain a value of 0 5 If the first detail line of a report contains information from the CLIENT record and the second detail line contains information from the ACCOUNT record subscripted by the field X the following sequence of commands would result in information being printed from all records currently in the path PUT 1 DO PRINT ACCOUNT FOR X EQ 1 TO ACCOUNT SYS PATH COUNT STRUCTURED EDITOR 280 BEGIN PRINT ACCOUNT PUT 2 Note that if the value of ACCOUNT SYS PATH COUNT is ze
261. he MetaStore where the new Model will be saved The MetaStore also contains the Dictionary Files describing the data sources and data targets that where defined using the MetaStore Manager Note When clicking the Browse button next to the Dictionary File name the Properties window of the MetaSuite MetaStore is displayed in read only mode Open this Properties window in the MetaStore Manager to change the settings Execution Name This field is mandatory Enter the name of the COBOL program that will be generated on the basis of the Model This name must be unique and may contain up to 8 characters Exported By When the Model is generated this field will automatically be updated with the name of the user who performed this action Exported At When the Model is generated this field will automatically be updated with the timestamp when this action was performed Exported To When the Model is generated this field will automatically be updated with the path and filename of the export file extension ml MetaSuite Export Language The ml file describes the MetaMap in a readable format Saved To When the Model is saved to the MetaStore this field will automatically be updated with the path and filename of the Model file extension msm MetaSuite Model Business Rule In this field you can enter a text describing the purpose of the Model Note If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select
262. he Tree View window Adding a Parameter File 1 Open an existing Model or create a new Model 2 Select the Source Wizard icon En from the Wizard Toolbar The following window is displayed Add Source gt Select a Dictionary File and one or more Source Record s New Source File Dictionary Records Source Type Source File X Organization Any X Dictionary File AA E Show History IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 The following fields are available Field Meaning This field will be updated automatically with the name of the Dictionary File after having selected the Dictionary File and the required Record s The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree View window Note If needed you can modify the name later on Name DATA SouRCES 98 Prefix In this field you can enter a prefix for this Source File You might for instance define the prefixes OLD and NEW if you are working with different versions of the same file A Prefix has a fixed length of 4 characters including the dash Source Type Select Parameter File from the drop down list Organization As only Standard Files can be defined as Parameter Files the drop down list becomes inactive and displays the Standard option as soon as you select Parameter File as Source type Dictionary Files Select the required Dictionary File from the drop down list Once you have selecte
263. he Tree View window 7 Save your changes by doing one of the following Click the Save Active Model kd button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model 8 4 DATA SOURCES 59 Fields The following fields are available e Name page 59 Dictionary Field page 59 Name This field is updated automatically with the name of the Source Field you selected when adding the Source Field If required you can change the name in this field This name will be displayed in the Tree View window It can contain up to 32 characters and must be unique within the Record Dictionary Field This read only field displays the name of the Dictionary Field You can click the Browse button next to it to display its properties Sub Source Fields Sub Source Fields are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Source Field Note This option is only available if not all Sub Source Fields have been added Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Source File Record and Field are displayed 3 Right click the Source Field name and select Add gt Sub Source Field 4 Select the file description you want to add and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will b
264. he field you can click the Browse button to redisplay the list of Fields that can be selected as Source Field Note The Name field will not be updated automatically Business Tab The following fields are available on the Business tab e Business Rule page 74 Note page 74 Business Rule In this field you can enter a description of the External Array If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter additional information pertaining to the External Array If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGE DATA SOURCES 75 8 10 Source Records for an External Array Source Records are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to an External Array Apart from Source Records it is also possible to assign an Array Procedures page 79 and Path for an External Array page 81 Note This option is only available if not all Source Records have been added When adding a Source Record all Source Fields and Sub Source Fields will be added automatically Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required External Array is displayed 3 Right click the External Array and select Add gt Source Record 4 Select
265. he second subfield will follow the standard rule Sub Work Field Context Menu If you right click a Subfield name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed Modes fee SampleModel_ann msm 35 CC SampleModel 41 8 Source File Add Sub Work Field Create a Copy Find Ctrl F Find Net F3 Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All Properties Remove Del Option Meaning New Select this option to add a new Subfield to the Work Field See Subfields on page 142 Add gt Sub Work Field Select this option to add an existing Subfield within a Subfield Create a Copy Select this option to create a copy of the Model Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Ge this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 5 8 5 9 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 43 Option Meaning Properties Select this option to display the Subfield s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Subfields on page 142 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove the se
266. heckbox applies for SQL Source files Select this checkbox if you want to use the SELECT DISTINCT SQL statement instead of the normal SELECT statement Per key only one record will be selected In other words all selected rows will have a unique key duplicates will be removed Clear this checkbox if you do not want to eliminate duplicate values DATA SOURCES 83 Entry Record Select the Record to be added to the path Where In this field you can enter a clause containing a select statement The data retrieved from the Data Source are based on this statement Input Order Fields This field applies for SQL Data Sources The Records that belong to the same Path Level will be ordered by this Key 8 15 Parameter Files Data Sources that are defined as Parameter Files will be stored in a memory buffer of the generated program A Parameter File is similar to an External Array but it contains only one row Its content is read at the start of the Model Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Right click the Model name and select Add gt Source gt Parameter File 3 Select the file description you want to add and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Se ect Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath Indentation When selecting thi
267. his File Dictionary Record This read only field displays the name of the Record You can click the Browse button next to it to display its properties 8 11 Source Fields for an External Array Source Fields are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Source Record for an External Array Note This option is only available if not all Source Fields have been added When adding a Source Field all Sub Source Fields will be added automatically Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required External Array and Source Record are displayed 3 Right click the Source Record and select Add gt Source Field The Source Field Properties window is displayed DATACOM SALARIES 1 DC RECORD SALARIES 1 DC EMPLOYEE BONUS Exercise 0 DATACOM SALARIES DC RECORD SALARIES DC EMPLOYEE BONUS Source Field Technical Source Field Properties Name Dictionary Field DC EMPLOYEE SONUS DC RECORD SALARIES 4 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the section Fields page 77 8 12 DATA SOURCES 77 5 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Source Field and its symbol are displayed as a dependent Object of the Source Record 6 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model kd button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Fields The follo
268. ialization Procedure will be executed once at the start of the job Detail Output Pre Procedure will be executed before the Value logic defined for the Target Fields You can for instance exclude some Records before they are processed Detail Output Post Procedure will be executed after the Value logic defined for the Targets fields but before writing the Record in case of automatic writing Total Output Pre Procedure will be executed before the non Accumulate Column Logic for the target processing of the group total record You can use this type of Target Procedure if you are processing totals See explanation above This procedure will be executed before the SORT if a SORT Key has been defined DATA TARGETS 124 Option Meaning Total Output Post Procedure will be executed after the non Accumulate Column Logic for the target processing of the group total record You can use this type of Target Procedure if you are processing totals with your Target which means that e you have added GroupBy Fields page 110 up to 16 AND e you have selected the Total page 113 checkbox in the Target Record proper ties window You may also have selected the Accumulate page 116 checkbox but this is not a requirement Note This procedure will be executed after the SORT if a SORT Key has been defined End of File Procedure will be executed each time when a Source File has been processed End of Job Procedure will be execut
269. icon Gs on the Main Toolbar The following window is displayed T MetaSuite MetaMap Manager J Dictionary Selection Choose operating system and COBOL compiler AcuCorp_Unix 0s40q Fujitsu_Unix Sz Wi Fujitsu Windows Sz_z0 MicroFocus_Unix Visual Microfocus_Windows Visual r Trace Re Note If the default generator has been specified on the MetaMap Manager Settings window in the INI Manager this window is not being displayed For more information refer to the MetaSuite INI Manager User Guide The following options can be specified TRANSFORMATION PROGRAMS 164 Fields Meaning Choose operating system Select the required Generator from the selection list and COBOL compiler Trace Select this checkbox if you want to trace a certain field somewhere in your program sequence Debug Select this checkbox if you want to include code table names in the generated COBOL code mgl and run script mrl Note If you want to use the options Trace or Debug you have to select the option s BEFORE selecting the compiler The generation starts immediately Results During the Program Generation any messages are displayed in the Generate Tab Note To find the messages within the generation listing you can use the Find Generator Message buttons on the Developer Toolbar See Developer Toolbar on page 12 The generated program in COBOL code will be named after the Execu
270. ictionary Files Select the required Dictionary File from the drop down list If you selected a File Type in the Organization drop down list the Dictionary File drop down list only contains Dictionary Files of this type Once you have selected the Dictionary File its Records are displayed in the Dictionary Records selection box History Selecting this option will display all existing versions of the Dictionary Files By default this option is not selected and only the latest version of the Dictionary Files will be displayed Dictionary After having selected the required Dictionary File from the drop down list select Records one or more Records in the selection box Press and hold the Control key to make a selection of multiple non adjacent Records Press and hold the Shift key to make a selection of multiple adjacent Records IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 DATA SOURCES 95 3 Fill out the fields as required and click Next The Technical definition window appears Add Source gt Specify the technical information of this source Automatic Manual E Special Write Only Sort Fields None The following fields are available Field Meaning Occurrence Enter the maximum number of times this Source Record can occur This value must be defined because the generated Program must reserve a certain amount of space Binary Search This checkbox is only active if
271. ied employees by more than one standard deviation The following procedural code could be used to accomplish this task BEGIN SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER INITIAL COMPUTE ANNUAL SALARY AVG SAL MEAN SAL STD DEV STD DEV SORT ANNUAL SALARY DESCENDING BEGIN REPORT 1 INITIAL CUT OFF AMOUNT AVG SAL SAL STD DEV BEGIN SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER INPUT IF ANNUAL SALARY LE CUT OFF AMOUNT HALT SOURCEFILE EXCLUDE The Source File Initial Sort procedure above selects all salaried employees and calculates the mean and standard deviations for the ANNUAL SALARY field placing those values in the work fields named AVG SAL and SAL STD DEY respectively Next it sorts the data referenced for reporting from the EMPLOYEE MASTER file according to the value of the ANNUAL SALARY field in descending sequence i e largest to smallest The report initial procedure which is executed after the completion of all file initial processing sets the value of a work field named CUT OFF AMOUNT to the sum of the computed mean and the standard deviation for the ANNUAL SALARY field The input procedure which is executed against the sorted data from the EMPLOYEE MASTER file terminates the processing of the file when an ANNUAL SALARY is encountered that is less than or equal to the cut off amount Only those records with an ANNUAL SALARY greater than the mean plus one standard deviation will be passed to the report s for proce
272. ield being defined The default initial value is zero for all numeric type fields and blank s for non numeric fields For most data types the initial value can be SYS LOW VALUE or SYS HIGH VALUE This is not the case for PRN fields BIT fields and floating point fields Code Select the required code option from the drop down list The following options are available e Code Select this option to define a numeric field that is not considered to contain an amount as value but rather a numeric code No Code Select this option when there is no additional information to be added for the field which is the default Time Select this option to define a field that contains TIME information Timestamp Select this option to define a field that contains TIMESTAMP information Business Tab The following fields are available on the Business tab e Business Rule page 142 e Note page 142 Business Rule In this field you can enter a description for the Work Field If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter additional information pertaining to the Work Field If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Subfields Subfields are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Work Field You will def
273. ields page 114 Target Titles page 119 Target Headings page 119 Target End Pages page 120 Target Procedures page 121 Data Targets page 104 Program Procedures page 144 Public Procedures page 148 Work Fields page 135 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 CHAPTER 7 MetaMap Models A MetaMap Model is a set of mapping rules determining how up to 99 Data Targets Sequential Files Delimited Files or Reports are derived from up to 99 Data Sources Source Files External Arrays or Parameter Files Next to the definition of the required Sources and Targets the Model also contains the definition of the Mapping Rules and Procedures 2 Click the New Model icon L4 on the Menu Bar The properties window is displayed in the Work Area Business Rule Note Fill out the required fields Field Description Name This field is mandatory Enter the name of the new Model The Model name must be unique and may contain up to 32 characters Version The default setting of this field is 1 but you can enter a higher version number if required You can define multiple programs with the same name and a different version number You might want to do this for instance to ensure that programs match maps of the same version MeTAMAP MODELS 48 Field Description Dictionary This read only field displays the name of t
274. ify the default folder using the INI Manager refer to the INI Manager User Guide for more information The following message is displayed in the Output Window Source code control Connect to project was successful 19 2 Terminating the Connection Between MetaMap and the Source Control System If you do not want to work with Source Control any longer you can terminate the connection 1 Select Source Control gt Disconnect from Source Control Results The following message is displayed in the Message window Source code control Disconnect was successful a1 Mendopzon Ban E Bt The special MetaMap icons and are replaced by the standard MetaMap Model icon Note When you make changes to MetaMap Models while the connection to Source Control is inactive these changes will NOT be taken into account by the Source Control database As a result a discrepancy will occur between the MetaMap and the Source Control database VERSION MANAGEMENT WITH SOURCE CONTROL 183 19 3 Adding MetaMap Models to Source Control The purpose of adding MetaMap Models to Source Control is to save multiple versions of these files and to be able to retrieve each of these versions 1 Create or open the MetaMap Model you want to add to Source Control Note You can verify if a Model has already been added to Source Control by selecting Show Status from the Source Control menu See Showing the Source Control Status of Opened Sour
275. ile Report or Target File procedure from which the public procedure is invoked Procedure Meaning Initial File The EXCLUDE command can be included in an Initial File Procedure that reads input Procedure records using an EXTRACT SORT or PRE PASS command Used in this type of Procedure the EXCLUDE command has then the following effects e the current input record is rejected e the current procedure is exited which means that no further commands will be exe cuted for the current record e the generated program will try to read the next input record If the SORT or EXTRACT command is coded in this type of procedure any excluded records will not be available for processing in any other procedure If the PRE PASS command is coded excluded records will again be available for processing during the input processing phase of the generated program IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 209 Procedure Meaning Record Used in this type of Procedure the EXCLUDE command has the following effects Procedure e the current input record is rejected e the current procedure is exited meaning that no further commands will be executed for the current record e the generated program will try to read the next record of the type specified in the EXCLUDE command Records excluded in a Record Procedure are not available for processing in subsequent procedures except when a Record Procedure excludes a record during
276. ill not be mapped 3 Select the Source File Record you want to map 4 Select the Target Record you want to map this Source File Record with ModelForMappingWizard Mapping Wizard Select Source and Target Record Source Record Source File S01 EMPLOYEE DATA 01 SourceFile1 T01 PP_employee S03 EMPLOYEE DATA 03 SourceFile3 T01 Targetfile 1 S02 EMPLOYEE DATA 02 SourceFile2 T02 EMPLOYEE DATA T02 Targetfile 2 5 Click Next A screen similar to this one is displayed DATA TARGETS 132 S01 EMPLOYEE DATA T01 P e ModelForMappingWizard msm H ModelForMappingWizard msm E b ModelForMappingWizard E b ModelForMappingWizard 4 S01 SourceFile1 S E T01 Targetfle 1 Ch S01 EMPLOYEE DATA Cum T01 PP_employee Li S01 MPLOYEE NUMBER i gt SO1 DEPARTMENT i gt SO1 PAY CODE i gt 01 JOB TITLE CODE gt 01 DATE OF HIRE gt SO1 ANNUAL SALARY i gt SO1 PAY RATE ip 01 EMPLOYEE NAME S01 STREET ADDRESS L SO1 CITY ADDRESS i gt SO1 STATE CODE i gt 01 ZIP CODE i gt 01 SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER Li SO 1 SECURITY CLEARANCE CODE S E 01 VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS gt SO1 VOL TYPE E 01 VOL CODE i E S01 VOL AMOUNT EP WorkField1 ET WorkField2 LS TO 1 EMPLOYEE NUMBER i gt E TO1 DEPARTMENT Lei T01 PAY CODE Lui T01 JOB TITLE CODE 118 T01 DATE OF HIRE Lal TO1 ANNUAL SALARY gt E TO1 PAY RATE il TO1 EMPLOYEE NAME Luigi T01 STREET ADDRESS gt E T01 CIT
277. impossible access mode for CLOSE 9024 Disk I O error 9025 Operating system data error 9026 Block LO error 9027 Device not available 9028 No space on device 9029 Attempt to delete open file 9030 File system is read only 9031 Not owner of file 9032 Too many indexed files This error can also happen when a sequential file is open for input and an attempt is made to open the same file for output 9033 Physical LO error 9034 Incorrect mode or file descriptor 9035 Attempt to access a file with incorrect permission 9036 File already exists 9037 File access denied 9038 Disk not compatible 9039 File not compatible 9040 Language initialization not set up correctly 9041 Corrupt index file 9042 Attempt to write on broken pipe 9043 File information missing for indexed file 9045 Attempt to open an NLS file using an incompatible program 9047 Indexed structure overflow Could indicate that you have reached the maximum number of duplicate keys 9065 File locked 9066 Attempt to add duplicate record key to indexed file 9067 Indexed file not open 9068 Record locked 9069 Illegal argument to ISAM module IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 TRANSFORMATION PROGRAMS 173 Code Meaning 9070 Too many indexed files open 9071 Bad i
278. ind the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Target Field s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Target Fields on page 114 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove the selected Target Field IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 37 Option Meaning Remove Field Mapping Select this option to remove the Field Mapping Target Title Heading and End Page Context Menu Note These options are only relevant for Report Files Ifyou right click a Target Title Heading or End Page name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed Find Next Find Previous Expand All Properties Remove Option Meaning Create a Copy Select this option to create a copy of the Model Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occ
279. ine a Subfield for a Work Field if you want to scan a specific part of a Work Field The Subfield will automatically get the contents of the position it refers to WorK FIELDS 143 Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Work Field is displayed 3 Right click the Work Field name and select Add gt Sub Work Field The Work Field Properties window is displayed 4 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the section Work Fields page 135 5 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Sub Work Field and its symbol Zp are displayed in the Tree View window 6 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model CHAPTER 11 Program Procedures Program Procedures are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned directly to a Model Apart from Program Procedures it is also possible to assign Data Sources page 49 Data Targets page 104 Public Procedures page 148 and Work Fields page 135 to a Model You will define a Program Procedure for a Model if you want to define logic to be executed before or after the mapping logic File Record and Target Procedures Target Field Value definitions There are three types of Program Procedures depending on the time of execution You can define one Program Procedure of each type for a spe
280. ision the larger the sample size will be STRUCTURED EDITOR 237 Element Description Required occurrence rate Enter the expected occurrence rate of errors in the population Yes expressed as a percentage It is a number or a non subscripted Work Field having a value in the range of 0 00001 to 99 99999 population Enter the exact count of records contained in the population from Yes count which the sample will be drawn It is an integer or a non subscripted integer Work Field random number See general description above No seed How it works The first time the SAMPLE command is executed the sample size SS is calculated as follows SS R 1 R P T 2 R 1 R N SS is rounded up to the next integer value The remaining terms used in the calculation are R the expected occurrence rate of errors e P the precision of the sample e T the statistical t value derived from the specified confidence level e N the population count Once the acceptance sample size has been calculated the selection process is exactly the same as the fixed size sample selection process described earlier SAMPLE with confidence level and maximum error rate This format of the SAMPLE command is used when you are confident that you know the occurrence rate of errors in the population from previous attributes sampling experience and want to verify that the current occurrence rate is no greater than the known rate The
281. its settings See Array Procedures on page 79 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove this External Array Procedure IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 30 Parameter File Context Menu If you right click a Parameter File name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed D SampleModel H Source File r S02 datawarehouse1 t datawarehouse 1 ij 01 External Array KH zu TO1 Targ 8 D Program Source Wizard ED Public Pr Close Model 7 Work Fielg E Add gt Source Record Create a Copy Up Down Find Ctrl F Find Net F3 Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All Output Properties S Description Remove Logged on succe Option Meaning New Select this option to add a Parameter File to the Model See Parameter Files on page 83 Source Wizard Select this option to start the Source Wizard The Source Wizard can assist you in selecting your data sources See Source Wizard on page 90 Add gt Source Select this option to add a Source Record to the Parameter File See Source Records Record for a Parameter File on page 85 There can only be one Source Record for a Parameter File Create a Copy Select this option to create a copy of the Model Up The Up and Down
282. ix but you cannot delete it Target Type Select the required Target Type from the drop down list The following options are available Delimited Sequential Abacus BRS Report XML Controlled Sequential HTML SQL User defined Parameter File Line Sequential Record Sequential Select the required Target Type Select User defined if you want to take into account the code control table defined in the file properties Organization If you select a File Type from the drop down list you will only be able to select Dictionary Files of this type from the Dictionary File drop down list below If you leave the default setting Any you will be able to select any Dictionary File Dictionary File Select the required Dictionary File from the drop down list If you selected a File Type in the Organization drop down list the Dictionary File drop down list only contains Dictionary Files of this type Once you have selected the Dictionary File its Records are displayed in the Dictionary Records selection box Show history Selecting this option will display all existing versions of the Dictionary Files By default this option is not selected and only the latest version of the Dictionary Files will be displayed Dictionary Records After having selected the required Dictionary File from the drop down list select one or more Records in the selection box Press and hold the Control key to make a selectio
283. izard on page 99 Business Tab The following fields are available on the Business tab e Business Rule page 56 Note page 56 Business Rule In this field you can enter a description of the Source File If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter additional information pertaining to the Source File If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Source Records Source Records are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Source File Apart from Source Records it is also possible to assign a Path page 67 and File Procedures page 63 Note This option is only available if not all Source Records have been added When adding a Source Record all Source Fields and Sub Source Fields will be added automatically Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Source File is displayed 3 Right click the Source File name and select Add gt Source Record 4 Select the file description you want to add and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be di
284. k the Browse button in order to display the Properties window of the displayed Source File Match Field This selection box lists the Fields belonging to this Source File for which Matches have been defined Note Before renaming or removing a file first remove the match chains residing on this file IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 CHAPTER 9 9 1 Data Targets Data Targets are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned directly to a Model Apart from Data Targets it is also possible to assign Data Sources Program Procedures Public Procedures and Work Fields to a Model Refer to the following sections for more detailed information Target Files or Reports page 104 e Target Records page 111 e Target Fields page 114 e Target Titles page 119 e Target Headings page 119 s Target End Pages page 120 e Target Procedures page 121 Target Files or Reports There are two types of Data Targets Target Files are based on Dictionary Files available in the MetaStore e Target Reports are built manually during the creation of the Model Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Right click the Model name and select Add gt Target The Target File properties window appears 102 New Target e KBC10 T02 New Target Target DATA TARGETS 105 Two tabs are available Technical and Business 3 Fill out th
285. l procedure Example 2 If all reports and Target Files in the program request are interested in the same subset of input data but are to be sorted in a variety of ways so that the sort cannot occur in the Initial Sort procedure the common subset of unwanted records can be excluded in a Source File input procedure For example assume that all reports in a program request are interested only in those employees having an annual salary of less than 20 000 The following Source File input procedure would be coded t BEGIN SOURCEFILE PLOYEE MASTER INPUT IF ANNUAL SALARY GE 20000 EXCLUDE T Here the only records that any of the reports and Target Files in the program will see are those for employees with an annual salary less than 20 000 If the Source File input procedure were omitted the exclusion of the unwanted records would be required in every report and Target File detail procedure Note A record input procedure could have been used in the example above and would have been just as efficient as the Source File input procedure Generally however record input procedures are used with multi record input where they are generally more efficient than Source File procedures Example 3 Continuing the above example if the third report in the program request were only interested in those employees having an annual salary of less than 15 000 the following report detail procedure woul
286. ld clicking the Browse button results in displaying the Properties window of the matching Source Field See Source Files on page 50 e Ifyou empty the field you can click the Browse button to redisplay the list of Fields that can be selected as Source Field Note The Name field will not be updated automatically The Name is in dependent from the field where it points to By default they are equal but this is not mandatory A field with the MetaStore name DSTR NM can have a MetaMap name DISTRIBUTOR NAME Automatic Checkbox This field applies for all Source File types By default this checkbox is selected This means that the source file will be read automatically completely and sequentially Clear this checkbox if you want that MetaSuite automatically retrieves a record based on a key value each time it reads a record from a Controlling File which you define in the Controlled By selection box The Automatic flag is disabled in case of Matching The last file in the matching chain will have the Automatic flag set the other files in the matching chain will have the Automatic flag unset The last file in the chain will be treated somehow as the controlling file the other files as controlled by files Note that the mechanism for matching differs a great deal from the controlled by mechanism For more information on defining Key fields refer to the section File Keys in the MetaStore Manager User Guide DATA SOURCES 54 Ma
287. ld you can enter Notes for this Target Procedure If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Target Wizard The Target Wizard provides an alternative way to define Data Targets 1 Open an existing Model or create a new Model 2 Select the Target Wizard icon wi from the Wizard Toolbar The following window is displayed Target Wizard Add Target gt Select a Dictionary File and one or more Target Record s New Target T02 Target Type Delimited Organization Any Dictionary File E Show History The following fields are available DATA TARGETS 126 Field Meaning Name This field will be updated automatically with the name of the Dictionary File when you select it from the Dictionary File drop down list below After having made the selection you can change the name in this field The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree View window Note When you use the Target Wizard you can only define a Target based on a Dictionary File available in the MetaStore Prefix e In this field a default prefix is displayed in the following format T Where T stands for Target stands for the sequential Target number Up to 99 Targets can be de fined for a Model separates the Prefix from the Target Name You can replace the default Prefix by another 4 character Pref
288. le 6 Compound conditional expressions combining conditional keywords on page 306 Parentheses in Compound Conditional Expressions Remember that logical operators are used to join the preceding and the following conditions Parentheses may be coded in compound conditional expressions to indicate the conjunction of one condition with two or more disjunctive conditions The following command could be coded IF UNITS GT 200 OR COST GT 4500 AND STRUCTURED EDITOR 303 INVENTORY STATUS EQ NA PUT 4 This command contains three simple conditional expressions which for the purposes of this discussion will be numbered as follows 1 UNITS GT 200 2 COST GT 4500 3 INVENTORY STATUS EQ NA The command as coded indicates that the fourth line is to be printed under two sets of circumstances if the first condition is true or if both the second and third conditions are true If parentheses are inserted around the first two disjunctive conditions IF UNITS GT 200 OR COST GT 4500 AND INVENTORY STATUS EQ NA PUT 4 the meaning of the command is changed to indicate that the fourth line is to be printed if both the first and third conditions are true or if both the second and third conditions are true This second version of the command is the equivalent of the following command coded without parentheses IF UNITS GT 200 AND INVENTORY STATUS EQ NA OR COST GT 4500 AND INVENTORY STATUS EQ NA
289. le Record SQL data source the Path Records assigned to the Path allow you to define inner joins between the Records within the File a Multi Record non SQL data source the Path Records up to 50 assigned to the Path are used to combine multiple Records of the same File You can do this in order to define the subordinate Record and the Relationship between the Records Procedure 5 Open the required Model Expand the tree in such a way that the required Source File Path is displayed Right click the Source File Path name and select Add gt Path Record Select the required Source Record and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically The Path Record Properties panel is displayed DEPARTMENT ARRAY New Work Field V PTH Employee Data 1 PRD Employee Data MetaSuite Model 06 DMS Employees PTH Employee Data PRD Employee Data Path Record Technical Path Record Properties Name Employee Data Occurrence oF Subordinate Record Employee Data J EN Relationship el x Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the section Fields
290. lected Subfield Auto Position Flagging this option makes it possible to automatically calculate the position In most cases this results in the end position of the last field 1 There are some exceptions to this standard rule e The first field has no predecessor Obviously in this case the position will be 1 e Redefines in this case the position of the redefined field will be taken e Subfields this is in fact a variation of redefines The first subfield will have the same position as the group field it belongs to The second subfield will follow the standard rule Workspace The Workspace is the grey zone next to the Tree View Window when all Windows are docked This area is used to display Properties windows when you are working with MetaMap Objects Output If the Output option in the View menu is checked the Output window is by default displayed in the lower half of the screen The Output window contains all messages generated during the current session of MetaMap 5 10 Package Compile Generate Window e Generate window When generating this window will display the MXL and the generator errors e Package window When creating a package the output of the package will be displayed in this window Compile window When executing a compile script the listing will be displayed in this window METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 44 5 11 Statusbar 5 12 If the Statusbar option in the View menu is checked
291. lowing command MetaMap TDW filenamel filenameN lt Ins gt TDW optional This parameter specifies that the Test Data Wizard must be started when logged on filename filenameN optional The MetaMap Models to be opened Ins mandatory The installation directory specified during installation B Batch 316 Export to MXL 316 Return Codes 317 D Data Sources 49 Data Targets 104 Display Options 178 E Exporting a Model to CDIF format 175 External Array 71 Array Procedure 79 Source Field 76 Source Record 75 Sub Source Field 77 L Logging on to MetaMap 6 M Mapping Wizard 130 Matching Wizard 99 MetaMap Key notions 4 Prerequisites 5 Purpose 3 MetaMap Models Create 47 Overview 46 Model Creation External Array 71 Array Procedure 79 Source Field 76 Source Record 75 Sub Source Field 77 Mapping Wizard 130 Matching Wizard 99 Parameter File 83 Source File 50 Index File Procedure 63 Source Field 58 Source Record 56 Sub Source Field 59 88 Source Wizard 90 Structured Field 83 Target Target End Page 120 Target Field 114 Target Heading 119 Target Procedure 121 Target Record 111 Target Title 119 Target File 104 Target Report 104 Target Wizard 125 Model creation Defining record procedures 61 Defining source fields for parameter files 87 Defining source file path records 69 Defining source file paths 67 Defining source records for parameter files 85 Model Packaging 176 MSBMAP 31
292. lso the coding of complex conditional commands can be simplified Public procedures can be executed a single time using the DO command a specified number of times using the DO FOR command or repeatedly under a specified set of conditions using the DO WHILE command The DO FOR and DO WHILE commands are described separately in this section A public procedure is always within the scope of either a single file procedure or a single Report or Target File procedure That is it may be executed directly or indirectly via another public procedure only from within a single Source File Report or Target File procedure Format DO procedure name Elements Description Element Description Required procedure name Procedure name is the name of the public procedure to be Yes executed It must match the name appearing on the BEGIN command that delimits the beginning of the procedure within the scope of the current procedure Refer also to the section Conditional Keywords page 300 Examples Example 1 As an example the following DO command executes a public procedure named RECALC TAX DO RECALC TAX BEGIN RECALC TAX STRUCTURED EDITOR 201 Note that within the program request the public procedure identified by the BEGIN RECALC TAX command must appear within the scope of the procedure containing the DO command In other words that procedure must be coded before another BEGIN SOURCEFILE BE
293. mask for each Field Type Both the default masks and the manually created masks are composed of Replacement and Insertion characters The following table lists the Replacement characters and their meaning Replacement characters indicate positions in the printed field that may be replaced by the corresponding types of characters from the input field Replacement Meaning Character Floating dollar sign before the first digit with leading zero suppression Z Leading zero suppression Asterisks to replace leading zeros 9 Numeric character A Alphabetic character The following table lists the Insertion characters and their meaning Insertion characters indicate characters to be printed in addition to those contained in the stored field Insertion Meaning Character Leading dollar sign IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 Wopk FIELDS 140 Insertion Meaning Character x Leading asterisk generally for check protection Comma Decimal point You can always modify the default decimal point using the Generator Manager For more information refer to the chapter Create Dictionary Enter License Key Screen in the Generator Manager User Guide B Blank Trailing minus for negative values Trailing plus or minus sign CR Trailing credit symbol for negative values only DB Trailing debit symbol for negative values As mentioned above there is a default Mask for ea
294. mat SYS PAGE NUMBER n Where n is a number that is one less than the page number you want to print on the report Example To set the page number to 5 you would enter SYS PAGE NUMBER 4 Before the title area of a report page is prepared SYS PAGE NUMBER is incremented by 1 Therefore by setting SYS PAGE NUMBER to one less than the desired page number it will automatically be incremented to the correct number when the page is prepared SYS RANDOM KEY The SYS RANDOM KEY is automatically defined in each procedure SYS RANDOM KEY contains the index of a random external array record Usage TargetField SourceField SYS RANDOM K Fl K This has the same meaning as GET ARRAY KEY RANDOM TargetField SourceField SYS CURRENT KEY Example WS NUMBER POSTALCODE NUMBER SYS RANDOM KEY WS COMMUNE POSTALCODE COMMUNE SYS CURRENT KEY Remark When taking a random element of an array using SYS RANDOM KEY as an index the value of SYS CURRENT KEY will be adapted automatically If SYS RANDOM KEY would have been used twice in the example WS NUMBER and WS COMMUNE would not correspond to each other SYS RECORD The SYS RECORD field is defined automatically in all generated programs It contains the name of the last Source Record read When processing a Source File containing multiple record types it is often necessary to check the co
295. matically defined in each generated program for numeric fields either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will determine for you the integer portion of the numeric field value Format Field name SYS INTEGER PART Field name Field name must be a numeric field SYS INTEGER PART is implemented as the INTEGER PART function within COBOL If the value of Fie d name is zero the returned value is zero If the value of Fie d name is positive the returned value is the greatest integer less than or equal to the value of Fie d name If the value of Field name is negative the returned value is the least integer greater than or equal to the value of Fie d name Remarks SYS INTEGER PART can not be used on occurring fields STRUCTURED EDITOR 292 Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher SYS LENGTH This is the length of the field as defined in the MetaStore or in MetaMap if it is a Work Field Format Field name SYS LENGTH Field name Field name can be a character or a numeric field SYS LENGTH is implemented as the LENGTH function within COBOL Remarks SYS LENGTH can not be used on occurring fields Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher SYS LENGTH R The Field name SYS LENGTH R is automatically defined in each generated program for fields either Source Field Work Field or Tar
296. mitted the result will be rounded IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 192 Element Description Required Operand An operand is either a numeric constant or a numeric date field Yes Only one operand within an arithmetic expression may be defined as a Date field When a Date field is used in the expression the other operands will be considered as number of days to be added or subtracted from the Date The field in which the result will be stored must be a Date field as well See Example 1 Operand on page 192 Operator An operator indicates the arithmetic operation to perform onthe Yes surrounding operands An arithmetic expression is always enclosed by brackets and contains as possible operators Multiply Divide Add Subtract Power See Example 2 Operator on page 193 Order of operations When additional brackets are omitted to enforce the order of calculation the following order of precedence applies to operators e Power e Multiplication and division e Addition and subtraction The following commands would produce the same results TOTAL BONUS ANNUAL SALARY 0 05 FIXED BONUS TOTAL BONUS FIXED BONUS ANNUAL SALARY 0 05 TOTAL BONUS ANNUAL SALARY 0 05 FIXED BONUS Overflow errors If the field in which the result is stored is too small to contain the computed value of the expression the following error message will be produced E
297. mmand is allowed within any type of procedure Format HALT ALL Example Consider the following example BEGIN SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER INITIAL IF SELECT JOB CODE EQ HALT ALL This Initial Sort procedure checks the contents of a Work Field named SELECT JOB CODE If no value has been supplied for that field i e no runtime parameter was entered the run is halted Note The HALT SOURCEFILE HALT REPORT and HALT TARGETFILE commands differ from the HALT ALL command in that they halt only particular parts of the processing not the entire program request STRUCTURED EDITOR 221 HALT SOURCEFILE The HALT SOURCEFILE command is used to halt the processing of one or more Source Files Once the HALT SOURCEFILE command is encountered in a run normal processing continues until the generated program attempts to read the next input record from the halted Source File At that time input processing ceases for the Source File and any end of file procedures applicable are executed The HALT SOURCEFILE command is allowed only within initial or input procedures Format HALT SOURCEFILE SourceFile name Elements Description Element Description Required SourceFile name SourceFile name identifies the Source File whose processing is No being halted It must specify a Source File that does not include the CONTROLLED option although it can include the
298. mong the Object Types depending on an External Array the Source Records contain third level Objects Click the sign next to a Source Record to display them Dependent Object Type Symbol Reference Source Field for an External See Source Fields for an External Array on page 76 Array DI Object Types depending from a Parameter File The following table lists the possible Object Types that may depend on a Parameter File Dependent Object Type Symbol Reference Source Record for a See Source Records for a Parameter File on page 85 Parameter File g The Source Records contain third level Objects Click the F sign next to a Source Record to display them Dependent Object Type Symbol Reference Source Field for a Parameter See Source Fields for a Parameter File on page 87 File E Object Types depending from a Target Field or Target Report The following table lists the possible Object Types that may depend on a Target File or Target Report Dependent Object Type Symbol Reference Target Record See Target Records on page 111 es IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 17 Dependent Object Type Symbol Reference Title gp See Target Titles on page 119 Heading ry See Target Headings on page 119 Endpage See Target End Pages on page 120 JE Target Procedure Detail See Target Procedures on page 121 Output Post
299. n Release Notes 8 1 3 Installation Guides User Guides Technical Guides BS2000 OSD Runtime Component DOS VSE Runtime Component Fujitsu Windows Runtime Component MicroFocus Windows Runtime Component MicroFocus UNIX Runtime Component OS 390 and Z OS Runtime Component OS 400 Runtime Component VisualAge Windows Runtime Component VisualAge UNIX Runtime Component VMS Runtime Component INI Manager User Guide Installation and Setup Guide Introduction Guide MetaStore Manager User Guide MetaMap Manager User Guide Generator Manager User Guide ADABAS File Access Guide IDMS File Access Guide IMS DLI File Access Guide RDBMS File Access Guide XML File Access Guide Runtime Modules User defined Functions User Guide If you are unfamiliar with MetaSuite the following technical description provides you with a brief overview The MetaSuite System MetaSuite is designed for data retrieval extraction conversion and reporting It includes a workstation based graphical user interface and a mainframe runtime component MetaSuite Database Interfaces MetaMap Manager MetaStore Manager Generator Manager ABOUT THIS MANUAL 2 MetaSuite can access data from a number of database management systems using the same commands program structure and retrieval techniques used for non database files Each database interface is available as an optional enhancement to the base product MetaMap Manager is the MetaSuite t
300. n of multiple non adjacent Records Press and hold the Shift key to make a selection of multiple adjacent Records IKAN Solutions DATA TARGETS 127 3 Fill out the fields as required and click Next The technical properties windows for the Target File is displayed Add Target Specify the technical information of this Target File GroupBy Fields ID New Sort Fields D New The following fields are available are lee IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 DATA TARGETS 128 Field Meaning GroupBy Fields Click the New button and select the required Target or Work Field s The GroupBy Field Properties Windows will be displayed For more information refer to the section GroupBy Fields page 110 The GroupBy property contains the GroupBy keys If at least one GroupBy key is specified for a target record bundles of records will be grouped together namely the records that subsequently contain the same group key value Not only the detail records will be put in the target file but the representing records of each group will be put as well A group level is the group key index If multiple group keys have been defined multiple group levels exist Per Groupby key in other words per group level additional subgroups will be created resulting in additional subgroup representatives being put Which record will represent the group or subgroup If no target sort field is defined
301. n or System Function you must select the required function from the drop down list Depending on the function you select another screen will be displayed asking you to fill out the required parameters for this function For example Function Parameters The Function PICK NUMBER accepts 9 parameter s 1 is are mandatory Please enter the first number of the pick list Enter parameter 1 For more detailed information on the different parameters refer to the User defined Functions User Guide TEST DATA WIZARD 161 9 4 lf you select Data List the following screen is displayed ra This table has been selected already for field T03 city Use or check the same row for this field Perform integrity check and exclude if not ok The following fields are available Field Meaning Dictionary File Select a Dictionary File from the drop down list Dictionary Record Select a Dictionary Record from the drop down list Dictionary Field Select a Dictionary Field from the drop down list Occurrence Select the occurrence rate This table has already been selected If a random table value is required from a table that has for the field If flagged the same already been used for a previous field flagging this row will be used for this field option will make sure that the previously selected field value and the current field value will be taken from the same row For example Sup
302. n should occur at each group process Example Assume that a report contains the following levels of GroupBy fields Level 1 Division Level 2 Grand total or REPORT 1 GROUP DIVISION GRAND TOTAL To print total line format 1 for the grand totals and total line format 2 for the division group you would use the command below IF SYS GROUP LEVEL EQ 2 PUT 1 ELSE PUT 2 STRUCTURED EDITOR 258 SYS LINE NUMBER The SYS LINE NUMBER field which contains the current line number of the current page of the report is defined automatically for each report in a generated program Use this field to print line numbers on a report to force page breaks as a target for an assignment command or as part of a conditional test Forcing page breaks To force a page break assign the value 999 to SYS LINE NUMBER When to use In an unsorted report use SYS LINE NUMBER in a report detail procedure to control page breaks or printing of detail lines In a sorted report use SYS LINE NUMBER in a report total procedure to control page breaks or printing of total lines Example The following commands test the current line number to determine if an entire set of four DETAIL lines will fit on a given page if not the entire set should be printed on the next page REPORT 1 PAGE 55 80 DETAIL 1 field DETAIL 2 field
303. n the range 80 99 9 The larger a value specified here the larger the sample size will be precision Enter the total tolerable amount of error for the population not the Yes tolerable error per item in the population It is a number or non subscripted integer Work Field expected error Enter the expected occurrence rate of errors in the population Yes rate expressed as a percentage It is a number or a non subscripted Work Field containing a value in the range of 0 00001 to 99 99999 How it works This technique is a combination of two sampling techniques Acceptance Sampling and Fixed Interval Sampling Cumulative Sampling draws a sample based on the total value of all positive occurrences of the specified field starting from a calculated point and using a calculated interval value The sample size is controlled by the stated confidence level precision and expected error rate The selection interval is a ratio of the total value of the specified field and the sample size Each record with a positive value is evaluated for inclusion in the sample The evaluation is based on an algorithm that uses the starting point the calculated interval and the field value This technique first calculates a series of values that are then used in the actual selection of the sample The values are calculated using a procedure that performs the following steps in the order shown A random number seed is computed using system date and time The
304. n this situation are described in the Installation and Setup Guide and the MetaStore Manager User Guide MetaSuite program installed Repository created ODBC access to the Repository created Setup after installation including Generator Manager completed Required Data Sources and Data Targets defined in MetaStore Source Control database created and connected optional If you want to maintain several versions of your Models the Source Control database must be created and the connection between the MetaStore and the Source Control database must be established See Version Management with Source Control on page 181 CHAPTER 5 MetaMap Manager User Interface 5 1 This section provides an overview of the different elements of the MetaMap Manager User Interface e Logging On to MetaMap Manager page 6 Menu Bar page 9 e Main Toolbar page 11 e Wizard Toolbar page 13 Developer Toolbar page 12 e Tree View Window page 13 Context Menus page 18 e Workspace page 43 Output page 43 e Statusbar page 44 e Docking a Window page 44 Logging On to MetaMap Manager 1 Start MetaMap Manager The MetaSuite Logon window appears ei MetaMap Manager Logon Log on to the MetaStore Database User ID Metasuit Password Data Source Name My MetaStore Database Metasuit Owner MeraMap MANAGER USER INTERFACE 7 2 Fill out the fields as required Fields Descrip
305. nd handle each one differently Consider the code below GET SALES REC KEY SALESPERSON IF SALES DB SYS IO STATUS EQ SYS OK PUT 1 2 3 EXIT CASE SALES DB SYS INTERNAL STATUS EQ 212 MESSAGE NOT FOUND PUT 4 EXIT EQ 214 MESSAGE DATABASE UNUSABLE 214 PUT 4 HALT ALL ELSE MESSAGE UNEXPECTED STATUS AND SALES DB SYS INTERNAL STATUS PUT 4 HALT ALL Following the GET command if the status code is normal the first three detail line formats are printed and no further commands in the procedure are executed If a 212 status is returned by the database management system NOT FOUND is assigned to the field MESSAGE and the fourth detail line is printed presumably containing the field MESSAGE If a 214 status is returned a different error message is produced and the run is terminated If any other error status is returned a third error message is printed this time containing the actual status code and all processing is halted SYS IO STATUS One SourceFile name SYS IO STATUS field is defined automatically for each Source File It contains any of several values indicating the current status of the Source File The possible values for SourceFile status are summarized below STRUCTURED EDITOR 278 Usage IF SourceFile name SYS IO STATUS EQ Source File status
306. nd is much easier to understand It is also less likely that coding errors will be made in the public procedures as none of the commands are continued across several lines DO FOR The DO FOR command is used to execute a public procedure a specified number of times A public procedure is simply a set of one or more procedural commands After the specified number of executions of the public procedure the next command following the DO FOR command will be executed Use of the DO FOR command and public procedures eliminates the need to write the same sequence of commands over and over Public procedures can be executed a specified number of times using the DO FOR command a single time using the DO command or repeatedly under a specified set of conditions using the DO WHILE command The DO and DO WHILE commands are described separately in this section A public procedure is always within the scope of either a single Source File procedure a single report procedure or a single Target File procedure That is it may be executed directly or indirectly via another public procedure only from within a single Source File Report or Target File procedure STRUCTURED EDITOR 202 Format DO procedure name FOR counter start value TO end value BY increment Elements Description Element Description Required procedure name Procedure name is the name of the public procedure to be Yes executed
307. ndexed file format 9072 End of indexed file 9073 No record found in indexed file 9074 No current record in indexed file 9075 Indexed data file name too long 9077 Internal ISAM module failure 9078 Illegal key description in indexed file 9081 Key already exists in indexed file 9100 Invalid file operation 9101 Illegal operation on an indexed file 9102 Sequential file with non integral number of records 9104 Null file name used in a file operation 9105 Memory allocation error 9129 Attempt to access record zero of relative file 9135 File must not exist 9138 File closed with lock cannot be opened 9139 Record length or key data inconsistency 9141 File already open cannot be opened 9142 File not open cannot be closed 9143 REWRITE DELETE in sequential mode not preceded by successful READ 9146 No current record defined for sequential read 9147 Wrong open mode or access mode for READ START 9148 Wrong open mode or access mode for WRITE 9149 Wrong open mode or access mode for REWRITE DELETE 9151 Random read on sequential file 9152 REWRITE on file not opened I O 9158 Attempt to REWRITE to a line sequential file 9159 Malformed line sequential file 9161 File header not found 9173 Called program not found 9180 End of file marker error 9182 Console input or console output open in wrong direction 9183 Attempt to open line sequential file for LO IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEAS
308. ndicators in accumulated fields can be concatenated The concatenation rule is defined by the option OPTION ACCUM NULL The user can set this option to three different values in the MTL options table For more information refer to the chapter The Dictionary Options Screen in the Generator Manager User Guide s Standard the null indicator of the accumulated field is null s ONE If one accumulated field is not null then the accumulated result is not null e ALL None of accumulated fields may be null otherwise the accumulated value is null Those options can be set on a fixed value Generator Manager definition or dynamically using the SET command Data Source Target Fields can be defined in two ways by defining a Value The value of a target field is not a simple literal it is the formula or procedure that the generated program must execute in order to assign the value The window pane in which this formula is put is called the structured editor The area with the list of possible commands and parameters is called the look ahead parser e by defining a Data Source A data source is a direct link to a source field or a work field DATA TARGETS 117 This section explains how to define a Data Source You will use this method if the Target Field is a one to one match with a Source Field If a Data Source has been selected the value of the Target Field is linked to a Source Field It is a kind of shortcut definition
309. ng the standard input control tables of MetaSuite However if you perform the fetches and updates by your own you will have to program the null status handling yourself STRUCTURED EDITOR 207 There are three ways to indicate the null status field 1 You can indicate the host variable null status field separately via field name SYS STATUS 2 You can indicate the host variable plus the null status field via field name STATUS INCLUDED 3 You can set a field to NULL by indicating NULL in the embedded SQL Ifa host variable needs a null status according to the embedded SQL statements the host variable will automatically be set to OUTNULR Examples INSERT INTO IKAN_FACT KAN_KEY _IND VALUES W ACT_IKAN_KEY DEP_KEY W OFPNR NULL W FMP W FMP SYS STATUS NULL mm mi OO D Sch F j HZHZW z g lt EXEC SQL UPDATE TFLIGHTPLAN FACT SET IKAN_KEY W IKAN_KEY ONR W ONR NULL FW W FW SYS STATUS FCMP W FCMP POSTNR W POSTNR STATUS INCLUDED WHERE ACT_IKAN_KEY W ACT_ IKAN_KEY PLNKEY W PLN_KEY PLNARRKEY W PLNARRKEY OFPNR W OFPNR END EXEC x EXCLUDE The EXCLUDE command is used in a procedure to bypass the processing of the current Record bypass the current set of Records in case of Controll
310. not be used on occurring fields Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher SYS NUMVAL The Field nameSYS NUMVAL is automatically defined in each generated program for character fields either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will give you the possibility to determine the numeric value of a character field Format Field name SYS NUMVAL Field name Field name must be a character field that contains a printed numeric value When the Fie d name contains a numeric value with decimals the expected decimal point is set by the CHANGE DEFAULT DECIMAL command within the MetaSuite generator The CHANGE DEFAULT DECIMAL will switch the representation of a decimal point from Point to Comma and vice versa For more information on the CHANGE DEFAULT DECIMAL command refer to the Generator Manager User Guide SYS NUMVAL is implemented as the NUMVAL function within COBOL It can therefore be used to move the numeric value of an alphanumeric field in a numeric field Remarks SYS NUMVAL can not be used on occurring fields Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher SYS NUMVALC The Field nameS YS NUMVALC is automatically defined in each generated program for character fields either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will give you the possibility to determine the numeric value of a character field Format Field name SYS NU
311. nput records to be read especially useful when running a new program for the first time All system fields and processing limits that can be modified using runtime parameters begin with the letters SYS and are described in the following sections Parameter Files vs Parameter Fields Parameter Files A Parameter File is a Standard File that is added in MetaMap as a Parameter File It is opened read and closed during the program initialization phase Only one record is read from a Parameter File The fields in this Parameter File are called Parameter File Fields Example Ex24 reads payroll detail Only the first record is read After the reading of payrol1l detail the file employee master will be read sequentially B24 MSM aX payroll detaii T L ie Parameter File 4 S 0 2 employee master Ex24 payroll detai Parameter File S payroll detail Technical Busine ss gr PAYROLL DETAIL RECORD gege BR E PD EMPLOYEE NUMBER Parameter File Properties E PD PAY PERIOD DATE Name bayroll detaill gt PD CHECK DATE E PD CHECK NUMBER Organization Standard File E PD REGULAR HOURS gt PD OVERTIME HOURS Sere eee Dictionary File PAYROLL DETAIL V 2 m E PD PAY CODE E PD GROSS PAY E PD FED WH A Parameter File behaves as an External Array with only one record RUNTIME PARAMETERS 308 Parameter Fields A Parameter Field is a work field of which the parameter flag has been set P
312. nt Object of the Model 5 Save your changes by doing one of the following Click the Save Active Model kd icon on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model 12 2 Technical tab The following fields are available on the Technical tab e Name page 149 e Commands Workspace page 149 Name Enter a name for the Procedure It is advised to select a name that describes the action performed The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree Window It can contain up to 32 characters Commands Workspace In this field you can enter the commands that build the Public Procedure These commands are written in the MXL MetaSuite Export Language See Structured Editor on page 186 1 To start entering commands click the Stop Edit icon zi You can also right click the Workspace and select Start Stop Editing from the context menu or use F7 The list of available commands is displayed at the left of this field Invalid commands are displayed in red Note If you do not need the assisted mode you can switch it off using the icon in the Edit Toolbar 2 Select the required command by clicking it The command will be added to the Workspace Any error messages or warnings are displayed underneath the Commands Workspace 3 Once you have finished entering the commands click the Stop Edit icon w The Procedure is verified If syntax errors are found the errors message are displayed underneath the
313. ntents of this field in order to take the appropriate action STRUCTURED EDITOR 260 Example If the first detail line of a report contains information from the CLIENT record the second detail line contains information from the ACCOUNT record and the third detail line contains information from the TRANSACTION record the following command would insure that only data from the current record from the Source File was printed CASE SYS RECORD EQ DWH CLIENT PUT Liz EQ SOQ3 ACCOUNT PUT 2 EQ TRANSACTION PUT 3 In the example you can see that the prefix is taken in account in order to distinguish different Source Files with the same record name If no prefix has been set for the Source File the leading characters of SYS RECORD will be SYS RECORD LENGTH SYS RECORD LENGTH is a numeric property of Files and Records It will be used to get the predefined record length of a record as defined in the MetaStore database or to get the record length of the current read record in the file The practical use of this property is to determine the length of the last read record and to compare it with the predefined length of a record for instance to determine the current record type Format SourceFile name SourceRecord name SYS RECORD LENGTH Elements Description Element Description Required SourceFile name SourceFile name can be any Source File but will mainly be used on multi record source files or on
314. nual Checkbox This checkbox only applies for IDMS Source Files Select this checkbox if you want to program the access commands to the IDMS database manually using in a Program Initial or an Initial Sort Procedure Clear this checkbox if you want MetaSuite to generate the access commands automatically Note If you select this checkbox the Automatic checkbox automatically becomes cleared Special Write Only Checkbox This checkbox only applies for Standard Source Files Select this checkbox if you want to be able to write Records to this Source File during the execution of the Model By activating this option the File although defined as a Source File is considered as a Target It is empty when the program starts and it is filled with data during the execution Note If you select this checkbox the Automatic checkbox automatically becomes cleared Match With If this Source File is the origin of one or more matchings this field contains the name of the Source File this file is matched with You can then click the Browse button in order to access the Properties window of this Source File The Matchings themselves can only be defined with the Matching Wizard See Matching Wizard on page 99 Match On If this Source File is the destination of one or more matchings this field contains the name of the Source File this file is matched on You can then click the Browse button in order to access the Properties window of
315. number you can add following logic in your program IF employ number SYS STATUS EQ SYS NOT NUMERIC Runtime setting To prevent the numeric Source Fields to be excluded during initial processing from the normal program logic you must set the runtime setting SYS NUMERIC CHECK Example SYS NUMERIC CHECK IGNORE Note For numeric dates the SYS INVALID DATE status is more important than the SYS NOT NUMERIC state Please refer to the SYS STATUS keyword description SYS NOT RELATED The SYS NOT RELATED Source File status is used to check for an IDMS Source File whether the EXEC IDMS IF setname MEMBER has detected a relation between the IDMS member and the IDMS owner Following a EXEC IDMS IF setname MEMBER command it is always good practice to check whether a relation exists between owner and member to insure that valid data has been obtained Usage IF SourceFile name SYS IO STATUS EQ SYS NOT RELATED Example The following code sets the customer name to not found for an invoice without customer EXEC IDMS IF CUST INVOICE MEMBER IF IDMSCUST SYS IO STATUS EQ SYS NOT RELATED CUSTOMER NAME NOT FOUND If the IF MEMBER operation fails to locate an owner for the INVOICE the IDMSCUST SYS IO STATUS field will be set to SYS NOT RELATED In this case the CUSTOMER NAME will be set to NOT FOUND SYS NULL VALUE
316. numeric date fields with a date format of YYYYMMDD either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will give you the possibility to determine the number of days since the 31th of December 1600 for the date value within the field Format Field name SYS INTEGER OF DATE Field name Field name must be a numeric date field with date format YYYYMMDD SYS INTEGER OF DATE is implemented as the INTEGER OF DATE function within COBOL Remarks SYS INTEGER OF DATE can not be used on occurring fields Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher STRUCTURED EDITOR 291 SYS INTEGER OF DAY The Field name SYS INTEGER OF DAY is automatically defined in each generated program for date fields with a date format of YYYYDDD either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will give you the possibility to determine the number of days since the 31th of December 1600 for a given date in the field Format Field name SYS INTEGER OF DAY Field name Field name must be a numeric date field with format YYYYDDD SYS INTEGER OF DAY is implemented as the INTEGER OF DAY function within COBOL Remarks SYS INTEGER OF DAY can not be used on occurring fields Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher SYS INTEGER PART The Field nameSYS INTEGER PART is auto
317. o 0 the default page length as specified in the Generator Dictionary will be taken Page Width This field only applies if you selected Report in the Target Type drop down list Enter the Page Width of the Report in number of characters per line If the length is set to 0 the default page width as specified in the Generator Dictionary will be taken Version Enter the Version number of the Target File description IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 DATA TARGETS 109 Identifier Title This field only applies if you selected Report in the Target Type drop down list Enter the Identifier Title of the Report Grand Total Select this checkbox if you use grouping levels in your Target and you want a Grand Total for a certain calculation Sort Fields It is interesting to define up to 16 Sort Fields for your Target if it is not ordered in the sequence you want Use this field as follows 1 Double click the New button The list of Fields available in the Records belonging to the Target is displayed 2 Select the required field and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Showall When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of
318. ocedures page 144 and Work Fields page 135 to a Model You will define a Public Procedure for a Model if you want to create a block of logic that can be executed independently from a fixed execution time Public Procedures can be executed more than once it is reusable and can be part of a loop 12 1 Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Right click the Model name and select Add gt Public Procedure The properties window is displayed Comman e New Program Procedure 1 New Public Procedure e NM CASE a Exercise 0 New Public Procedure Public Procedure COMPUTE Fb CONTINUE Technical Business DEBUG Public Procedure Properties Be Name A EXCLUDE EXEC IDMS EXEC SQL EXIT GET HALT IF INVOKE NEXT PUT REM SAMPLE SET Source Field Source File Source Record START SYS APPLICATION SYS APPLICATION GROUP SYS AUTO SQLCODE SYS DATE SYS DB CONNECT SYS DB DATABASE SYS DB PASSWORD SYS DB USER SYS INVOKE RETURN SYS LINE NUMBER 4 m E SYS PAGE NUMBER SYS RETURN CODE Discard Close Two tabs are available Technical and Business m PUBLIC PROCEDURES 149 3 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections e Technical tab page 149 e Business Tab page 150 4 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Public Procedure and its symbol Vu are displayed as a depende
319. ocedures and Work Fields to a Model Data Source Subobjects Source Files page 50 e Source Records page 56 Source Fields page 58 Sub Source Fields page 59 Record Procedures page 61 e File Procedures page 63 e Path page 67 Source Path Records page 69 External Arrays page 71 e Source Records for an External Array page 75 Source Fields for an External Array page 76 Sub Source Fields for an External Array page 77 e Array Procedures page 79 e Path for an External Array page 81 Parameter Files page 83 e Source Records for a Parameter File page 85 Source Fields for a Parameter File page 87 Sub Source Fields for a Parameter File page 88 Source Wizard page 90 Matching Wizard page 99 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 8 1 DATA SOURCES 50 Source Files Data Sources that are defined as Source Files will be read from the start to the end one record at a time You will define a Data Source as a Source File if you want to use it as an input file Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Right click the Model name and select Add gt Source gt Source File 3 Select the file description you want to add and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Se ect Item drop
320. odel There can be up to 99 data sources Attention e If the Dictionary File Names do not match the names of the physical Source Files you should replace them e If the Source Files are not located on the platform where the program will be executed you have to transfer it or do your execution in two steps set PPTT01 ExecName t01 set The PPTT lines contain the sorted temporary files that are the PPTTO2 ExecName t02 result of Source Sorts They will be used as temporary sort files In the last lines of the script these temporary files are deleted set PPTLOG ExecName log The PPTLOG file is the global log file generated during the execution of the program This file can be used for debugging purposes set PPTLST ExecName lst The PPTLST file is the COBOL Object Program list It can be opened and verified in a COBOL editor For a detailed description refer to the Generator Manager Guide set PPTDBG ExecName dbg The PPTDBG file is a text format file containing debugging information for the program set PPTTDO1 ExecName d01 The PPTTD lines contain the Target File names defined in the set PPTTDO2 ExecName d02 Model There can be up to 99 data targets Target Files and Reports combined set PPTTRO1 ExecName RO1 The PPTR lines contain the Target Report names defined in the Model There can be up to 99 data targets Target Files and Reports combined ExecName exe After setting the filename variables in the lin
321. of Job Program Procedure Add gt Public Procedure Select this option to add a Public Procedure to the Model See Public Procedures on page 148 Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects in the Model Properties Select this option to display the Model s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See MetaMap Models on page 47 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object In case you are using a Source Control System the following options will also be available If not those options are greyed out For more information refer to the chapter Version Management with Source Control page 181 Get Latest Version Select this option to get the latest version of the Model Check In Select this option to check in a Model Check Out Select this option to check out a Model Undo Check Out Select this option to undo the check out of a Model Add to Source Control Select this option to add a Model to Source Control For more information on Version Management refer to the chapter Version Management with Source Control page 181 Open from Source Control Sel
322. of SYS CURRENT KEY The advantage of using SYS CURRENT KEY is that it can be used as an index SYS IO STATUS When the GET command is used for a Controlled Source File you can check the success or failure of the requested operation by verifying the content of the SourceFile name SYS IO STATUS field This field will contain one of the following values e SYS OK The GET operation was successful and the record s requested are available for processing e SYS EOF The GET operation was unsuccessful because the end of file has been reached You will receive this file status only when the GET command re quests are sequential retrievals with no KEY option coded e SYS ERROR The GET operation was unsuccessful If the KEY option was cod ed this status means either that a record with the specified KeyField value does not exist in the Source File or that an I O error has occurred If no KEY option was coded it means that an I O error has occurred In either of these cases if the Source File is a VSAM or database file you can check the contents of the SYS INTERNAL STATUS field for a more precise error code provided by the access method SYS PATH COUNT When multiple records are requested using a single GET command i e the PATH option is coded for the Source File being accessed you should always check the contents of the record name SYS PATH COUNT fields to determine how many records of each type were obtained For each record named
323. of the input records or in order to calculate a sort key After the extraction phase the input file will be closed and the sorted file will be opened instead From that moment on the core processing starts file input target procedures Important note In case no Sort is done and no Prepass or Extract has been defined the Initial Sort procedure will still be executed but only once DATA SOURCES 64 Initial Extract If this procedure is defined the file will be read by the generated program in order to make an extract The extract logic in the form of INCLUDE EXCLUDE tules must be defined here This procedure will be executed for each valid input record After the extraction phase the input file will be closed and the extracted file will be opened From that moment on core processing starts file input target procedures Initial Prepass If this procedure is defined the file will be read twice by the generated program The first pass is used to determine some values for instance totals or average values This prepass logic must be defined here This procedure will be executed during the startup phase for each valid input record After the prepass phase the input file will be closed and reopened again From that moment on core processing starts file input target procedures Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Source File is displayed 3 Right click
324. ollowing the FUNCTION External subroutines can be used to perform special security functions to compress or expand data or to perform other types of processing operations unique to your site One or more fields from the generated program can be made available passed to the external subroutine and these fields may be modified by the subroutine STRUCTURED EDITOR 216 The name of the function is limited to 8 characters The returned value can be a numeric value an alpha numeric value or a data field Format FUNCTION Subroutine name Language Field name SourceRecord name TargetRecord name Elements Description Element Description Required Subroutine name Subroutine name identifies the external subroutine to be Yes executed Language You can enter the language in which the external subroutine is No written when it is not written in COBOL Subroutine name Language should be enclosed by single quotes The entire literal is limited to 40 characters Field name Field name identifies a field to be passed to the external No subroutine You can include up to 16 field names with this command The named fields will be made available to the subroutine for processing You should not name numeric Source Fields in the field name list because in the process of validating a numeric input field the system may convert that field to a different internal data type and size than was originally defined for it When
325. on converts the Source Field contents from the Unicode character set to the ASCII character set The ASCII character set is a one byte character set which is used on open systems Windows UNIX Linux Unicode is a multiple byte character set Information loss is inevitable when using this function Usage Field name SYS UNICODE ASCII Field name Field name must be an alphanumeric field Example ASC CHAR 10 UCS2 CHAR 20 SYS UNICODE ASCII ASC CHAR 10 contains 10 characters UCS2 CHAR 20 contains 20 characters UTF 16 based This example is perfectly possible since each 2 byte couple will be translated into one byte Remarks SYS UNICODE ASCITI can not be used on occurring fields SYS UNICODE EBCDIC The SYS UNICODE EBCDIC Source Field function converts the Source Field contents from the Unicode character set to the EBCDIC character set The EBCDIC character set is a one byte character set which is used on mainframes Z OS BS 2000 Unicode is a multiple byte character set Information loss is inevitable when using this function STRUCTURED EDITOR 299 Usage Field name SYS UNICODE EBCDIC Field name Field name must be an alphanumeric field Example EBC CHAR 10 UCS2 CHAR 20 SYS UNICODE EBCDIC EBC CHAR 10 contains 10 characters UCS2 CHAR 20 contains 20 characters This is perfectly possible since each 2 byte couple will be translated into
326. on is evaluated Usage Field nam SYS WHEN COMP ILED SYS WHEN COMPILED can only be used in the right hand side on an assignment Field name Field name is a character field that will be assigned the timestamp of compilation It is implemented as the WHEN COMPILED function within COBOL Positions within the returned timestamp are e Position 1 4 Year on 4 positions e Position 5 6 Month of the year 01 through 12 e Position 7 8 Day of the month 01 through 31 e Position 9 10 Hours past midnight 00 through 23 e Position 11 12 Minutes past the hour 00 through 59 e Position 13 14 Seconds past the minute 00 through 59 e Position 15 16 Hundredths of a second past the second 00 through 99 e Position 17 Indicator whether time is behind or ahead GMT or Position 18 19 Number of hours that the time is behind or ahead of GMT e Position 20 21 Number of additional minutes that the time is behind or ahead of GMT Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher STRUCTURED EDITOR 274 20 8 Attributes The following attributes are available Category Attribute File Attributes SYS DBNAME page 274 SYS DIRECT KEY page 275 SYS INPUT COUNT page 276 SYS INTERNAL STATUS page 277 SYS IO STATUS page 277 SYS MATCH COUNT page 278 SYS PATH COUNT page 279 SYS READ
327. onary File you can define it manually In this case you enter a name describing the Target in this field The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree View window It can contain up to 32 characters and must be unique Organization If you select a File Type from the drop down list you will only be able to select Dictionary Files of this type with the Dictionary File field below If you leave the default setting Any you will be able to select any Dictionary File The following options are available e Any e ADABAS File Group Datacom File Group e IMS PCB SQL Table Group Standard File e Standard File XML IDMS Subschema Supra Database For more information on the different source types refer to the MetaStore Manager User Guide Prefix It is possible to define several Targets in one Model The default Prefix numbers these Targets in the following format T99 DATA TARGETS 107 Where T stands for Target 99 is replaced by the indication of the number of Targets in this Model For instance 02 means that this is the second Target defined in this Model The dash separates the Prefix from the actual name It is possible to edit but not to delete the Prefix You can blank out the Prefix A Prefix has a fixed length of 4 characters and must start with an alphabetic character Dictionary File Click the Browse button at the right of the Dictionary File name to display the Dictionary File
328. one byte Remarks SYS UNICODE EBCDIC can not be used on occurring fields SYS LOWERCASE The Field nameSYS LOWERCASE is automatically defined in each generated program for character fields either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will determine for you the value of the character field in lower case Format Field name SYS LOWERCASE Field name Field name must be a character field SYS LOWERCASE is implemented as the LOWERCASE function within COBOL Remarks SYS LOWERCASE can not be used on occurring fields Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher SYS UPPERCASE The Field nameSYS UPPERCASE is automatically defined in each generated program for character fields either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will determine for you the value of the character field in upper case STRUCTURED EDITOR 300 Format Field name SYS UPPERCASE Field name Field name must be a character field SYS UPPERCASE is implemented as the UPPERCASE function within COBOL Remarks SYS UPPERCASE can not be used on occurring fields The MTL option OPTION NATIONAL UPPERCASE has been created in order to perform uppercasing Wet mM M Met of national characters like etc More information about this option can be found in the MTL options table when using the MetaSuite Generator Manager Remark for z O
329. one or more other users File is checked out File is checked out by current user File is exclusively checked out MetaMap Model added to Source g Control checked out by at least one Se MetaMap Manager Information a b other user but not by yourself Status information for Ex10 is as follows File is under source code control File is checked out by another user File is exdusively checked out 19 5 Performing Changes to MetaMap Models Under Source Control 1 Make the required MetaMap Model version available in the Tree View Window 2 Right click the Model name and select Check Out The following screen is displayed IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 VERSION MANAGEMENT WITH SOURCE CONTROL 185 3 If required enter a Comment and click OK The Comment will be available in the Source Control program i e Visual SourceSafe The MetaMap Model is checked out Its icon in the Tree View Window changes to a 4 Ifthe selected Model was already checked out by another user a warning is displayed Click Yes to check out the file as well When you and the other user check in the Model they will both get a Version Number and they will be both managed by Source Control 5 Perform the required changes to the Model See Performing Changes to MetaMap Models Under Source Control on page 184 6 Once the required changes have been performed select Check In from th
330. ontrol the access to the Source File The meaning of a file being controlled by is that the file will be read as soon as a certain key value has changed The record that is searched for has a file key value that is specified by the Control Field in the Control File The latter can be a work field as well In other words the controlled file is triggered by the Control Field on the basis of the controlled file key The controlled file should support direct access L Click the Browse button next to the selection box The fields available in the Source File selected above are displayed Select the required field and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically The name of the selected field is displayed in the Control Key field Note Ifyou click the Browse button while a Control Key was already selected the Properties window of this Source Field is displayed 8 2 DATA SOURCES 56 Match Field This read only field lists the Fields belonging to this Source File for which matching s have been defined The matchings can only be defined with the Matching Wizard See Matching W
331. ool used to define models Such models are intuitively built by describing overall program specifications input file definitions data and process and target file definitions data and process MetaStore Manager is a tool that provides metadata maintenance and documentation services The Generator Manager is the system administration tool All kinds of basic functionalities and customization possibilities are supported by this tool CHAPTER 2 Purpose of MetaMap MetaSuite is a data integration application that enables you to rapidly move large volumes of data from any Source to any Target Business Intelligence environment of your choice MetaMap Manager allows you to Activity Sub Activity Meaning Create MetaMap Models e Select Data Sources and Data Targets available in the MetaSuite MetaStore e Create Data Targets manually e Define mapping rules between Data Sources and Data Targets Generate MetaSuite Programs Generate the Model with a Generator for the platform where you will execute it Execute MetaSuite Transformation Programs Execute the generated run script on the source platform If the proper compile and file transfer procedures are provided this can be done automatically CHAPTER 3 Key Notions This section contains an explanation for the following key notions used by MetaMap Manager Notion Description Data Source Your input data Data Target Your output data Map
332. operators are used in a single expression the evaluation of the simple conditional expressions proceeds from first to last De from left to right In other words the following command IF DEPARTMENT EQ 3 OR PAY RATE LT 15 AND STATE CODE EQ NH EXCLUDE excludes all employees in the third DEPARTMENT or any other employee whose PAY RATE is less than 15 and who is from the state of New Hampshire CHAPTER 21 21 1 Runtime Parameters Runtime Parameters are defined outside the MetaMap GUI on separate lines in a runtime INI file often called program name ini Runtime parameters are used to modify the initial value of a parameter Work Field or to reset various system defined fields or processing limits at the start of execution of the generated program The ability to modify an initial value for a parameter Work Field allows you to design generalized programs whose processing can be controlled at execution time The advantage is that a program does not need to be regenerated each time you want to vary selection criteria or other processing variables You simply generate the program once store it as a load module and execute the program any number of times with the appropriate varying settings for the initial parameter Work Field values Certain system fields and default processing limits can also be modified using runtime parameters This allows you to do such things as limit the number of i
333. or Dictionary is set to IMS or Restartable Refer to the section Adding MIL Instructions Using the Command Wizard in the Generator Manager Guide Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Source File is displayed 3 Right click the Source File name and select Add gt Path 4 Select the required Source Record Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically The Data Path Properties panel is displayed PTH New Data Path PTH Pathl 1 PTH New Data Path e SampleModel Source File PTH New Data Path Data Path Technical Data Path Properties Name A Input Order Fields Ka New Entry Record Source Record el EN Distinct Where DATA SOURCES 68 5 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the section Fields page 68 6 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Path and its symbol are displayed in the Tree View window 7 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File g
334. other cases where the validity or sequence of the KeyField value may be open to question other types of errors could occur which might allow for subsequent output to the new Source File PUT Target This format of the PUT command is used to dynamically select one or more detail or total records for output to a Report or Target File It is allowed only within report and Target File procedures Detail records may be selected for output in Report or Target File initial input or end of file procedures Total records may be selected for output in Report or Target File total or end of job procedures STRUCTURED EDITOR 231 A PUT command in a Report or Target File detail procedure deactivates the automatic writing of all detail records for that Report or TargetFile for all non excluded records From a Report or Target File detail procedure the PUT command has the effect of Sending each specified DETAIL format to the internal sort if SORT was specified on the REPORT or TTARGETFILE command Sending each specified DETAIL format to the Report or Target File if no sort was requested and the DETAIL format does not include the ACCUMULATE option From a Report or Target File detail procedure only the PUT command has the effect of accumulating the specified DETAIL format field values if the DETAIL format specified ACCUMULATE If no PUT command is coded in a report s or TargetFile s detail procedure all detail records for that Report or
335. ource field will be used instead The mapping is displayed in green This is mainly used with on the fly creation of target files Show MSL Procedure Mappings When selecting this option all fields used in procedures will be displayed in purple Show Mapping Overview Displays an extra window underneath the overview of the mappings 8 The mappings are created If you open a Target Field the value will be displayed as follows MPLOYEE NUMBER Gw Dictionary Field EMPLOYEE NUMBER PP_EMPLOYEE Je Fill Opin SkipLines 7 C Skip 7 Short The commands used are explained in the Structured Editor page 186 chapter In case of a Data Source mapping green line the Data Source property will be obtain the defined value IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 CHAPTER 10 Work Fields Work Fields are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned directly to a Model Apart from Work Fields it is also possible to assign Data Sources Data Targets Program Procedures and Public Procedures to a Model You will define a Work Field for a Model if you want to use temporary fields to perform calculations that do not have to be immediately stored in a Source or Target Field 10 1 Work Fields Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Right click the Model name and select Add gt Work Field The Work Field Properties window is displayed DEPARTMENT ARRAY New Work
336. ourceRecord name identifies a record to be passed to the No external subroutine You can include up to 16 record names with this command The named records will be made available to the subroutine for processing TargetRecord name TargetRecord name identifies a record to be passed to the No external subroutine You can include up to 16 record names with this command The named records will be made available to the subroutine for processing Remark Note that external subroutines almost always demand that A fixed number of records fields should be made available by the calling program De by your program request Each record field made available by the calling program is in exactly the same internal data format as is expected by the subroutine The records fields named in the field name list appear in a predefined sequence Failure to adhere to these requirements may result in unpredictable action on the part of the invoked subroutine PUT Source This format of the PUT command is used to write a record to an output Source File which is NEW CONTROLLED from within any procedure You can only write sequentially and to new output Source Files defined as type SEQUENTIAL INDEXED or VSAM You cannot use the system to update existing Source Files and you cannot create type RANDOM or database Source Files Format PUT record name STRUCTURED EDITOR 229 Elements Description Element Description Required record
337. ow of the matching Work Field e Ifyou delete the name of the Sort Field from the field first and then click the Browse button the list of Fields that can be selected as Work Fields is again displayed GroupBy Fields It is interesting to define one or more GroupBy Fields for your Target if you want to calculate a Total value of a combination of fields Use this field as follows 1 Click the New button The list of available Target and Work Fields is displayed 2 Select the required field and click OK Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath e Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically 3 The following panel is displayed T01 datawarehouse BRK date_of_hire KE Exercise 0 T0i datawarehouse BRK date_of_hire GroupBy Field Technical GroupBy Field Properties Name GroupBy Type Lines To Be Skipped 1 E Target Field T01 date_of_hire T01 PP_employee E Available fields AN Calitinnc MeraCiite MeraMa MAMACED Percacer 212 KAN Solutions VIETASUITE METAIVIAP MANAGER RELEASE 0 1 5 9 2 DATA TARGETS 111 Field Meaning Name This field contains the name of the GroupBy Fi
338. owing context menu is displayed Add D Sub Source Field Find Ctrl F Find Net B Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All Properties Remove Del Go CN1Evtarnal Arra Option Meaning New Select this option to add a Source Field See Source Fields on page 58 Add gt Sub Source Field Select this option to add a Subsource Field In the current version of MetaSuite all fields and subfields are automatically added when adding a record In earlier versions however you had to add all fields one by one This option can be used for example to add subfields to old Models Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Source Field s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove the selected Source Field IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 26 Record Procedure Context Menu If you right click a Record Procedure name in the
339. page 111 IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 35 Option Meaning Mapping Wizard Select this option to start the Mapping Wizard The Mapping Wizard can assist you in defining one to one mappings between Source and Target Fields See Mapping Wizard on page 130 Add gt Target Field Select this option to add a Target Field to the selected Target Record See Target Fields on page 114 Create a Copy Select this option to create a copy of the Model Up The Up and Down options allow to reorder objects Down In the Tree View the objects are ordered per type If there are at least two objects of the same type the Up and Down options become available You can only reorder objects of the same type Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific object type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific object type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific object type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Target Records Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Target Records on page 111 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove the selected Target Record from
340. pe numeric date or alphanumeric s Null indicator move If both fields have a null indicator assigned to them the null values will be copied from the Source Field to the TargetField e Null field move If the Source Field is null then the Target Field value will be initialized automatically spaces for alphanu meric fields zeroes for numeric fields independent of the fact that the Target Field is nullable or not e Not null move IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 190 If the Target Field is nullable and the Source Field is not the Target Field null indicator will be set to not null Those rules about nullability are not applicable for arithmetic operations or concatenations e Truncation rules receiving field smaller than sending field follow the COBOL standards numeric fields will be truncated to the left and alphanumeric fields to the right Filling rules receiving field larger than sending field follow the COBOL standards numeric fields will be filled with zeroes at the left and alphanumeric fields will be filled with spaces at the right Format 2 Field name Record name SYS STATUS SYS NULL VALUE Rules The following rules apply This is a practical way to initialize a Field or a Record e The field or record will be initialized via the standard COBOL initialization s If the field is nullable the status will be set to null Format 3
341. pecify the maximum number of errors to be trapped and excluded e Instruct the system to display an error message only once when it first encounters an invalid value e Instruct the system to ignore all limits errors The normal system action when an invalid limit is encountered is to print an error message and bypass the processing of the record containing the invalid data Usage SYS LIMITS CHECK number gt OFF gt IGNORE Number is used to specify a number of invalid values to be trapped Trapped errors are listed in the error listing and excluded from the run Once the indicated number of errors have occurred the system will simply ignore all subsequent limits checking OFF is used to specify that although the system will perform error checking it will print an error message only for the first error it encounters not for any subsequent errors The system will bypass processing of the record containing the invalid data IGNORE is used to instruct the system not to perform any limits checking 21 15 SYS NUMERIC CHECK The SYS NUMERIC CHECK runtime parameter is used to control the system s error handling for invalid numeric input fields You can Specify the maximum number of invalid numeric fields to be trapped reported on and excluded e Instruct the system to display an error message only once when it first encounters an invalid field Instruct the system to ignore all invalid numeric data
342. ping Rule A definition of a mapping from a source field to a target field Mapping a field means copying its content Wizard A built in step by step function to perform a task Public Procedure A Public Procedure can be called at any time in the programming sequence The DO operator calls it to be executed once or in a loop It is advised to use a Public Procedure if you have large blocks of logic or logic that has to be executed more than once Program Procedure A Program Procedure can be called at two positions in your program e At Program start use it to initialize your work fields e At Program end use it to process job level totals or statistics Path Paths can be defined for Source Files that are e SOL files the Path indicates to the Model which Record Information the File contains e Multi Record SOL files the Path contains up to 50 Path Records in which you define inner joins between the File Records e Multi Record non SQOL files you can combine up to 50 Records of the same File into a Path The purpose is to define the subordinate Records and the Relationships between the Records Command Language MetaSuite specific language allowing the definition of procedures and mapping rules IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 CHAPTER A Prerequisites for Using MetaMap The following prerequisites must have been met before you can use MetaMap Manager All procedures you need to follow to obtai
343. pose you need a sample of post codes and communes You first select a random post code from a table containing the communes Next you want to select the commune corresponding to this post code This can be done by setting this flag Perform an integrity check and Set this flag if you do not want to select a value but if exclude if not OK you just want to verify that the target field value is available in the selected table 10 The following buttons are available Button Meaning Help Display the on line help files lt Back Return to the previous screen Save Save the active Model Generate Generate the test data IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 TEST DATA WIZARD 162 Button Meaning Finish Close the Test Data Wizard The changes to the Model will be displayed in the Tree View but have not yet been saved at this stage Cancel Close the Test Data Wizard without generating or saving any changes IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 CHAPTER 14 Transformation Programs You create a Model in order to define the transformation rules between the available Data Sources and the required Data Targets Once this work is finished you need to use this Model to generate the Transformation Program Subsequently you need to execute this Transformation Program 14 1 Generating a Transformation Program 1 Open the required Model Click the Generate Active Model
344. possible to assign a Source Record page 56 to an External Array You will define an Array Procedure for an External Array if you want to define a filter or a selection to the External Array before it is used for the binary or serial search You can define only one Array Procedure for each External Array Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required External Array is displayed 3 Right click the External Array and select Add gt Array Procedure The Array Procedure Properties window is displayed Comman X S03 ADAB JOB TITLE CODE Array Procedure x CASE a SampleModel 01 External Array Array Procedure Array Procedure COMPUTE qc CONTINUE Technical Business DEBUG Array Procedure Properties pe Name EXCLUDE EXEC IDMS EXEC SQL EXIT GET HALT IF INVOKE NEXT PUT REM SAMPLE SET Source Field Source File Source Record START SYS APPLICATION SYS APPLICATION GROUP SYS AUTO SQLCODE SYS DATE SYS DB CONNECT SYS DB DATABASE SYS DB PASSWORD SYS DB USER SYS INVOKE RETURN SYS LINE NUMBER alila J r SYS PAGE NUMBER SYS RETURN CODE E Delete A 2 Im Two tabs are available Technical and Business 4 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections e Technical Tab page 80 e Business Tab page 81 DATA SOURCES 80 5 Apply or
345. r Random Base Number provided there has been no change in the number or order of records on the Source File All of the sampling techniques employ at one time or another the random number generator supplied with the system This random number generator uses the multiplicative congruence technique with a period of 2 to the 32nd power IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 TEST DATA WIZARD 155 7 2 Systematic Skipping Test Data Wizard employee master Test Data Wizard gt Sampling Method gt Parameters Select sampling options for the method Systematic Skipping The following fields are available Field Meaning Interval The number of records to be skipped before each record or group of records is selected You can also enter the name of a non subscripted integer Work Field Start Record The record number of the first record to be included in the sample You can also enter the name of a non subscriptive integer Work Field If omitted a random starting point in the range from 1 through n will be selected by the generated program where n is the interval specified above Cluster Size The number of contiguous records to be included in the sample If omitted it defaults to 1 You can also enter the name of a non subscriptive integer Work Field Random Base Number A one to eight digit integer or integer Work Field to be used as a seed by the random number generato
346. r This seed is not itself the first random number used but it is the starting point for the calculation used to generate the first random number If this specification is omitted a random number seed will be generated from the computer s clock The advantage of specifying a Random Base Number is that you can duplicate a sample by later entering the same value for Random Base Number provided there has been no change in the number or order of records on the Source File All of the sampling techniques employ at one time or another the random number generator supplied with the system This random number generator uses the multiplicative congruence technique with a period of 2 to the 32nd power IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 TEST DATA WIZARD 156 7 3 Fixed size Test Data Wizard gt Sampling Method gt Parameters _ Select sampling options for the method Fixed size The following fields are available Field Meaning Sample Size The exact number of records to be included in the sample You can also enter the name of a non subscripted integer Work Field Random Base Number A one to eight digit integer or integer Work Field to be used as a seed by the random number generator This seed is not itself the first random number used but it is the starting point for the calculation used to generate the first random number If this specification is omitted a random number seed will be gene
347. r 1600 The date format that is returned is determined by the date format of the field to which the assignment is made Format Field name SYS DATE OF INTEGER Field name Field name must be a numeric field of type binary that contains the number of days since the 31th of December 1600 SYS DATE OF INTEGER is implemented as the DATE OF INTEGER function within COBOL Remarks SYS DATE OF INTEGER can not be used on occurring fields Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher SYS DAY OF INTEGER The Field name SYS DAY OF INTEGER is automatically defined in each generated program for numeric fields of type binary either Source Field Work Field or Target Field It will give you the possibility to determine the date value of the binary field for which the value is seen as the number of days since the 31th of December 1600 The date format that is returned is determined by the date format of the field to which the assignment is made STRUCTURED EDITOR 287 Format Field name SYS DAY OF INTEGER Field name Field name must be a numeric field of type binary that contains the number of days since the 31th of December 1600 SYS DAY OF INTEGER is implemented as the DAY OF INTEGER function within COBOL Remarks SYS DAY OF INTEGER can not be
348. r messages will be produced 21 16 SYS READ LIMIT When running a generated program for the first time against a large volume Source File it is often useful to restrict the amount of data to be processed in order to validate that your program will produce the desired results The SYS READ LIMIT runtime parameter is used to specify a maximum number of records to be read by the generated program from any single Source File being accessed When the read limit number is met by any Source File all input Source Files will be treated as if they were at the end of file Do not confuse this parameter with the SYS INPUT LIMIT parameter which sets a maximum number of records to be read and processed i e read and not excluded in a Source File procedure or because of validation errors Usage SYS READ LIMIT number Number will set a maximum number of records to be input to the generated program from any single Source File being accessed 21 17 SYS RECORD SNAP The SYS RECORD SNAP runtime parameter allows you to request a hexadecimal dump of the entire contents of any input record that contains invalid numeric data for up to the number of times identified by an integer Usage SYS RECORD SNAP number Number specifies a maximum number of snapshot dumps to be produced After the specified number of dumps have been obtained the system will print only the hex values of the field s found to contain inv
349. r program request Format SAMPLE sample type RANDOM random number seed The following table lists the available sample types Element Used to Fixed size Define a specific number of records to be included in the sample Percentage Define an approximate percentage of all input records Systematic SKIP Select single records or groups of records separated by a fixed number of records Acceptance Test the occurrence rate of an attribute usually an error situation within the attribute population Discovery attribute Verify that the occurrence rate of an attribute is currently no greater than the expected occurrence rate Variables Find out the materiality of errors in the population rather than just the error occurrence rate Unit variables Favour the larger amount values in the population to be included in the sample Cumulative Find a sample that tests for the overstatement of amounts when few errors are expected Elements Description Element Description Required sample type See table above Yes IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 234 Element Description Required random number Specify a one to eight digit integer or integer Work Field to be used No seed as a seed by the random number generator This seed is not itself the first random number used but it is the starting point for the calculation used to generate the first random number If
350. r slightly fewer records than expected Because only whole records can be selected the result may be calculated to a fractionally different percentage than the one you requested Format SAMPLE PERCENT approximate percent RANDOM random number seed Elements Element Description Required approximate Enter the approximate percentage of records to be included in the Yes percent sample You can also enter the name of a non subscripted Work Field containing a value in the inclusive range 0 00001 99 99999 population Enter the exact count of records contained in the population from Yes count which the sample will be drawn You can also enter the name of a non subscriptive integer Work Field random number See general description above No seed How it works The probability of selecting any record in the population is set to a constant value as follows P percent 100 Where e P is the probability calculated to seven decimal places Thus if you specify a percent of 1 52 the probability of including any particular input record in the sample is 0152000 Each time the SAMPLE command is executed the random number generator is invoked to generate a random fraction in the range of 0000001 through 9999999 If the generated fraction is less than or equal to the calculated probability of inclusion the current record will be included in the sample otherwise the current record will be excluded SAMPLE SKIP This fo
351. r which a Source File key is defined Usage To find the index of a certain row to be found within the external array move the field s full value into a Work Field and then reference the external array fields indexed with the found index When no row can be found in the external array that matches the key value a value 0 will be returned When you are searching in a TABLE Source File you can determine yourself the starting point from which the search must start Before looking for the row to be found by specifying the GET command please make sure that you initialize properly the SourceFile name SYS DIRECT KEY In case you want to make sure that you are searching from the first occurrence onwards please initialize the SourceFile name SYS DIRECT KEY to 0 Table Example The following commands could be used to find the description of a certain department SOURCEFILE DEPARTM CJ NT CODES TABLE Oo EPARTMENT DATA OCCURS 10 FIELD WK KEY TYPE BINARY SIZE 4 FIELD W DEPARTMENTTEXT TYPE CHARACTER SIZE 20 REPORT 1 DETAIL 1 DEPARTMENT W DEPARTMENTTEXT BEGIN REPORT 1 INPUT DEPARTMENT CODES SYS DIRECT KEY 0 GET DEPARTMENT CODES KEY DEPARTMENT WK KEY DEPARTMENT CODES SYS DIRECT KEY IF WK KEY EQ 0 EXCLUDE
352. rated from the computer s clock The advantage of specifying a Random Base Number is that you can duplicate a sample by later entering the same value for Random Base Number provided there has been no change in the number or order of records on the Source File All of the sampling techniques employ at one time or another the random number generator supplied with the system This random number generator uses the multiplicative congruence technique with a period of 2 to the 32nd power 7 4 Acceptance attribute Test Data Wizard gt Sampling Method gt Parameters _ Select sampling options for the method Acceptance attribute IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 TEST DATA WIZARD 157 The following fields are available Field Meaning Confidence Level The statistical probability expressed as a percentage that the selected sample is representative of the population It is a number or a non subscripted Work Field having a value in de range of 80 to 99 9 The larger the value specified here the larger the sample size will be Precision The accuracy of the sample as a percentage of the tolerable error It is a number or a non subscripted Work Field having a value in the range of 0 1 to 99 9 The lower the precision the larger the sample size will be Occurrence Rate The expected occurrence rate of errors in the population expressed as a percentage It is a number or a non subsc
353. rce Records page 56 to a Source File You will define a File Procedure for a Source File if you want to apply filters or other logic to this Source File before processing it to the Targets There are several types of File Procedures depending on the time of execution You can define one File Procedure of each type for each Source File End Of File the File Procedure will be applied once after reading the complete Source File This Procedure type can be used for calculating a certain input field after reading all Records File Input the File Procedure will be applied with each read of a Source Record This Procedure type can be used to check the value in an input field so that a filter or a first selection can be applied e Initial the File Procedure will be applied only once when the Source File is being read This Procedure type can be used to initialize Workfields The Initial Procedure type has four subtypes First Contact This file procedure is executed when a file is opened and read until the first valid input record is encountered The actions that are defined in this procedure precede the actions in the INITIAL procedures The first valid input record is transferred to the Initial Sort Initial Extract or Initial Prepass procedure Initial Sort This procedure will be executed for each valid input record in case the input file is to be sorted The developer uses this procedure for instance in order to rule out some
354. re the generated program is halted RUNTIME PARAMETERS 313 21 13 SYS INPUT LIMIT When running a generated program for the first time against a large volume input Source File it is often useful to restrict the amount of data to be processed in order to validate that your program will produce the desired results The SYS INPUT LIMIT runtime parameter is used to specify a maximum number of records to be input to the generated program from any single Source File being accessed When the input limit number is met all input Source Files will be treated as if they were at the end of file Note that input refers only to those records not excluded in Source File procedures because of validation errors or because of being omitted in a PATH option Do not confuse this parameter with the SYS READ LIMIT parameter which sets a maximum number of records to be read including those records excluded for any reason Usage SYS INPUT LIMIT number Number will set a maximum number of records to be input to the generated program from any single Source File being accessed 21 14 SYS LIMITS CHECK The SYS LIMITS CHECK runtime parameter is used to control the system s error handling when values for an input field are found to lie outside of the limits specified for the field in the MetaStore Limits for a field are defined using the LIMITS option of the ADD FIELD command You can S
355. recommended to document the functions performed by your program Format REMARKS text Text Text consists of any amount of descriptive text For example the following REMARKS command spells out very clearly what s happening in the Source File procedure that follows REMARKS EMPLOYEES FROM ONLY ONE DEPARTMENT ARE SELECTED BEGIN SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER INPUT IF DEPARTMENT NE SELECT DEPT EXCLUDE Note that in the example above a blank line has been left following the REMARKS command so that the comments will stand out in the program request listing Liberal use of blank command lines is another valuable technique for making your programs more readable and hence more easily maintained When coding multiple lines of comments be sure to include the continuation character at the end of each line of text to be continued REMARKS EMPLOYEES FROM ONLY ONE DEPARTMENT ARE SELECTED STRUCTURED EDITOR 233 SAMPLE The SAMPLE command selects a sample of input records using any one of several sampling techniques If a record is selected for inclusion in the sample processing continues with the next command if any in the procedure however if a record is not selected for inclusion in the sample that record is excluded from any further processing in the procedure in which the command is coded Multiple sample commands can be coded in a single report Target File or Source File Procedure with a maximum of 100 SAMPLE commands pe
356. rformed by the File Procedure The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree View window It may contain up to 32 characters Execution Time Select the required execution time from the drop down list The following options are available e First Contact e Initial Sort e Initial Prepass e Initial Extract e File Input e End of File Commands Workspace In this field you can enter the commands that build the Array Procedure These commands are written in MDL MetaSuite Definition language DATA SOURCES 66 1 Enter the required commands By default the list of available commands is displayed at the left of this field Invalid commands are displayed in red Note If you do not need the assisted mode you can switch it off using the icon in the Edit Toolbar and enter the commands manually D Zeil To switch it on again click the Stop Edit icon 2 Select the required command by clicking it The command will be added to the Workspace Any error messages or warnings are displayed underneath the Commands Workspace 3 Once you have finished entering the commands click the Stop Edit icon w The Procedure is verified If syntax errors are found the errors message are displayed underneath the Workspace 4 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Business Tab The following field
357. ripted Work Field having a value in the range of 0 00001 to 99 99999 Random Base Number A one to eight digit integer or integer Work Field to be used as a seed by the random number generator This seed is not itself the first random number used but it is the starting point for the calculation used to generate the first random number If this specification is omitted a random number seed will be generated from the computer s clock The advantage of specifying a Random Base Number is that you can duplicate a sample by later entering the same value for Random Base Number provided there has been no change in the number or order of records on the Source File All of the sampling techniques employ at one time or another the random number generator supplied with the system This random number generator uses the multiplicative congruence technique with a period of 2 to the 32nd power 7 5 Discovery attribute Test Data Wizard gt Sampling Method gt Parameters Select sampling options for the method Discovery attribute IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 TEST DATA WIZARD 158 The following fields are available Field Meaning Confidence Level The statistical probability expressed as a percentage that the selected sample is representative of the population It is a number or anon subscripted Work Field having a value in de range of 80 to 99 9 The lower the precision the larger the sampl
358. rmat of the SAMPLE command is used to select single records or groups of records after skipping a fixed number of records Format SAMPLE SKIP interval start record cluster size RANDOM random number seed Elements Ke STRUCTURED EDITOR 236 Element Description Required interval Enter the number of records to be skipped before each record or Yes group of records is selected You can also enter the name of a non subscripted integer Work Field start record Enter the record number of the first record to be included in the No sample You can also enter the name of a non subscriptive integer Work Field If omitted a random starting point in the range from 1 through n will be selected by the generated program where n is the interval specified above cluster size Enter the number of contiguous records to be included in the sample No If omitted it defaults to 1 You can also enter the name of a non subscriptive integer Work Field random number See general description above No seed How it works To begin the selection process a skip counter is initialized to the user specified or system generated start record value and an include counter is initialized to the user specified or default cluster size Then each time that the SAMPLE command is executed the skip counter is decremented by 1 As long as the value of the skip counter is greater than zero the current record will be excluded
359. ro the PRINT ACCOUNT routine will not be executed at all for the current path With CONTROLLED BY SourceFiles For CONTROLLED BY Source Files there is a record name SYS PATH COUNT field for each record referenced in both the controlled and controlling Source Files This field contains the count of records identified by record name currently in the controlled set of records You should test the value of these fields to determine the contents of the controlled set of records Example If you specify the commands below considering that CUST REFERENCE is a field of the RECEIVABLES Source File SOURCEFILE RECEIVABLES SOURCEFILE CUSTOMER INFO CONTROLLED BY RECEIVABLES KEY CUST REFERENCE The value of CUST REC SYS PATH COUNT will be 1 if there is a CUST REC record to correspond to a given RECEIVABLES record otherwise if there is no corresponding record the value of CUST REC SYS PATH COUNT will be zero 0 On External Arrays For External Arrays the record name SYS PATH COUNT field contains the number of records actually read into storage This number will be less than or equal to the occurs number identified in the External Array Example Assume that the following SOURCEFILE command has been coded SOURCEFILE JOBS TABLE JOB TITLES OCCURS 44 Within a report or Target File detail procedure the JOB TITLES SYS PATH COUNT field will alw
360. rocedural commands except the CASE command false command The ELSE option specifies the action to be taken if the ABSENT No condition tests as false i e the current record from the specified Source File contains a record with a match key equal to the current match key When this occurs the previously described true command will be bypassed and any specified false command will be executed False command may be any procedural command or sequence of procedural commands except the CASE command Cautions L When matching Source Files always code a detail procedure for every report and Target File to determine the present absent status of each Source File before printing or otherwise processing any input data for that Report or TargetFile STRUCTURED EDITOR 225 2 When a Source File is absent from the current matched set the current record for that Source File will be either the next record from the Source File or garbage if the end of file has been reached Accordingly you should never access fields from a Source File that is not present in the current matched set In other words never print sort on or group on a field from an absent Source File PRESENT The PRESENT conditional keyword is used in a Report or Target File detail procedure to determine whether a record from the specified Source File is present in the current set of matched records Conversely the ABSENT condition may be used to
361. ry update program you might want to create a Source File consisting only of those employees from the EMPLOYEE MASTER Source File whose salaries will be adjusted Assuming that the name of the transaction Source File used to apply the salary adjustments is SALARY ADJUSTMENTS the following Source File commands would be coded SOURCEFILE SALARY ADJUSTMENTS SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER CONTROLLED SOURCEFILE EMPLOYEE MASTER PREFIX OUT NEW CONTROLLED The first command identifies the main Source File the second identifies the controlled Source File and the third identifies the new output Source File Note that the prefix OUT will have to be coded to reference all components of the new output Source File The records of the SALARY ADJUSTMENTS Source File are not in any particular sequence so to ensure that the records of the new Source File will be written in KeyField sequence an initial Source File sort is performed This sort will order the data from the SALARY ADJUSTMENTS Source File in sequence by a field named SA EMPLOYEE NUMBER BEGIN SOURCEFILE SALARY ADJUSTMENTS SORT SA EMPLOYEE NUMBER Within a report detail procedure the following commands would be coded to access the EMPLOYEE MASTER Source File record for each employee from the SALARY ADJUSTMENTS Source File copying that record to the output Source File and writing a record to the O
362. s on Editing You can also activate the Structured Editor by clicking the Properties window Toggle Assisted Use this option to display or hide the list of valid commands SH Mode Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type in the EK Tree View or to find a string in a Value or Commands text box Ei Find Next Find the next occurrence Si Find Previous Find the previous occurrence Replace Use this option to search and optionally replace a string in a Value or A Commands text box Undo Use this option to undo the last modification you performed in a Value or Commands text box Redo Use this option to redo the last modification you cancelled in a Value or Commands text box Find Generator When generating a Model the generator messages are displayed in the Message tab Use this option to easily find a message in the displayed generation listing Si 5 Find Next Use this option to find the next generator message Generator Message Find Previous Use this option to find the previous generator message Generator Message IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 5 5 5 6 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 13 Wizard Toolbar If the Wizard Toolbar option in the View menu is checked the Wizard Toolbar is displayed underneath the Menu Bar The Wizard Toolbar contains the following icons Icon Meaning Description Source Wizar
363. s 4 ano 4 WW AppData A Local A Locallow 4 A Roaming A Adobe B CoreFTP J ElmSoft A Help J Identities lt MetaSuite ini 19 01 2012 10 24 Configuration se MetaSuite_filip ini 3 48 Configuration sett o MetaSuite_full ini 9 0 17 Configuration sett o MetaSuite_IKAN ini 27 3 Configuration se New ini 13 01 2012 9 12 Configuration se File name User Profiles ini 2 Select the required INI file and click Open The path of the new INI file is displayed at the bottom in the statusbar CHAPTER 19 Version Management with Source Control It is possible to save multiple versions of a MetaMap Model The versions are saved in a Source Control system like Microsoft SourceSafe and can be retrieved as files written in the MSM MetaSuite Export Language format 19 1 Establishing the Connection Between MetaMap and the Source Control System When you start a new MetaMap session the connection to the Source Control system is not automatically established If you want to use the Source Control you need to establish the connection manually 1 Select Source Control gt Connect to Source Control A screen similar to this one is displayed Log On to Visual SourceSafe Database D Visual SourceSafe 2005 kl Provide your credentials to access this database Visual SourceSafe credentials may be different than your Windows network user name and password Username ano SourceSafe passwor
364. s already processed by the SAMPLE command STRUCTURED EDITOR 241 Once the probability of inclusion of the current input record is calculated the selection process proceeds as described earlier for fixed size sampling Specifically the system generates a random number in the range of 0000001 through 9999999 and if that number is less than or equal to the probability of inclusion the current input record is included in the sample SAMPLE with CUMULATIVE This format of the SAMPLE command is used when you want to test for the overstatement of amounts when few errors are expected that is when the rate of overstatement is relatively low This technique cannot be used for understatement because it never selects zero or negative values Note that a high incidence of error will produce a skewed distribution Format SAMPLE amount field CUMULATIVE confidence level precision expected error rate Elements Element Description Required amount field Enter the name of the field to be sampled It must be a totalable non Yes subscripted field defined on a Source File total value Enter the total value of all positive occurrences of the selected Yes amount field It can be a number or a non subscripted numeric Work Field confidence level Enter the statistical probability expressed as a percentage that the Yes selected sample is representative of the population It is anumber or a non subscripted Work Field having a value i
365. s are available Business Rule page 66 Note page 66 Business Rule In this field you can enter a description of the File Procedure Ifyou want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter Notes for this File Procedure Ifyou want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R DATA SOURCES 67 8 7 Path Paths are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Source File Apart from a Path it is also possible to assign Source Records page 56 and File Procedures page 63 You will define a Source File Path in the following cases SQL data source the Path allows you to tell the Model which Record information is available in the File Multiple Record SQL data source the Path and its assigned Path Records allow you to define inner joins between the Records within the File Multi Record non SQL data source the Path is used to combine multiple Records of the same File in up to 50 Path Records You can do this in order to define the subordinate Record and the Relationship between the Records Note Ifyou define a Path with a Sort Field for a SOL Source file the resulting transformation program will support restartability The COBOL generator will implement the restart ability in the COBOL code if the EXEC mode in the Generat
366. s in the EMPLOYEE NUMBER and EMPLOYEE NAME fields of the EMPLOYEE MASTER Source File when a random access to that Source File fails GET EMPLOYEE MASTER KEY SELECTED EMPLOYEE IF EMPLOYEE MASTER SYS IO STATUS EQ SYS ERROR EMPLOYEE NUMBER 0 EMPLOYEE NAME NOT ON SOURCEFILE If the GET operation fails to locate a record on the EMPLOYEE MASTER Source File with the KeyField value equal to that in the SELECTED EMPLOYEE field the EMPLOYEE MASTER SYS IO STATUS field will be set equal to SYS ERROR When this is the case the EMPLOYEE NUMBER field will be set to zero and the EMPLOYEE NAME field will be set to NOT ON SOURCEFILE Note that when a GET operation fails the fields for that Source File will contain values from the last record retrieved successfully or if no records have been retrieved unpredictable data SYS HIGH VALUE The SYS HIGH VALUE field is defined automatically in all generated programs SYS HIGH VALUE is a full word binary field containing hex high values It can be used in assignment or conditional commands exactly as the COBOL reserved word HIGH VALUE S would be Example The following assignment statement assigns high values to a Work Field WK FIELDA SYS HIGH VALUE The following conditional statement uses high values as a test for the NE operator IF KEY FIELDA NE SYS HIGH VALUE SYS HI
367. s option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically The Parameter File Properties window is displayed DATACOM SALARIES PTH DC RECORD SALARIES f PRD DC RECORD SALARIES S01 multi record master Exercise 0 01 multi record master Parameter File Technical Business Parameter File Properties Name ultirecord master Organization Standard Prefoc S01 Dictionary File multi record master v 1 ke Two tabs are available Technical and Business DATA SOURCES 84 4 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections e Technical Tab page 84 e Business Tab page 85 5 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Parameter File and its symbol H are displayed in the Tree View window 6 Save your changes by doing one of the following Click the Save Active Model kd button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Technical Tab The following fields are available on the Technical tab e Name page 84 e Organization page 84 Prefix page 84 e Dictionary File page 84 Name This field is updated automatically with the name of the Dictionary File when adding the Parameter File If required you can change the name in this field This field will be displayed in the Tree View window It can contain up to 32 characters Organization This read only field displays the File
368. seed value is determined as follows RANDOM SEED SYS TDX SS 1 000 000 SYS TDX MM 1 000 SYS TDX HH 100 01 User values are loaded from the program as specified by the confidence level precision and expected error rate A T VALUE is determined from a table of T values using the following formula STRUCTURED EDITOR 242 LOOK UP VALUE confidence level 079 100 ROUNDEDUP The LOOK UP VALUE will range between 1 and 21 with corresponding T values in the range 1 28 to 3 0 The size of the sample is calculated from the specified confidence level precision expected error rate and the already determined T value The formula used is as follows SAMPLE SIZE A B C Where A expected error rate 1 expected error rate B precision T VALUE SQUARED ROUNDED c A CUMULATIVE TOTAL VALUE Once the sample size has been determined the selection interval is calculated using the following formula INTERVAL CUMULATIVE TOTAL VALUE SAMPLE SIZE A starting point for the selection procedure is determined by multiplying the interval by the random number seed The formula used is as follows CUMULATIVE START POINT INTERVAL RANDOM SEED 1 The record selection process for cumulative sampling includes the following steps e As each record is read the value of field name is added to CUMULATIVE START POINT e If CUMULATIVE START P
369. selecting this option the Se ect Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically Components Overview The components used in the Structured Editor can be divided in the following categories e META Syntax page 187 e Notation Conventions page 188 e Commands page 188 e Miscellaneous Functions page 245 s Variables page 255 e Constants page 264 e Attributes page 274 System Functions MetaSuite Export Language page 283 Each of these categories is explained in a separate section 20 2 META Syntax The following table lists the basic structural elements of the Structured Editor Element Description Parentheses Parentheses enclose a list of items or subscripts A subscript is a numeric value or a numeric variable containing the element number of a table element Commas Commas separate options in a list Spaces One or more spaces serve as a delimiter between the other syntax elements When working with arithmetic expressions there must be at least one space on each side of the expression Full stop Each command must be terminated by a full stop If you use the Options box in the Properties windows select the END option As all new commands must start on a newline the cursor returns to the start of the ne
370. sibility to determine the numeric value of a character field The difference with previous functions SYS NUMVAL and SYS NUMVALLC is that the SYS NOT NUMERIC flag of the receiving field will be set if the original field contents are not numeric Format Field name SYS NUMVALIDATE Field name Field name must be a character field that contains a printed numeric value When the field name contains a numeric value with decimals the expected decimal point is set by the CHANGE DEFAULT DECIMAL command within the MetaSuite generator The CHANGE DEFAULT DECIMAL will switch the representation of a decimal point from Point to Comma and vice versa For more information on the CHANGE DEFAULT DECIMAL command refer to the Generator Manager User Guide Example In order to test if a Work Field is numeric or not the user can use NUMVALIDATE STRUCTURED EDITOR 271 RAWVALUE SUBSTRING T0O1 Car Number Plate 4 3 NUMVAL RAWVALUE SYS NUMVALIDATE IF NUMVAL SYS STATUS EQ SYS NOT NUMERIC DEBUG IS NOT NUMERIC RAWVALUE EXCLUDE ELS Bo DEBUG IS NUMERIC RAWVALUE Remarks SYS NUMVALIDATE can not be used on occurring fields SYS OK The SYS OK Source File status is used to check the success of a GET when performing controlled access to a Source File Following a GET command it is always good practice to check the r
371. sk of that field Spaces will not be truncated Field name Field name identifies a field for which debugging information must No be printed You can specify up to 32 parameters in the DEBUG command SourceRecord name SourceRecord name identifies a record for which debugging No information must be printed You can specify up to 32 parameters in the DEBUG command Examples Example 1 Assume you want to check the EMPLOYEE NUMBER s value for your EMPLOYEE MASTER You might code DEBUG CHECK SOURCES EMPLOYEE NUMBER When you generate your program through the Trace option the following will be printed for all processed occurrences Debug CHECK SOURCES EMPLOYEE NUMBER 03715 Example 2 Assume you want to make a nice debug output with the same information You might code DEBUG employee nr is W NR TOl employee_name STRUCTURED EDITOR 200 When you generate your program through the Trace option the following will be printed for all processed occurrences employee nr 3 715 is IRENE HIRSH employee nr 3 941 is ANNE FAHEY employee nr 1 939 is EMILY WELLMET employee nr 3 502 is CATHERINE WREN DO The DO command is used to execute a public procedure After the public procedure is executed the next command following the DO command will be executed By employing public procedures in a program request you can eliminate the need to write the same sequence of commands over and over A
372. splayed at the bottom of the last page of the printed Report IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 9 7 DATA TARGETS 121 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Target is displayed 3 Right click the Target name and select Add gt End Page The Target End Page properties window is displayed T01 datawarehouse New Title 1 New Heading 1 New End Page Exercise 0 TOi datawarehouse New End Page End Page Technical End Page Properties Name New End Page Text It contains the following fields Field Meaning Name By default this field contains the indication End Page You can change this if required Text Enter the text of the Target End Page as you want it to appear on the Target File or Report 4 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Target End Page and its symbol LE are displayed in the Tree View window 5 Save your changes by doing one of the following e Click the Save Active Model ki button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Target Procedures Target Procedures are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Target Apart from Target Procedures it is also possible to assign Records page 111 to a Target If the Target is a Report you can also assign a Title page 119 a Heading page 119 and an EndPage page 120 You will define a Target Procedure for a Target if you
373. splayed underneath DATA SOURCES 57 Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically The Source Record Properties window is displayed MRM EMPLOYEE DATA Exercise 0 multi record master MRM EMPLOYEE DATA Source Record Technical Source Record Properties Name MRM EMPLOYEE DATA Dictionary Record MRM EMPLOYEE DATA i 5 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the sections Fields page 57 6 Apply or discard your changes The name of the new Source Record and its symbol t are displayed in the Tree View window 7 Save your changes by doing one of the following Click the Save Active Model kd button on the Main Toolbar e Select File gt Save Active Model Fields The following fields are available e Name page 57 Dictionary Record page 57 Name This field is automatically updated with the name of the Source Record when adding the Source Record If required you can change the name in this field This name will be displayed in the Tree View window It may contain up to 32 characters and must be unique in this Source File Dictionary Record This read only field displays the name of the Dictionary Record You can click the Browse button to display its properties DATA SOURCES 58 8 3 Source Fields Source Fields are a type of MetaMap Objects that
374. ss tab e Business Rule page 111 e Note page 111 Business Rule In this field you can enter a description of the Target If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Note In this field you can enter additional information pertaining to the Target If you want to enter text in RTF Rich Text Format right click and select RTF from the context menu or use the shortcut CTRL R Target Records Target Records are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Target File DATA TARGETS 112 Apart from Target Records it is also possible to assign Target Procedures page 121 a Target Title page 119 a Target Heading page 119 and a Target EndPage page 120 Procedure Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Target is displayed 3 Right click the Target name and select Add gt Target Record The Target Record properties window is displayed _ T0l datawarehouse e BRK employee_number TO01 New Target Record Exercise 0 T01 datawarehouse T01 New Target Record Target Record Technical Target Record Properties Name Dictionary Record E X V Detail Total Page Prefix Column Separator Row Terminator 4 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the section Fields page 112 5 Apply or discard your changes Th
375. ssing CASE The CASE command is used to select and execute a command or a series of commands based on the value of a single field The value of that field is tested against a series of value expressions in sequence as specified The first time a value expression tests as true the command or series of commands following that expression will be executed and all subsequent components of the CASE command will be ignored If the value of the field does not satisfy any of the specified tests the optional ELSE command will be executed if coded The CASE block can be terminated by means of END CASE Format CASE field name test true command ELSE false command END CASE Elements Description Element Description Required field name The name of the field whose value is being tested Yes STRUCTURED EDITOR 197 Element Description Required test At least one test consisting of a relationship and one or more values Yes must be coded Refer to the section Conditional Keywords page 300 for an overview of the allowable test specifications A note is appropriate here about the order of tests Since each test will be performed in the sequence specified it is important that you code your tests beginning with the most restrictive and ending with the least restrictive true command A true command must be coded for each specified test The command Yes associated with the first test found to be true will be execu
376. ssing by the external function is completed control returns to the command immediately following the USER FUNCTION External functions can be used to perform special security functions to compress or expand data or to perform other types of processing operations unique to your site One or more fields from the generated program can be made available passed to the external function and these fields may be modified by the function The name of the function is limited to 8 characters The returned value can be a numeric value an alpha numeric value or a data field Format FUNCTION Function name Field name Litteral Elements Description Element Description Required Function name Function name identifies the user function to be executed Yes Field name Field name identifies a field to be passed to the external No subroutine You can include up to 16 field names with this command The named fields will be made available to the subroutine for processing You should not name numeric Source Fields in the field name list because in the process of validating a numeric input field the system may convert that field to a different internal data type and size than was originally defined for it When you need to pass the value of a numeric input field to an external subroutine you should define a Work Field with the internal data type and size expected by the subroutine move the input field to the Work Field and then n
377. stance this directory is named GENFujitsu_Windows After having copied a script you can customise it to your needs You can use the following parameters 1 program name 2 lt gen gt the generator name 3 lt mgl gt the lt mgl gt folder 4 lt mrl gt the lt mrl gt folder Note All messages pertaining to the Packaging process are displayed in the Output Window CHAPTER 17 Display Options It is possible to customize the font font color and background color in text editing boxes allowing the introduction of commands in MXL MetaSuite Export Language Value boxes on Target Field Properties windows Commands boxes on Procedure Properties windows Select Options from the Tools menu The following window is displayed RaBbCcXxYyZz Foreground HB Black Background HB Bleck It contains two sections Keyword Format on the left Fonton the right Specifying color settings You can specify the color settings for the following items e Text Selected Text s Number e Operator Comment System String Comparison e Loop Command Conditional DISPLAY OPTIONS 179 Select the required item If you want to modify the color settings clear the checkbox Automatic next to the Foreground drop down list and choose your preferred color for that item If you select Automatic the default setting will be applied The new se
378. t Save Active Model Fields The following fields are available e Name page 68 s Entry Record page 68 e Distinct page 68 e Where page 68 e Input Order Fields page 69 Name This field is updated automatically with the name of the Entry Record when you select it in the Entry Record field below After having made the selection you can change the name in this field The name in this field will be displayed in the Tree Window preceded by the PTH indication It can contain up to 18 characters Entry Record Select the Record to be added to the path Distinct This checkbox applies for SQL Source files Select this checkbox if you want to use the SELECT DISTINCT SQL statement instead of the normal SELECT statement Per key only one record will be selected In other words all selected rows will have a unique key duplicates will be removed Clear this checkbox if you do not want to eliminate duplicate values Where In this field you can enter a clause containing a select statement The data retrieved from the Data Source are based on this statement 8 8 DATA SOURCES 59 Input Order Fields This field applies for SQL Data Sources The Records that belong to the same Path Level will be ordered by this Key Source Path Records Source Path Records are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Source File Path You will define a Source File Path Record if you work with a Multip
379. t that a numeric field be truncated at print time to a specified unit value Select the required option from the drop down list The following options are available Option Meaning Hundred Select this option if you want the numeric value to be divided by hundred at printing time Million Select this option if you want the numeric value to be divided by a million at printing time Thousand Select this option if you want the numeric value to be divided by thousand at printing time Units Select this option if you do not want to alter the numeric value at printing time DATA TARGETS 119 9 4 Target Titles Target Titles only apply to Target Reports You can assign one Target Title to each Target Report The Title will be displayed on top of every page of the printed Report 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Target is displayed 3 Right click the Target name and select Add gt Title The Target Title properties window is displayed T01 datawarehouse Y T01 employee_name V New Title Exercise 0 T0i datawarehouse New Title Title Technical Title Properties Name New Title Text It contains the following fields Field Meaning Name By default this field contains the indication New Title You can change this if required Text Enter the Target Title as it will appear on the Target File or Report 4 Apply or discard your changes
380. tains floating point numbers stored in an encoded exponential form Graphic This datatype is currently not supported Hexadecimal This datatype indicates that any hexadecimal characters are allowed within the field Long Varchar This datatype is currently not supported Long Vargraphic This datatype is currently not supported Numeric This datatype indicates that any the field contains decimal numbers in a printable character format this means that a single digit is stored per byte Printed Numeric This datatype indicates that the field contains a printed numeric value The format in which the printed numeric value is displayed must be defined in the Edit Mask See Edit Mask on page 139 Printed Numeric This datatype indicates that this is a National field that contains a numeric value The National format in which the PRN NATIONAL value is displayed must be specified with the EDIT option Varchar This datatype indicates that the field is a character field of variable length Vargraphic This datatype is currently not supported Date Format If the field must contain a date select the required date format from the drop down list The system automatically validates date fields whenever they are referenced in a MetaMap Model and automatically converts date fields whenever they are compared to another date or used in a calculation In all the available formats YY or YYYY stands for the year and MM stands for
381. ted all others will be ignored True command may be any command or sequence of procedural commands except another CASE command or an IF command In other words the true command may not contain conditional expressions The NEXT command may be used to exit the CASE statement If the true command consists of two or more procedural commands you may find it useful to code a DO command and to place the series of commands to be executed in a separate public procedure referenced by the DO command This not only simplifies the coding of the CASE command but makes your program easier to read and maintain false command The ELSE option is used to specify a false command which will be No executed only if every test in the CASE command is evaluated as false False command may be any command or sequence of commands except another CASE command or an IF command In other words the false command may not contain conditional expressions Refer also to the section Conditional Keywords page 300 Examples Example 1 Field name To set a numeric work field named TAX RATE according to one of several possible values of the STATE CODE field you might use the following CASE command CASE STATE CODE EQ MA TAX RATE EQ VT TAX RATE 04 EQ CTY TAX RATE 07 EQ ME TAX RATE 03 ELSE TAX RATE 0 END CASE ED IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 1
382. the EOJ statistics will contain such information as The number of records read and processed from the file The number of records excluded by user code or error processing The number of records sorted or extracted in an initial sort procedure Note that this number will be one higher than you might expect because a control record is written to each of these files The number of buffers constructed and processed if a PATH was defined for the Source File The number of the errors for each type of error that occurred during file processing Target File or Report End of Job Messages Target File EOJ messages summarize the processing of the Target Files and Reports produced by the program There will be one set of messages for each Target providing information such as The number of input records read and processed by the Target The number of input records excluded from the Target either by user code or due to computational errors e The number of detail records written to the Target The number of total records written to the Report The number of the errors for each type of error that occurred during Target processing Program Exit Codes The following message appear in the PPTLST file ExecName lst if problems occurred with a generated MetaSuite program at execution time Progr am system exit status Xxxx where xxx is replaced by one of the 4 digit codes from the following table Code Meaning
383. the FIRST record of the group subgroup will represent the whole group If at least one target sort field is defined the LAST record of the group subgroup will represent the whole group It s up to the developer to decide if there is a need to exclude some of the group levels or the detail level from being put For this matter please refer to the SYS GROUP and SYS GROUP LEVEL keywords in this manual Unlike the SORT fields order the order of defining the GroupBy fields is from the smallest detailistic level up to the largest supergroup level Defining group levels is a pre requisite to be able to set the TOTAL flag and to define ACCUMULATE fields The accumulation will be performed in the numeric accumulator fields of the group subgroup representatives Sort Fields It is interesting to define one or more Sort Fields for your Target if you want to change the way the Target is sorted Click the New button and select the required Target or Work Field s from the list The Target Sort Field Properties Window will be displayed For more information refer to Sort Fields page 109 When sort fields are defined on target records a so called target sort will be performed The sort fields are ordered from the most significant sort key highest sort level to the least significant fastest changing sort key Te MetraMap MANAGER TE METAMAP MANAGER IKAN Solutions METASUI DATA TARGETS 129 4 Make the required selections an
384. the Statusbar is displayed in the bottom right corner of the screen If the Properties window of an MetaMap Object a Model a Source File a Procedure etc is the active window in the Workspace the Statusbar contains the following information for this Object Creation timestamp Last Update timestamp Both timestamps are displayed in the following format YYYY MM DD HH MM Where YYYY indicates the year e MM indicates the month e DD indicates the day e HH indicates the hours e MM indicates the minutes Docking a Window Dockable windows are windows that align themselves with the edge of another interface element another window or properties window 1 Click the window title bar and keep the mouse button pressed 2 Drag the selected window to the required position The window you are repositioning is displayed in grey and positioning anchors are displayed on the screen METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 45 3 Place the cursor on the anchor of your choice and release the mouse button File Edit View Tools Source Control Help OSES Oee analSasielalr gt Fe Kimad blo En Y EI SampleModel_ann msm 03 datawarehouse 503 PP_employee CC SampleModel z i Ga Saas ras SampleModel 03 datawarehouse Parameter File Gr S02 datawarehouse 1 Technical i Business t i S01 External Array 8 503 datawarehouse Parameter File Properties an Du TO1 Target Name i Pe Program Procedure S
385. the month DD stands for the day within a month and DDD stands for the day within the year When the format contains a this indicates the date delimiter that is used Data formats with a are only supported for CHARACTER and VARCHAR Field types When the data format does not contain a the different parts in the date are not delimited by a special character The Date format list is accessible for the following Field Types e Binary Binary Native e Character e Decimal e National e Numeric e Varchar Wopk FIELDS 139 Note When a date format is chosen MetaStore Manager will reset the size of the field to the size that corresponds to the chosen date format Decimals If the field type allows the definition of decimals this field contains the number of decimals Decimals can be entered for the following Data Types e Binary Decimal e Numeric If the field type does not allow the definition of decimals this field contains the default value 0 Edit Mask This field is mandatory for PRINTED NUMERIC fields but optional for other field types It indicates how the alphanumeric values must be formatted Note When the Edit Mask is set for a printed numeric field MetaMap will reset the size of the field to the size that corresponds to the chosen Edit Mask You can enter the characters defining a Mask in this text field This Mask will override the default mask for the field There is a default
386. this Source File The Matchings themselves can only be defined with the Matching Wizard See Matching Wizard on page 99 Controlled By This field becomes accessible when the Automatic checkbox above is cleared It is used to define the File which contains the Control Key used for controlling this Source File This Control File is one of the other Source Files assigned to the MetaMap Model Perform the following steps to select the Control File 1 Click the Browse button next to the selection box The Source Files assigned to this Model are displayed DATA SOURCES 55 Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Show all When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath e Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically Select the Source File that should control this one and click OK The name of the selected File is displayed in the Controlled By field Note Ifyou click the Browse button while a Control File was already selected the Properties window of this Control File is displayed Control Key This field becomes accessible when you have selected the Control File in the Controlled By field above It allows you to select the Key field belonging to the selected Control File which will c
387. tion User ID Enter the User ID you want to use to connect to the MetaSuite Repository through ODBC Password Enter the password associated with the selected User ID Data Source Name Select the required ODBC data source from the drop down list This drop down list contains all DSNs defined on your machine Database Enter the name of the database where the MetaSuite Repository is implemented Owner Enter the name of the owner of the Repository Tables if this Owner ID is different from the User ID Note The default values that may be present in the fields match the ones defined during the installation of the program For more information refer to the Installation and Setup Guide 2 Click OK The MetaMap Manager opening screen appears File Edit View Tools SourceControl Help Menu Bar PD BSESOOM AER SVIBEIAMlN Main Toolbar Edit Toolbar G VOLUNTARY DEDUCTIONS 4 3 TO1 datawarehouse Tree View Window Caching completed The dictionary MetaSuite MetaStore contains 59 There is a backup copy of this file Do you want load it Yes Metasuite MetaMap Manager There is a backup copy of this file Do 1 Started loading of C Users ano Documents Metasuite MSM ex0 n e Package or Compile Window H m r Compile IKAN Solutions N V Statusbar CAUsers ano Roaming MetaSuite MetaSuite ini 4 11 2010 17 28 by IKAN fib 4 11 2010 17 28 by IKAN fib N
388. tion Name defined in the Model Properties window page 47 Its extension is mgl and it will be saved in the MGL default directory defined in the current User Profile See User Profiles on page 180 The generated run code will also be named after the Execution Name defined in the Model Properties window page 47 Its extension is mrl and it will be saved in the MRL default directory defined in the current User Profile The procedure to change these default directories is explained in the MetaSuite INI Manager Guide The available compile scripts are located in the system folder that is defined with the INI manager The default is lt ins gt lt gen gt System You can copy the scripts to your personal environment in the TMP folder which is defined with the INI manager as well The default value is lt doc gt lt gen gt tmp where e lt doc gt is the MetaSuite work folder in My Documents e lt gen gt is the directory containing Generator specific files This name always starts with the indication Gen and is followed by the Generator Name For Fujitsu_Windows for instance this directory is named GenFujitsu_Windows After having copied a script you can customise it to your needs You can use the following parameters 1 program name 2 lt gen gt the generator name 3 lt mgl gt the lt mgl gt folder 4 lt mrl gt the lt mrl gt folder Note If there are no compile scripts available
389. tion from Yes count which the sample will be drawn You can also enter the name of a non subscriptive integer Work Field random number See general description above No seed How it works Each time the SAMPLE command is executed the generated program will calculate the probability of the current input record being included in the sample as follows B 85 7 N Where e P is the probability which is calculated to seven decimal places SS is the sample size minus the number of records selected for the sample thus far e Nis the population count minus the number of records previously processed IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 235 Thus if the requested sample size is 10 and the population count is 100 the calculated probability of including the first record in the sample is 10 100 or 1000000 Having established the probability of including the current record in the sample the random number generator is then invoked to generate a random fraction in the range of 0000001 through 9999999 If the generated fraction is less than or equal to the calculated probability of inclusion the current record will be included in the sample otherwise the current record will be excluded SAMPLE PERCENT This format of the SAMPLE command is used to select an approximate percentage of the input records for inclusion in a sample Due to the random selection process used you may obtain slightly more o
390. to a Y using a runtime parameter BEGIN TARGETFILE 4 INITIAL IF WRITE SUMMARY NE Y HALT TARGETFILE IF The IF command enables you to test a condition and execute a command or sequence of commands if the condition is true and optionally to execute an alternative command or sequence of commands if the condition is false IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 STRUCTURED EDITOR 223 For example the following command causes the routine named HOURLY CALC to be executed when the value of PAY CODE is 1 and the routine named SALARIED CALC to be executed for all other values IF PAY CODE EQ 1 DO HOURLY CALC ELSE DO SALARIED CALC An IF command can be terminated by means of END IF Format IF Conditional expression THEN true commands ELSE false commands END IF Elements Description Element Description Required Conditional A conditional expression examines a logical relationship and Yes expression produces a true or false answer A comprehensive description of the use and coding of conditional expressions can be found under Conditional Keywords page 300 true command True command will be executed when the conditional expression Yes tests as true True command may be any command or sequence of procedural commands except a CASE command The NEXT command may be used to exit the IF statement Note that the true command may be another IF command resulting in what is referred
391. to as a nested IF command false command The ELSE option is used to specify a false command which will be No executed when the conditional expression is evaluated as false False command may be any command or sequence of procedural commands except a CASE command The NEXT command may be used to exit the IF statement but it is advised to use the more structured END IF command NEXT and END IF are mutual exclusive Note that the false command may be another IF command resulting in what is referred to as a nested IF command Refer also to the section Conditional Keywords page 300 ABSENT The ABSENT conditional keyword is used in a Report or Target File detail procedure or in a Public Procedure called by a Report or Target File detail procedure to determine whether a record from the specified Source File is absent from the current set of matched records Conversely the PRESENT condition may be used to determine whether a record from the specified Source File is present in the current set of matched records STRUCTURED EDITOR 224 When matching the records from two or more Source Files the system always designates one or more Source Files as being present in the current matched set and may designate one or more Source Files as being absent The current matched set consists of one or more input records whose match keys are equal to the current match key For example assume that three
392. tting will be displayed in the Sample box If necessary do the same for the Background color 3 Specifying font settings by clicking the Choose Font button Specify the Font Font Style and Size and click OK The new settings will be displayed in the Sample box 4 Click Reset if you want to undo any unsaved changes 5 Click OK to save the displayed settings CHAPTER 18 User Profiles In MetaSuite a User Profile is a combination of personalized settings that are saved in an INI file The default name of this INI file is MetaSuite ini and it is located in the users AppData Roaming MetaSuite folder The initial settings were defined during the MetaSuite installation It is possible to change the settings in the MetaSuite ini file or to create additional INI files with different settings The option User Profile from the Tools menu allows to select another User Profile or to reload a modified User Profile so that their settings become active Note The procedure on how to update User Profiles is explained in the MetaSuite INI Manager User Guide 1 Select the User Profile option from the Tools menu A screen similar to this one appears displaying the available INI files St User profile selection mmm mm a 2 D Dil gt Computer OS C gt Users ano AppData Roaming MetaSuite v Ze Search MetaSuite WY Organize New folder 4 W Users Name Date modified Type EN All User
393. ual to value GT value greater than value GE value greater than or equal to value EQ value equal to any value in the list NE value not equal to any value in the list IR low TO high in the range of the low to high values NI low TO high not in the range of the low to high values The first six entries in the table above illustrate simple conditional expressions i e expressions used to compare a single field to a single specified value Any conditions to be tested can always be broken down into a series of simple conditional expressions The last four entries in the table illustrate the use of conditional expressions to compare a single value with multiple values Ifa single value must be compared to multiple values the use of any of the last four formats of the conditional keyword not only reduces the amount of coding required but optimizes the code produced by the system The use of each of the last four formats of conditional expressions is illustrated below TESTING FOR A VALUE EQUAL TO ONE OF THE VALUES IN A LIST When a list of values follows the EQ relational operator the system will test the value of each entry in the list in sequence as specified against the value of the selected field The first time that a condition is found to be true the conditional expression is considered to be true and no further tests are performed See Example 1 Testing for a value equal to one of the values in a list on page 303
394. urrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Se this option to display the Target Title s Heading s or EndPage s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings Please refer to Target Titles page 119 Target Headings page 119 and Target End Pages page 120 You can also access the appropriate Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove the selected Target Title Heading or EndPage IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 38 Target Procedure Context Menu If you right click a Target Procedure name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed Ctrl F Find Next B Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All Option Meaning New Select this option to add a new Target Procedure See Target Procedures on page 121 Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Target Procedure s Properties windo
395. urrent record from the Source File contains a record with a match key other than 12345 this condition tests as false and the fourth detail line is not printed Example 2 False command For example if the current match key is 12345 and the current record from the EMPLOYEE MASTER Source File does not contain that match key value the following command IF EMPLOYEE MASTER PRESENT PUT 4 ELSE PUT 5 tests as false and the fifth detail line is printed If the current record from the EMPLOYEE MASTER Source File does contain a match key equal to 12345 this condition tests as true the fourth detail line is printed and the false command is bypassed Cautions e When matching Source Files always code a detail procedure for every report and TargetFile to determine the present absent status of each Source File before printing or otherwise processing any input data for that Report or TargetFile s When a Source File is absent from the current matched set the current record for that Source File will be either the next record from the Source File or garbage if the end of file has been reached Accordingly you should never access fields from a Source File that is not present in the current matched set In other words never print sort on or group on a field from an absent Source File Nested IF A nested IF command is one that is coded as a component of the true or false clause of another IF command Note
396. uscsessuseneeses 15 Object Types depending from an External Array cccsccsscsscssceseeesecseessecssesecesseeseeceessecseseecseeeeecseesseesseeaecseesgs 16 Object Types depending from a Parameter File 16 Object Types depending from a Target Field or Target Report 16 Object Types depending from a Work Field sirisser ia eie RE E REE EEEE E EEE 18 Bt Context Men s ege de ege A E AE E EE EE OTE E E NERE ENARE 18 Tree View Title BaF rroen n aE E EEEE AEAEE AEE O ATE RRE EERE 18 Model Name Context Men tlie ii scccccsissiceissasehveedsiei cdeges oaia aa a EEN gege a E a EEO EEE aai 19 Source File Context MON ick secceivecdssivscastetenpacsdeeeet teats OE EEA EAE E T AET EEEE EE Eai 21 PathiGOntext Menus eege E E TATEA T OTE EE EE 22 Path ReGOrd Context Mentsen a a A deed de dee 23 Source Record Context Men 24 Source Field Context MON ic ccc ccsciccccssoaticaczessd cacshssscensdunsatcatassde caseseeovendencthsceasededssedgusenacearcdtbedssatessdvsetsnndebesssetes 25 Record Procedure Context MGAU iisccc ics cccsveecd oeeeedectieebes sabe EEEE EOE ENEE E cavdiacceeteavenesduckavecadedseoecossevceuasendeed 26 External Array Context Menu vot vossssicteseacslesiseccnussssue d eE eege eeedelEg geheegt bereede de 27 External Array Source Record Context Men 28 Array Proce dur e Context Menus siisceccieissttcstieccscsevhosessctussssccbivesiedessdesisuesssbeeleteslecustacssetuvhstuss AEN Ed 29 Parameter Fil Context MONG ecserin eeo ri AEE d eege EE
397. used on occurring fields Remark for z OS The COBOL function implementation only works on COBOL 370 or higher SYS EBCDIC The SYS EBCDIC Source Field function converts the Source Field contents from the ASCII character set to EBCDIC character set The EBCDIC character set is used on mainframes z OS BS 2000 ASCII is used on midframes and personal systems Usage Field name SYS EBCDIC Field name Field name must be an alphanumeric field Example Suppose that the user has transferred a fixed length file from Windows to a mainframe system in binary format All binary and packed numeric fields can be read as they are Zoned numeric and Character fields can not be read because they are in ASCII format and they have to be converted before being interpreted Now you can code following lines EBC ZONED 1 ASC ZONED 1 SYS EBCDIC EBC ZONED 2 ASC ZONED 2 SYS EBCDIC EBC CHAR 1 ASC CHAR 1 SYS EBCDIC STRUCTURED EDITOR 288 Remarks SYS EBCDIC can not be used on occurring fields SYS EBCDIC UNICODE The SYS EBCDIC UNICODE Source Field function converts the Source Field contents from the EBCDIC character set to the Unicode character set The EBCDIC character set is a one byte character set which is used on mainframe systems Z OS BS 2000 OS400 VMS Unicode is a multiple byte character set Usage Field name SYS EBCDIC UNIC
398. value character Hex FF T Tab character Hex 09 Row Terminator In this field you can enter the character s used as Row Terminators for this Target Record If the field contains a default value for instance this default value has been defined in the User Profile you are currently using The procedure on how to change this default value is explained in the MetaSuite INI Manager User Guide Target Fields Target Fields are the only type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Target Record METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 DATA TARGETS 115 Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required Target and Target Record are displayed 3 Right click the Target Record name and select Add gt Target Field 4 Select the file description you want to add and click OK The Target Field properties window is displayed T01 DMS Staff Database TO1 STAFF_Departments T01 department x MetaSuite Model 10 T01 DMS Staff Database TO1 STAFF Departments T01 department Target Field Technical Target Field Properties Name Accumulat Data Source E X Position Jg Dictionary Field DEPARTMENT STAFF_DEPARTMENTS De Format Units x Nullability NotNull Skip Lines DS Skip Short 5 Fill out the required fields For a detailed description of the fields refer to the section Fields page 116 6 Apply or discard your changes
399. variable length source files The result of the function SYS RECORD LENGTH on a Source File is the record length of the last record that was read In other words the current record length SourceRecord name SourceRecord name can be any Source Record The result of the function SYS RECORD LENGTH on a SourceRecord is the predefined record length of that record This predefined length can be found in the MetaStore database Example A multi record file has no useful record key The only way to filter one record type from another is the record length The user can do this as follows BEGIN TARGETFILE 1 INPUT IF Personal addressbook SYS RECORD LENGTH STRUCTURED EDITOR 261 NE Address US 30319 SYS RECORD LENGTH EXCLUDE TO1 Address US Address US 30319 SYS RAW BEGIN TARGETFILE 2 INPUT IF Personal addressbook SYS RECORD LENGTH NE Address European 30311 SYS RECORD LENGTH EXCLUDE TO2 Address European Address European 30311 SYS RAW BEGIN TARGETFILE 3 INPUT IF Personal addressbook SYS RECORD LENGTH NE Address Other 30319 SYS RECORD LENGTH EXCLUDE TO3 Address Other Address Other 30319 SYS RAW SYS RESTART The SYS RESTART system variable is automatically defined in each generated program but has no meaning if the program is not generated wit
400. w You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Target Procedures on page 121 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove the selected Target Procedure IKAN Solutions METASUITE METAMAP MANAGER RELEASE 8 1 3 METAMAP MANAGER USER INTERFACE 39 Program Procedure Context Menu If you right click a Program Procedure name in the Tree View window the following context menu is displayed H H S03 datawarehouse 1 ADAB EMPLOYEE CLUSTER SR New Close Model Find Ctrl F Find Net P Find Previous Shift F3 Expand All Properties Remove New Select this option to add a new Program Procedure See Target Procedures on page 121 Find Use this option to find the first occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Next Use this option to find the next occurrence of a specific objetc type Find Previous Use this option to find the previous occurrence of a specific objetc type Expand All Select this option to expand all MetaMap Objects belonging to the selected Object Properties Select this option to display the Program Procedure s Properties window You typically display this window to verify or modify its settings See Program Procedures on page 144 You can also access the Properties window by double clicking the MetaMap Object Remove Select this option to remove the selected Program
401. will execute the public procedure repeatedly until it either times out or encounters a processing error such as an invalid subscript or an arithmetic overflow Examples Example 1 procedure name As an example the function of the following sequence of commands is to locate the last week in which an employee received a pay check The search begins with the current week and proceeds backward through the occurrences of the EMP PAY field until either a non zero value of EMP PAY is encountered or the value of the subscript field WEEK is zero WEEK CURRENT WEEK DO FIND LAST PAY PERIOD WHILE WEEK GT 0 AND EMP PAY WEEK EQ 0 BEGIN FIND LAST PAY PERIOD WEEK WEEK 1 STRUCTURED EDITOR 205 Note that within the program request the public procedure identified by the BEGIN FIND LAST PAY PERIOD command must appear within the scope of the procedure containing the DO WHILE command In other words that procedure must be coded before another BEGIN SOURCEFILE BEGIN REPORT or BEGIN TARGETFILE command is coded Public procedures may be nested which is to say that within the named procedure other public procedures within the scope of the current main Source File Report or Target File procedure can be executed Example 2 conditional expression If the DO WHILE command in the previous example had been coded as shown below WEEK CURRENT WEEK DO FIND LAST PAY PERIOD WHILE EMP PAY WEEK E
402. wing fields are available e Name page 77 e Dictionary Field page 77 Name This field is updated automatically with the name of the Source Field you selected when adding the Source Field If required you can change the name in this field This name in this field will be displayed in the Tree View window It can contain up to 32 characters and must be unique within the Record Dictionary Field This read only fields displays the name of the Dictionary Field You can click the Browse button next to it to display its properties Sub Source Fields for an External Array Sub Source Fields are a type of MetaMap Objects that can be assigned to a Source Field Note This option is only available if not all Source Fields have been added Procedure 1 Open the required Model 2 Expand the tree in such a way that the required External Array Record and Field are displayed 3 Right click the Field name and select Add gt Sub Source Field 4 Select the file description you want to add and click OK DATA SOURCES 78 Two extra options are available at the top right of the pop up window for selecting the required item Showall When selecting this option the Select Item drop down list will be deactivated and all available fields for all categories will be displayed underneath e Indentation When selecting this option all fields displayed will be sorted per structure instead of alphabetically The Source Field Properti
403. ws this is done as follows EXUDB35A EXE W DBCONNECT IKANO20 W DBUSER db2admin SYS AGE DATE The SYS AGE DATE field is defined automatically in all generated programs It contains the default date used in aging calculations stored in the format YYYYMMDD The SYS AGE DATE field may be referenced anywhere in a program request Example The following reference to SYS AGE DATE on a detail line will result in the value of SYS AGE DATE being printed on the detail line of a report DETAIL 1 W TEXT BEGIN REPORT 1 INPUT W TEXT SYS AGE DATE 21 3 21 4 RUNTIME PARAMETERS 309 Runtime Parameter Usage SYS AGE DATE yyyymmdd The value of the default system aging date SYS AGE DATE may be set at execution time using a runtime parameter that provides the date in yyyymmdd format where yyyy is a four digit year mm is a two digit month and dd is a two digit day Each component of the date must consist of all digits and must include leading zeros where appropriate If no runtime parameter is specified for SYS AGE DATE the value defaults to the value of the SYS DATE field Example The following runtime parameter establishes June 1 2012 as default system aging date SYS AGE DATE 20120601 In the generated program any reference to SYS AGE DATE will use the value 20120601 Note that when the AGE function is used a user supplied reference date the r
404. xt available line when you select the END option STRUCTURED EDITOR 188 Element Description Carriage Return The carriage return has no real function but you can use it to improve the readability of your logic If you use the Options box in the Properties windows select the CONTINUE option to insert a Carriage Return Any number of blank lines may be inserted between the commands Single quotes Single quotes are used to enclose string values Maximum string length is 60 A string must be entered on a single line no carriage returns 20 3 Notation Conventions When the format of a command is explained in the Reference sections the following additional characters are used These characters must not be included in the actual command Characters Used for Example Square brackets indicating optional COMMAND OPTION1 OPTION2 command components This means that option 1 and 2 can be added but this is not required Options to a command can be coded in any order Exception the RULE option must be entered as last option Ellipsis indicating that one or COMMAND user value1 user value2 more similar values may This means that option one or more user values may be follow These values are added between the parentheses separated by commas Curved brackets indicating alternative COMMAND OPTION A B and pipes choices of which one This means that if the option is defined it requires one of MUS

MetaMap Manager User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents